Preface, Contents SIMATIC Product Overview Configuration Options ET 200X Distributed I/O Device Installation Wiring Manual Commissioning and Diagnostics General Technical Specifications Technical Specifications 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Appendices Order Numbers A Device Master Files B Dimensioned Drawings and Pinouts C Glossary, Index This manual is part of the documentation package with the order number 6ES7198-8FA10-8BA0 Edition 02/2003 EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Safety Guidelines This manual contains notices intended to ensure personal safety, as well as to protect the products and connected equipment against damage. These notices are highlighted by the symbols shown below and graded according to severity by the following texts: ! ! ! Danger indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage will result if proper precautions are not taken. Warning indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. Caution indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. Caution indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. Notice draws your attention to particularly important information on the product, handling the product, or to a particular part of the documentation. Qualified Personnel Only qualified personnel should be allowed to install and work on this equipment. Qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, to ground and to tag circuits, equipment, and systems in accordance with established safety practices and standards. Correct Usage Note the following: ! Warning This device and its components may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description, and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or recommended by Siemens. This product can only function correctly and safely if it is transported, stored, set up, and installed correctly, and operated and maintained as recommended. Trademarks SIMATIC, SIMATIC HMI and SIMATIC NET are registered trademarks of SIEMENS AG. Third parties using for their own purposes any other names in this document which refer to trademarks might infringe upon the rights of the trademark owners. Copyright W Siemens AG 1999 - 2003 All rights reserved Disclaim of Liability The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents is not permitted without express written authority. Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design, are reserved. Siemens AG Bereich Automation and Drives Geschaeftsgebiet Industrial Automation Systems Postfach 4848, D- 90327 Nuernberg Siemens Aktiengesellschaft We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement with the hardware and software described. Since deviations cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full agreement. However, the data in this manual are reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections included in subsequent editions. Suggestions for improvement are welcomed. Siemens AG 2003 Technical data subject to change. EWA-4NEB 780601602-06 Preface Purpose of the manual The information contained in this manual will enable you to operate the ET 200X distributed I/O device as a DP slave on PROFIBUS-DP. Required basic knowledge General knowledge of automation engineering is required to understand the manual. Scope of validity of the manual This manual is valid for the ET 200X distributed I/O system components specified in Appendix A. This manual contains a description of the components that were valid at the time the manual was published. We reserve the right to enclose a Product Information bulletin containing up-to-date information about new components and new versions of components. Changes since the previous version Compared to the previous version, the manual contains the following changes and additions: DPV1 support of DPV1 of all basic modules with DDB file SI0380**.GS* Note: You can recognize the previous version of this ET 200X manual by the number EWA-4NEB 78060160x-04 in the footer. The current number is EWA-4NEB 78060160x-05. Certification See Section 6.1 Standards, certificates, and approvals. CE certification See Section 6.1 Standards, certificates, and approvals. Identification code for Australia (C-tick mark) See Section 6.1 Standards, certificates, and approvals. ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 iii Preface Standards See Section 6.1 Standards, certificates, and approvals. Position in the information landscape This delivery package (order number 6ES7 198-8FA01-8AA0) consists of 4 manuals with the following contents: BM 147/CPU basic module Distributed I/O Device ET 200X EM300 Motor Starter Addressing ET 200X with BM Installation and Wiring Commissioning Wiring Commissioning and diagnostics and diagnostics 147/CPU with PROFIBUS-DP Commissioning and diagnostics Technical data Order numbers STEP 7 list of operations wiring Commissioning and diagnostics Technical specifications of digital and analog modules Technical data Order numbers Frequency converter EM 148-FC Functions and technical data Order numbers Order numbers for digital and analog modules Guide You can quickly access specific information in the manual by using the following aids: iv At the beginning of the manual you will find a comprehensive table of contents and lists of the figures and tables in the entire manual. In the left margin on each page in every chapter you will find information that provides you with an overview of the contents of each section . Following the appendices, you will find a glossary in which important technical terms used in the manual are defined. At the end of the manual you will find a comprehensive index enabling rapid access to the information you are looking for. ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Preface Points to note In addition to this manual, you will also need the manual for the DP master (see Appendix A). Note You will find a detailed list of the contents of the ET 200X manuals in Section 1.8 of this manual. We recommend that you begin by reading this section so as to find out which parts of which manuals are most relevant to you in helping you to do what you want to do. Recycling and disposal The ET 200X is suitable for recycling on account of its low-emission components. To ensure that your old devices are recycled and disposed of in an environmentally sound way, contact an authorized company for electronic waste. Additional support If you have any questions that are not answered here on the use on any of the products described in this manual, please contact your Siemens office or agency. http://www.ad.siemens.com/automation/partner Training center We offer the relevant courses to get you started more easily with xxx and the SIMATIC S7 programmable controller. Please contact either your regional training center or the central training center in D-90327 Nuremberg. Telephone: +49 (911) 895-3200. Internet: ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 http://www.sitrain.com v Preface A&D Technical Support Available at any time of the day: Nuremberg Johnson City Beijing Technical Support Worldwide (Nuremberg) Technical support Loc. time: 0:00 to 24:00/365 days Teleph.: +49 (0) 180 5050-222 Fax: +49 (0) 180 5050-223 E-Mail: adsupport@ siemens.com +1:00 GMT: Europe/Africa (Nuremberg) United States (Johnson City) Asia/Australia (Beijing) Authorization Technical Support and Authorization Technical Support and Authorization Loc. time: Mon-Fri 8:00 to 17:00 Loc. time: Mon-Fri 8:00 to 17:00 Loc. time: Mon-Fri 8:00 to 17:00 Teleph.: +49 (0) 180 5050-222 Teleph.: +1 (0) 423 262 2522 Teleph.: +86 10 64 75 75 75 Fax: +49 (0) 180 5050-223 Fax: +1 (0) 423 262 2289 Fax: +86 10 64 74 74 74 E-Mail: adautorisierung@ siemens.com +1:00 E-Mail: simatic.hotline@ sea.siemens.com -5:00 E-Mail: adsupport.asia@ siemens.com +8:00 GMT: GMT: GMT: Technical support and authorization staff usually speak German and English. vi ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Preface Service & Support on the Internet In addition to our documentation, you can also find comprehensive information on the Internet. http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support There you can find: Our newsletter with the latest product information. Any documents you may require via our search in Service & Support. A forum in which users and specialists worldwide exchange their experiences. Your contact person in Automation & Drives via the contact database. Information on local service, repairs, spare parts. You will also find lots more under "Services". ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 vii Preface viii ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Contents 1 2 Product Overview 1.1 What are distributed I/O devices? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 1.2 What is the ET 200X distributed I/O device? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 1.3 ET 200X-DESINA/ET 200X-ECOFAST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 1.4 ET 200X with pneumatic functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 1.5 ET 200X with PM 148 DO 4 DC 24V/2A power module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 1.6 ET 200X with SITOP power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 1.7 ET 200X with CP 142-2 communication processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 1.8 Guide to the ET 200X manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Configuration Options 2.1 Brief overview of the different basic modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 2.2 Feeding and looping through the supply voltage for the electronic components/sensors and PROFIBUS-DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Disconnecting ET 200X from the bus and looping through the supply voltage/PROFIBUS-DP (not ET 200X-DESINA/ET 200X-ECOFAST) . . . 2-6 Connecting the load supply voltage to motor starters/frequency converters and looping it through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 2.5 Connecting and looping through the load voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 2.6 Use of the SITOP power power supply unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 2.7 Connecting and looping through load voltages and PROFIBUS-DP to ET 200X-DESINA / ET 200X-ECOFAST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 2.8 Restrictions on the number of modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 2.9 Maximum configuration and configuration options with power modules . . 2-16 2.3 2.4 3 4 Installation 3.1 Installing/deinstalling the ET 200X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 3.2 Installing/disassembling pneumatic components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 3.3 Setting/modifying the PROFIBUS address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 3.4 Terminating PROFIBUS with a terminating resistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 4.1 General rules and regulations for operating an ET 200X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 4.2 Operating the ET 200X on a grounded supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 4.3 Electrical design of the ET 200X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 4.4 Wiring the ET 200X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 Wiring ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 ix Contents 4.4.1 4.4.2 4.4.3 4.4.4 4.4.5 4.4.6 4.4.7 4.4.8 5 6 7 4-14 4-17 4-21 4-22 4-30 4-32 4-33 4-36 Commissioning and Diagnostics 5.1 Configuring ET 200X-DESINA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 5.2 Commissioning and starting up the DP slave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 5.3.4 5.3.5 Diagnostics using LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LEDs on BM 141 and BM 142 basic modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LEDs on basic modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LEDs on expansion modules (except DESINA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LEDs on EM 143-DESINA expansion modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED on SITOP power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 5-13 5-15 5-17 5-18 5-19 5.4 Parameterizable diagnostic messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 5.5 5.5.1 5.5.2 Evaluating ET 200X interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module interrupts (STEP 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module interrupts (COM PROFIBUS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 5-25 5-27 5.6 5.6.1 5.6.2 5.6.3 5.6.4 5.6.5 5.6.6 5.6.7 5.6.8 5.6.9 5.6.10 ET 200X diagnostics with STEP 7 and STEP 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reading out the diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure of the slave diagnosis, ET 200X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Station statuses 1 to 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Master PROFIBUS address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manufacturer identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ID-specific diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel-specific diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analyzing interrupts from station diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27 5-29 5-32 5-34 5-36 5-36 5-37 5-38 5-39 5-43 5-53 General Technical Specifications 6.1 Standards, certificates and approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 6.2 Electromagnetic compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 6.3 Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 6.4 Details of insulation testing, safety class, degree of protection and ' rated voltage of the ET 200X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 Technical Specifications 7.1 7.2 7.3 x Installing/removing connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pinout of the ET 200X-DESINA / ET 200X-ECOFAST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring the connectors for inputs and outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the protective ground to the basic module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting a protective ground to expansion modules with analog inputs and outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plugging the connectors into the ET 200X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring the SITOP power power supply and adapting It to deployment conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V basic module (6ES7 141-1BF12-0XB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST basic module (6ES7 141-1BF01-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG basic module (6ES7 141-1BF40-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Contents 7.4 BM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A basic module (6ES7 142-1BD22-0XB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 BM 143-DESINA FO basic module (6ES7 143-1BF00-0XB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22 7.6 BM 143-DESINA RS485 basic module (6ES7 143-1BF00-0AB0) . . . . . . . 7-28 7.7 EM 141 DI 4 DC 24V expansion module (6ES7 141-1BD31-0XA0) . . . . 7-34 7.8 EM 141 DI 8 DC 24V expansion module (6ES7 141-1BF31-0XA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37 7.5 7.9 EM 141 DI 8 DC 24V DIAG expansion module (6ES7 141-1BF30-0XB0) 7-39 7.10 EM 141 DI 8 DC 24V expansion module (6ES7 141-1BF41-0XA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44 7.11 EM 141 DI 8 DC 24V DIAG expansion module (6ES7 141-1BF40-0XB0) 7-47 7.12 EM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/0.5A expansion module (6ES7 142-1BD30-0XA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51 7.13 EM 142 DO 4 DC 24V/2A expansion module (6ES7 142-1BD40-0XA0) 7-54 7.14 EM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A expansion module (6ES7 142-1BD40-0XB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57 EM 142 DO 8 x DC 24V/1.2A expansion module (6ES7 142-1BF30-0XA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-62 EM 143-DESINA expansion module (6ES7 143-1BF30-0XB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-65 EM 148-P DI 4 DC 24V/DO 2 P expansion module (pneumatic module) (6ES7 148-1DA00-0XA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-70 EM 148-P DO 16 P/CPV10 expansion module (pneumatic interface module for CPV10) (6ES7 148-1EH00-0XA0) . . . . . 7-74 EM 148-P DO 16 P/CPV14 expansion module (pneumatic interface module for CPV14) (6ES7 148-1EH10-0XA0) . . . . . 7-76 PM 148 DO 4 DC 24V/2A power module (6ES7 148-1CA00-0XB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-78 7.15 7.16 7.17 7.18 7.19 7.20 7.21 7.21.1 7.21.2 7.21.3 Expansion modules with analog inputs and outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the analog inputs and outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog value representation for measuring ranges with SIMATIC S7 . . . Analog value representation for the measuring ranges of the analog inputs and outputs (SIMATIC S7 Format) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.21.4 Analog value representation for measuring ranges with SIMATIC S5 . . . 7.21.5 Analog value representation for the measuring ranges of the analog inputs and outputs (SIMATIC S5 format) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.21.6 Behavior of the analog inputs and outputs during operation and in the event of faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.21.7 Connecting measuring sensors to the analog inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.21.8 Connecting loads to the analog outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.21.9 EM 144 AI 2 x U expansion module (6ES7 144-1FB31-0XB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.21.10 EM 144 AI 2 x I expansion module (+/-20 mA) (6ES7 144-1GB31-0XB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.21.11 EM 144 AI 2 x I expansion module (4 to 20 mA) (6ES7 144-1GB41-0XB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 7-83 7-85 7-87 7-88 7-94 7-95 7-103 7-106 7-109 7-111 7-114 7-117 xi Contents 7.21.12 EM 144 AI 2 RTD expansion module (6ES7 144-1JB31-0XB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-120 7.21.13 EM 145 AO 2 U expansion module (6ES7 145-1FB31-0XB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-123 7.21.14 EM 145 AO 2 I expansion module (6ES7 145-1GB31-0XB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-126 7.22 SITOP power power supply 24V/10A (6EP1 334-2CA00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-129 A Order Numbers B Device Master Files C Dimesioned Drawings and Pinouts C.1 Dimensioned drawings - basic modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2 C.2 Dimensioned drawings - expansion modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4 C.3 Dimensioned drawing - pneumatic module EM 148-P DI 4 y DC 24 V/DO 2 y P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5 Dimensioned drawing - pneumatic interface module EM 148-P DO 16 y P/CPV10 and ...14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6 C.5 Dimensioned drawing - power module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7 C.6 Dimensioned drawing - SITOP power supply unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8 C.7 Dimensioned drawings - DIN rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9 C.8 Pinout of the ET 200X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-12 C.9 Pinout of the 8-channel expansion modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-14 C.10 Pinout of the ET 200X-DESINA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-15 C.11 Pinout of the ET 200X-ECOFAST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16 C.12 Pinout of analog inputs/outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-17 C.4 Glossary Index xii ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Contents Figures 1-1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 1-6 1-7 1-8 1-9 1-10 1-11 2-1 2-2 2-3 2-4 2-5 2-6 2-7 2-8 2-9 2-10 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-7 3-8 3-9 3-10 3-11 3-12 3-13 3-14 3-15 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-5 4-6 4-7 4-8 Typical PROFIBUS-DP network installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration of the ET 200X distributed I/O device (example) . . . . . . . . . Configuration of the ET 200X-DESINA/ET 200X-ECOFAST distributed I/O device (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration of the ET 200X-DESINA/ET 200X-ECOFAST distributed I/O device with various expansion modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration of the ET 200X with pneumatic modules (example) . . . . . . Configuration of the ET 200X with pneumatic interface module (example) Assigning addresses to the pneumatic interface module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration of ET 200X with power module (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration of ET 200X with SITOP power (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration of ET 200X with CP 142-2 (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Components and the manuals required for them . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Feeding and looping through the supply voltage and PROFIBUS-DP via a common cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Feeding the supply voltage and PROFIBUS-DP via separate cables and looping them through via a common cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Feeding the supply voltage and PROFIBUS-DP and looping them through via separate cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Feeding the supply voltage separately to each ET 200X and looping PROFIBUS-DP through via a separate cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disconnecting the ET 200X from the bus and looping through the supply voltage/PROFIBUS-DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting and looping through the load supply voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting and looping through the load voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ET 200X with SITOP power 24V/10A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supply voltage and PROFIBUS-DP supplied and looped through with a DESINA hybrid cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration examples with power modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIN rail for installing the ET 200X modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioned drawings of the narrow DIN rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioned drawings of the wide DIN rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing expansion modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixing screws for basic and expansion modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixing screws for motor starters and frequency converters . . . . . . . . . . . . Supply and service lines on pneumatic module EM 148-P DI 4 x DC 24V/DO 2 x P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Central supply of compressed air to pneumatic modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing a valve island with an interface module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions of installation holes on the pneumatic interface module . . . . Setting the PROFIBUS address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Position of the configuration connector on the ET 200X-DESINA/ET 200X-ECOFAST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the PROFIBUS address at the configuration connector . . . . . . . . Connecting the terminating resistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attaching the terminating resistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating the ET 200X with reference potential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Potentials present in an ET 200X configuration with motor starter . . . . . . Potentials present in an ET 200X configuration with frequency converter Potentials present in an ET 200X-DESINA configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Potentials present in an ET 200X-ECOFAST configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . Connector: protective shell with an M16 cable gland . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Snapping the connector into place in the shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the connector from the shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 1-3 1-4 1-9 1-10 1-11 1-12 1-13 1-14 1-15 1-16 1-17 2-4 2-4 2-5 2-5 2-7 2-9 2-10 2-11 2-12 2-17 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-7 3-9 3-10 3-11 3-13 3-14 3-15 3-17 3-18 3-19 3-20 3-21 4-5 4-6 4-7 4-8 4-9 4-14 4-15 4-16 xiii Contents 4-9 4-10 4-11 4-12 4-13 4-14 4-15 4-16 4-17 4-18 4-19 4-20 4-21 4-22 4-23 4-24 4-25 4-26 4-27 5-1 5-2 5-3 5-4 5-5 5-6 5-7 5-8 5-9 5-10 5-11 5-12 5-13 5-14 5-15 5-16 5-17 5-18 5-19 7-1 7-2 7-3 7-4 7-5 7-6 7-7 xiv Bared length of a 5-core cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pinout of the connector for wiring PROFIBUS-DP and the supply voltage for the electronics/sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pinout of the load voltage connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power module with connector and 2 M16 cable glands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pinout of the connector for the BM 143-DESINA FO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pinout of the connector for the BM 141-ECOFAST and BM 143-DESINA RS485 basic modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the protective ground to the BM 141, 142 and 147/CPU basic modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the basic modules BM 143-DESINA FO, BM 143-DESINA RS485, and BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST to protective ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the protective ground to the analog module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plugging connectors into the ET 200X-DESINA/ET 200X-ECOFAST . . . Wired ET 200X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the terminal cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the mains power supply cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Potentiometer R306 for setting the output voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the top section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positions of adapter plate A1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Position of the R230 potentiometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positions of the adapter plate A2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Correlation of DIs/DOs on BM 143-DESINA/EM 143-DESINA with bits of inputs/outputs in the PI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of the inputs in the process image (PI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of the outputs in the process image (PI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start-up of the ET 200X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start-up of the ET 200X-DESINA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start information of OB 40: modules with analog inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start information of OB 40: BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG and EM 141 DI 8 DC 24V DIAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure of the slave diagnosis, ET 200X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure of ID-specific diagnosis for ET 200X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration of the module status for ET 200X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration of channel-specific diagnosis, ET 200X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure of the ET 200X alarm unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure as of byte x+4 for diagnostic interrupt (digital input) . . . . . . . . . . Structure as of byte x+4 for diagnostic interrupt (digital outputs) . . . . . . . Structure from Byte x+4 for diagnosis alarm of EM 143-DESINA modules Structure as of byte x+4 for diagnostic interrupt (analog inputs) . . . . . . . . Configuration as of byte x+4 for diagnostic interrupt (analog outputs) . . . Structure as of byte x+4 for hardware interrupt (analog inputs) . . . . . . . . . Structure as of byte x+4 for hardware interrupt (digital inputs) . . . . . . . . . Basic circuit diagram of the BM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V basic module . . . . . . Basic circuit diagram for the BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST basic module (6ES7 141-1BF01-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic circuit diagram for the BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG basic module (6ES7 141-1BF40-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic circuit diagram of the BM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A basic module . . Basic circuit diagram of the BM 143-DESINA FO basic module . . . . . . . . Basic circuit diagram of the BM 143-DESINA RS485 basic module . . . . . Basic circuit diagram of expansion module EM 141 DO 4 x DC 24V . . . . 4-17 4-18 4-19 4-20 4-21 4-21 4-27 4-30 4-31 4-32 4-34 4-36 4-37 4-38 4-39 4-40 4-41 4-42 4-43 5-3 5-4 5-4 5-11 5-12 5-26 5-26 5-32 5-37 5-38 5-40 5-44 5-45 5-46 5-47 5-48 5-49 5-50 5-50 7-4 7-9 7-14 7-19 7-23 7-29 7-35 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Contents 7-8 7-9 7-10 7-11 7-12 7-13 7-14 7-15 7-16 7-17 7-18 7-19 7-20 7-21 7-22 7-23 7-24 7-25 7-26 7-27 7-28 7-29 7-30 7-31 7-32 7-33 7-34 7-35 7-36 C-1 C-2 C-3 C-4 C-5 C-6 C-7 C-8 C-9 Basic circuit diagram for expansion module EM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V (6ES7 141-1BF31-0XA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic circuit diagram for expansion module EM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V DIAG (6ES7 141-1BF30-0XB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic circuit diagram of expansion module EM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V (6ES7 141-1BF41-0XA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic circuit diagram of expansion module EM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V DIAG (6ES7 141-1BF40-0XB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic circuit diagram of expansion module EM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/0.5A Basic circuit diagram of expansion module EM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A . Basic circuit diagram of expansion module EM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A . Basic circuit diagram for expansion module EM 142 DO 8 x DC 24V/1.2A Basic circuit diagram of expansion module EM 143-DESINA . . . . . . . . . . Basic circuit diagram for EM 148-P DI 4 x DC 24V/DO 2 x P expansion module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pneumatic connection diagram of a 4/2-way valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic circuit diagram of the EM 148-P DO 16 x P/CPV10 expansion module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning addresses to the pneumatic interface module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic circuit diagram for EM 148-P DO 16 x P/CPV14 expansion module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning addresses to the pneumatic interface module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic circuit diagram of power module PM 148 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A (6ES7 148-1CA00-0XB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection of voltage sensors to analog inputs (EM with order number 6ES7 144-1FB31-0XB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection of current sensors (two-wire measuring transducers) to analog inputs (EM with order number 6ES7 144-1GB41-0XB0) . . . . . . . . Connection of current sensors (four-wire measuring transducers) to analog inputs (EM with order number 6ES7 144-1GB31-0XB0) . . . . . . . . Connection of current sensors (four-wire measuring transducers) to analog inputs (EM with order number 6ES7 144-1GB41-0XB0) . . . . . . . . Connection of resistance thermometers to EM 144 AI 2 x RTD (EM with order number 6ES7 144-1JB31-0XB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection of loads to a voltage or current output (analog output; EM with order number 6ES7 145-1FB31-0XB0; 6ES7 145-1GB31-0XB0) . . . Basic circuit diagram of expansion module EM 144 AI 2 x U . . . . . . . . . . . Basic circuit diagram of expansion module EM 144 AI 2 x I . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic circuit diagram of Expansion module EM 144 AI 2 x I (4 to 20 mA) Basic circuit diagram of expansion module EM 144 AI 2 x RTD . . . . . . . . Basic circuit diagram of expansion module EM 145 AO 2 x U . . . . . . . . . . Basic circuit diagram of expansion module EM 145 AO 2 x I . . . . . . . . . . . Basic circuit diagram for SITOP power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioned drawing of BM 141, BM 142, BM 147/CPU basic module . Dimensioned drawing of the BM 141-ECOFAST, BM 143-DESINA basic modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioned drawing of EM 141, EM 142, EM 144, EM 145 expansion modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioned drawing of EM 141 (high design), EM 142 DO 8 x DC 24V/1.2A and EM 143-DESINA expansion modules Dimensioned drawing of the pneumatic module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioned drawing of the pneumatic interface module . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioned drawing - power module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioned drawing of SITOP power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioned drawings of the Narrow DIN rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 7-38 7-41 7-45 7-48 7-52 7-55 7-58 7-63 7-66 7-71 7-71 7-74 7-75 7-76 7-77 7-79 7-106 7-107 7-108 7-108 7-109 7-110 7-112 7-115 7-118 7-121 7-124 7-127 7-129 C-2 C-3 C-4 C-5 C-5 C-6 C-7 C-8 C-9 xv Contents C-10 C-11 C-12 C-13 C-14 C-15 xvi Dimensioned drawings of the wide DIN rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pinout of the ET 200X (BM 141, BM 142, BM 147/CPU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pinout of the 8-channel DI/DO expansion module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pinout of the ET 200X-DESINA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pinout of the BM 141-ECOFAST 8DI basic module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pinout of expansion module with analog inputs/outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11 C-12 C-14 C-15 C-16 C-17 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Contents Tables 1-1 1-2 1-3 2-1 2-2 3-1 3-2 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-5 4-6 4-7 4-8 4-9 4-10 4-11 4-12 4-13 4-14 4-15 5-1 5-2 5-3 5-4 5-5 5-6 5-7 5-8 5-9 5-10 5-11 5-12 5-13 5-14 5-15 5-16 5-17 5-18 5-19 5-20 5-21 5-22 5-23 7-1 7-2 7-3 7-4 7-5 7-6 7-7 Features of the ET200X-DESINA and ET200X-ECOFAST . . . . . . . . . . . Topics of the manuals in the ET 200X manual package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Separate manuals for ET 200X components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brief overview of the different basic modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restrictions imposed on the maximum configuration by the power input DIN rails for installing an ET 200X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outer diameters of pneumatic tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Order of steps for wiring the ET 200X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical specifications of the 5-core cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring rules for connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pinout of the coupler plug for digital inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pinout of the coupler plug for digital inputs (DESINA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pinout of the coupler plug for digital inputs (standard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pinout of the coupler plug for digital outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pinout of the coupler plug for digital outputs (DESINA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pinout of the coupler plug for digital outputs (standard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pinout of the coupler plugs for digital inputs when a Y connector is used Pinout of the coupler plugs for digital outputs when a Y connector is used Switching the output voltage to the bus segment of the ET 200X . . . . . . . Switching over the short circuit response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switching over current limiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display and analysis of the parameters for the DESINA functional input . Software requirements for commissioning an ET 200X (except DESINA) Software requirements for commissioning an ET 200X-DESINA . . . . . . . Integrating the DDB file in the configuration software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements for commissioning the DP slave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Order of steps for commissioning the DP slave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status and error display by means of LEDs on the BM 141 and BM 142 basic modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status and fault displays using LEDs on the basic modules . . . . . . . . . . . Status and error displays by means of LEDs on SITOP power . . . . . . . . Diagnostics messages of the EM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A and PM 148 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic messages for modules with AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic messages for modules with AO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic messages - causes and remedial action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Events that can trigger diagnostic interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reading out the diagnosis of ET 200X with STEP 7 and STEP 5 . . . . . . Structure of station status 1 (Byte 0) ET 200X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure of station status 2 (Byte 1) ET 200X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure of Station Status 3 (Byte 2) ET 200X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure of the manufacturer ID (Byte 4, 5) ET 200X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel-specific error messages to PROFIBUS standard . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel-specific error messages - manufacturer-specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bytes x+4 to x+10 in the diagnosis of ET 200X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bytes x+4 to x+7 in the diagnosis of ET 200X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pinout of the sockets for 8-channel digital inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pinout of sockets X1 to X8 for digital inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pinout of sockets X1 to X8 for digital inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 1-8 1-18 1-19 2-2 2-14 3-2 3-11 4-11 4-12 4-13 4-17 4-23 4-24 4-25 4-25 4-26 4-27 4-28 4-29 4-41 4-42 4-43 5-2 5-8 5-9 5-10 5-11 5-12 5-14 5-16 5-20 5-21 5-22 5-22 5-24 5-27 5-31 5-36 5-37 5-37 5-38 5-44 5-45 5-55 5-56 7-3 7-5 7-8 7-10 7-13 7-15 xvii Contents 7-8 7-9 7-10 7-11 7-12 7-13 7-14 7-15 7-16 7-17 7-18 7-19 7-20 7-21 7-22 7-23 7-24 7-25 7-26 7-27 7-28 7-29 7-30 7-31 7-32 7-33 7-34 7-35 7-36 7-37 7-38 7-39 7-40 7-41 7-42 7-43 7-44 7-45 7-46 7-47 7-48 7-49 7-50 7-51 7-52 xviii for digital inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 Pinout of the sockets for 4-channel digital outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 Parameters of the BM 142 DO 4 DC 24V/2A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20 Pinout of sockets X1, X3, X5 and X7 for digital inputs or outputs . . . . . . . 7-22 Pinout of sockets X2, X4, X6 and X8 for digital inputs or outputs . . . . . . . 7-23 Parameters of the BM 143-DESINA FO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25 Parameters of the BM 143-DESINA FO for digital inputs and outputs . . . 7-26 Pinout of sockets X1, X3, X5 and X7 for digital inputs or outputs . . . . . . . 7-29 Pinout of sockets X2, X4, X6 and X8 for digital inputs or outputs . . . . . . . 7-30 Parameters of the BM 143-DESINA RS485 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32 Parameters of the BM 143-DESINA RS485 for digital inputs and outputs 7-33 Pinout of the sockets for 4-channel digital inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36 Pin assignment of sockets for 8-channel digital inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39 Pinout of socket X1 to X4 for digital inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43 Parameters of the EM 141 DI 8 DC 24V DIAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44 Pinout of socket X1 to X8 for digital inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46 Pinout of sockets X1 to X8 for digital inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50 Parameters of the EM 141 DI 8 DC 24V DIAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51 Pinout of the sockets for 4-channel digital outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53 Pinout of the sockets for 4-channel digital outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56 Pinout of the sockets for 4-channel digital outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-60 Parameters of the EM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-61 Dependencies of digital output values on the operating status of the PLC (CPU of DP master) and L + supply voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-62 Pin assignment of sockets for 8-channel digital outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-64 Pinout of sockets X1, X3, X5 and X7 for digital inputs or outputs . . . . . . . 7-67 Pinout of sockets X2, X4, X6 and X8 for digital inputs or outputs . . . . . . . 7-68 Parameters of the EM 143-DESINA for digital inputs and outputs . . . . . . 7-69 Pinout of the sockets for 2-channel digital inputs (pneumatic module) . . 7-72 Suitable types of oil for compressed air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-76 Pin assignment of sockets for 4-channel digital outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-84 Parameters of the PM 148 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-85 Dependencies of digital output values on the operating status of the PLC (CPU of DP master) and L + supply voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-86 Representation of measuring ranges for analog inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-90 Representation of measuring ranges for analog outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-90 Parameters of analog inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-91 Parameters of analog outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-92 Analog value representation (SIMATIC S7 format) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-93 Measured-value resolution of the analog values (SIMATIC S7 format) . . 7-94 SIMATIC S7 format: representation of the digitized measured value +/-10 V; +/-20 mA (expansion modules with analog inputs) . . . . . . 7-95 SIMATIC S7 format: representation of the digitized measured value 4 to 20 mA (expansion module with analog inputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-96 SIMATIC S7 format: representation of the digitized measured value for the standard temperature range, Pt 100 (expansion module with analog inputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-97 SIMATIC S7 format: representation of the analog output range +/-10 V; +/-20 mA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-98 SIMATIC S7 format: representation of the analog current output range 4 to 20 mA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-99 Analog value representation of the analog inputs (SIMATIC S5 format) . 7-100 Analog value representation of the analog outputs (SIMATIC S5 format) 7-101 SIMATIC S5 format: representation of the digitized measured value +/-10 V (expansion module with analog inputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-102 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Contents 7-53 7-54 7-55 7-56 7-57 7-58 7-59 7-60 7-61 7-62 7-63 7-64 7-65 7-66 7-67 A-1 A-2 A-3 A-4 A-5 A-6 A-7 A-8 A-9 A-10 A-11 B-1 SIMATIC S5 format: representation of the digitized measured value +/-20 mA (expansion module with analog inputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIMATIC S5 format: representation of the digitized measured value 4 to 20 mA (expansion module with analog inputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIMATIC S5 format: representation of the digitized measured value for the standard temperature range, Pt 100 (expansion module with analog inputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIMATIC S5 format: representation of the analog voltage output range +/-10 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIMATIC S5 format: representation of the analog current output range +/-20 mA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIMATIC S5 format: representation of the analog current output range 4 to 20 mA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How the analog input/output values depend on the operating mode of the PLC (CPU of the DP master) and the supply voltage L + . . . . . . . . Behavior of the analog modules as a function of the position of the analog output value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behavior of the analog modules depending on the position of the analog output value in the value range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pinout of the sockets for 2-channel analog inputs (voltage) . . . . . . . . . . . Pinout of the sockets for 2-channel analog inputs (EM 144 AI 2 x I) . . . . Pinout of the sockets for 2-channel analog inputs (EM 144 AI 2 x I, 4 to 20 mA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pinout of the sockets for 2-channel analog inputs (Pt 100) . . . . . . . . . . . . Pinout of the sockets for 2-channel analog outputs (voltage) . . . . . . . . . . Pinout of the sockets for 2-channel analog outputs (current) . . . . . . . . . . . Basic modules - order numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expansion modules - order numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories for ET200X - order numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories for ET 200X-DESINA / ET 200X-ECOFAST - order numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connectors manufactured by Binder - order numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spare parts for ET 200X - order numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network components for the ET 200 distributed I/O system . . . . . . . . . . . MOBY modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manuals for STEP 7 and SIMATIC S7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual for ET 200 in SIMATIC S5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Guide to PROFIBUS-DP and SIMATIC S7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Other features of the modules of the ET 200X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 7-103 7-104 7-105 7-106 7-107 7-108 7-109 7-110 7-111 7-117 7-120 7-123 7-126 7-129 7-132 A-1 A-2 A-3 A-4 A-6 A-7 A-7 A-8 A-8 A-9 A-9 B-2 xix Contents xx ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 1 Product Overview In this Chapter The product overview tells you how to incorporate the ET 200X distributed I/O device into the Siemens programmable controller landscape. The components which make up the ET 200X distributed I/O device Which manuals in the ET 200X manual package contain what information Contents of Chapter Section Subject Page 1.1 What are distributed I/O devices? 1-2 1.2 What is the ET 200X distributed I/O device? 1-3 1.3 ET 200X-DESINA/ET 200X-ECOFAST 1-7 1.4 ET 200X with pneumatic functionality 1-11 1.5 ET 200X with PM 148 DO 4 DC 24V/2A power module 1-14 1.6 ET 200X with SITOP power supply 1-15 1.7 ET 200X with CP 142-2 communication processor 1-16 1.8 Guide to the ET 200X manuals 1-17 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 1-1 Product Overview 1.1 What are distributed I/O devices? Distributed I/O devices - usage When a system is set up, the inputs and outputs to and from the process are often located centrally in the programmable controller. If there are inputs and outputs at considerable distances from the programmable logic controller, there may be long runs of cabling which are not immediately comprehensible, and electromagnetic interference may impair reliability. The use of distributed I/O devices is suitable for such systems: The controller CPU is located centrally. The I/O devices (inputs and outputs) are operating locally on a distributed basis. The high-performance PROFIBUS-DP ensures with its high baud rates that the controller CPU and I/O devices communicate smoothly. What is PROFIBUS-DP? PROFIBUS-DP is an open bus system complying with IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1 with the "DP" transmission log (DP stands for Distributed Peripheral). Physically, PROFIBUS-DP is either an electrical network based on a shielded two-wire line or an optical network based on a fiber-optic cable. The "DP" transmission log allows a rapid, cyclic exchange of data between the controller CPU and the distributed I/O devices. What are DP masters and DP slaves? The link between the controller CPU and distributed I/O devices is the DP master. The DP master exchanges data by means of PROFIBUS-DP with the distributed I/O devices and monitors PROFIBUS-DP. The distributed I/O devices (= DP slaves) prepare the data of the sensors and actuators so that it can be transferred via PROFIBUS-DP to the controller CPU. What devices can be connected to PROFIBUS-DP? Different devices can be connected on PROFIBUS-DP as DP masters or DP slaves provided they behave in accordance with the IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1 standard. You can use devices from the following product families amongst others: 1-2 SIMATIC S5 SIMATIC S7/M7/C7 SIMATIC programmer/PC SIMATIC HMI (operator interface OP, OS, TD) Devices from other manufacturers ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Product Overview Configuring a PROFIBUS-DP network In the figure below you can see a typical installation of a PROFIBUS-DP network. The DP masters are integrated in the relevant device - for example, the S7-400 has a PROFIBUS-DP interface, and the IM 308-C master interface module is inserted in the S5-115U. The DP slaves are the distributed I/O devices connected to the DP masters via PROFIBUS-DP. S5-115U with IM 308-C S7-400 PG/PC DP master PROFIBUS-DP DP slaves ET 200M ET 200X ET 200S Drive S7-200 S5-95U-DP ET 200eco DP/AS-I LINK OP/OS Other field devices Figure 1-1 Typical PROFIBUS-DP network installation 1.2 What is the ET 200X distributed I/O device? Definition The ET 200X distributed I/O device is a modular DP slave in the IP 65 to IP 67 degrees of protection. Usage Owing to its robust design and the IP 65 to IP 67 degrees of protection, the ET 200X distributed I/O device is particularly suitable for usage in harsh industrial environments. Rapid and optimum adaptation of the ET 200X to the technological functional units of your machine is ensured thanks to the option of integrating motor starters (switching and protecting any three-phase loads up to 5.5 kW), frequency converters (actuating asynchronous motors up to 0.75 kW rated power) and I/O modules. ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 1-3 Product Overview Basic and expansion modules An ET 200X distributed I/O device consists of a basic module in which some digital inputs and outputs have already been integrated. Up to 7 expansion modules can be added to the basic module. An ET 200X distributed I/O device is connected to PROFIBUS-DP by means of cable connectors for PROFIBUS-DP on the basic module. Every ET 200X distributed I/O device is a DP slave on PROFIBUS-DP. ET 200X with BM 147/CPU can also be configured for standalone operation (i.e. not connected to a bus). Configuration of ET 200X (example) SF BF ON 24 VDC X1 X2 X3 X1 X4 X1 X2 X3 X4 X2 X3 Basic module Expansion modules Connectors for PROFIBUS-DP and supply voltage for electronic components and sensors Figure 1-2 1-4 Connector for load voltage Configuration of the ET 200X distributed I/O device (example) ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Product Overview Components The components of the ET 200X include the following basic modules: BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V basic module BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST basic module BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG basic module BM 142 DO 4 DC 24V/2A basic module BM 143-DESINA FO basic module BM 143-DESINA RS485 basic module BM 147/CPU basic module The following expansion modules can be added to each of the basic modules: EM 141 DI 4 DC 24V expansion module EM 141 DI 8 DC 24V expansion module EM 141 DI 8 DC 24V expansion module (short and long types) EM 142 DO 4 DC 24V/0.5A expansion module EM 142 DO 8 DC 24V/1.2A expansion module EM 142 DO 4 DC 24V/2A expansion module EM 143-DESINA expansion module (only with BM 143-DESINA) EM 144 AI 2 U (10 V) expansion module EM 144 AI 2 I (20 mA or 4 to 20 mA) expansion module EM 144 AI 2 I (4 to 20 mA) expansion module EM 144 AI 2 RTD (Pt 100) expansion module EM 145 AO 2 U (10 V) expansion module EM 145 AO 2 I (20 mA or 4 to 20 mA) expansion module EM 300... expansion module (motor starter) EM 148-FC frequency converter EM 148-P DI 4 DC 24V/DO 2 P expansion module (pneumatic module) EM 148-P DO 16 P/CPV10 expansion module (pneumatic interface module for FESTO valve island CPV10) EM 148-P DO 16 P/CPV14 expansion module (pneumatic interface module for FESTO valve island CPV14) PM 148 DO 4 DC 24V/2A power module SITOP power 24V/10A power supply unit CP 142-2 communication processor as AS-i master ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 1-5 Product Overview Features of the ET 200X The supply voltage for the electronic components and sensors, the load voltage and PROFIBUS-DP are connected to the basic module by means of connectors. The BM 141... and BM 142... basic modules contain a number of inputs and outputs. Basic modules can be expanded on a modular basis. Motor starters (direct-on-line and reversing starters) can be used as expansion modules for switching and protecting any three-phase loads up to 5.5 kW, at 400 VAC (refer to the manual EM 300 Motor Starters). Frequency converters can be used as expansion modules for actuating asynchronous motors up to 0.75 kW rated power at 400 VAC (refer to the manual EM 148-FC Frequency Converters). Pneumatic modules having two 4/2-way valves and pneumatic interface modules for connecting two regular FESTO valve islands to the ET 200X can be used as expansion modules (refer to Section 1.4). When expansion modules are installed, the supply voltage for the electronic components and the sensors and the load voltage are automatically fed to these modules from the basic module. The voltage and the bus signals can be looped through to the next ET 200X via connectors. The supply voltage for the electronic components and the sensors and PROFIBUS-DP can be fed to the first ET 200X via separate cables and then looped through to the next ET 200X via a common cable. The PROFIBUS address of the ET 200X can be set between 1 and 125 by means of switches in the basic module. There are 4 LEDs on the front of the basic module that indicate faults in the hardware of an ET 200X (SF), bus faults (BF), and the supply voltage for the electronic components and sensors (ON) and load voltage (24 VDC). Transmission rates of 9.6 kbps to 12 Mbps are permitted for the ET 200X. CP 142-2 as AS-i master DP Master for ET 200X The ET 200X can communicate with all DP masters that behave in compliance with IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1. However, some DP masters can process only limited frame lengths. Check whether the DP master you are using can receive frames from the ET 200X in their entirety. To ascertain this, you will find a list of maximum frame lengths in the configuration and parameter assignment frames for ET 200X at http://www.ad.siemens.de/simatic-cs. 1-6 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Product Overview 1.3 ET 200X-DESINA/ET 200X-ECOFAST ET 200X-DESINA DESINA is the acronym for Distributed and Standardized INstAllation technique for machine tools. DESINA is a uniform installation system and specifies all components in terms of function and connection system. The followings modules fulfill the requirements of the DESINA specification: BM 143-DESINA FO (fiber-optic PROFIBUS-DP) (FO = Fibre Optic) BM 143-DESINA RS485 RS 485) (copper wire PROFIBUS-DP based on EM 143-DESINA ET 200X-ECOFAST ECOFAST is the trade name for Energy and COmmunication Field InstAllation SysTem. The following ECOFAST module has a terminal system compliant with the DESINA specification: BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 (copper wire PROFIBUS-DP based on RS 485) 1-7 Product Overview Comparison of features Table 1-1 Features of the ET200X-DESINA and ET200X-ECOFAST ET200X-ECOFAST ET200X-DESINA PROFIBUS-DP is connected via DESINA connectors by means of: Copper conductors to RS 485 Fiber-optic cables for use in environments with high interference Each DESINA basic module and expansion module has 8 digital channels, and each channel can be configured as an input or output. The BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST basic module has 8 digital inputs. With a maximum of seven EM 143-DESINA expansion modules, an ET 200X-DESINA has a total of 64 DESINA-compliant inputs/outputs. There is an additional diagnostic input for each channel. The connected DESINA-compatible sensors and actuators can be directly monitored by means of the diagnostic input. Alternatively, the diagnostic input can be configured as an input with NC functionality. - The field bus (PROFIBUS-DP) and the switched and non-switched load voltages are carried to the basic module by a single cable set. The cable connects to the basic module by means of DESINA connectors. When expansion modules are installed, the non-switched and switched load voltages are fed from the basic module to the expansion modules. The voltages and bus signals can be looped through to the next ET 200X-DESINA by means of a second DESINA connector. The PROFIBUS address is set by means of DIL switches in a removable configuration connector. This means that the basic module can be replaced without resetting the address. The BM 143-DESINA and BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST basic modules can be combined with all the other expansion modules of the ET 200X. Four LEDs are provided on the front of the basic modules for indicating: Errors on the ET-DESINA (SF) Data transfer to the BM 143-DESINA (RUN) Non-switched load voltage (DC 24 V-NS)) Switched load voltage (DC 24 V-S) Transmission rates of 9.6 kbps to 12 Mbps are permitted. Note The EM 143-DESINA expansion module can only be used with the BM 143-DESINA and BM 141-ECOFAST basic modules. It is not compatible with the BM 141, BM 142 and BM 147/CPU basic modules. 1-8 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Product Overview DP master for ET 200X-DESINA/ET 200X-ECOFAST The ET-DESINA and ET 200X-ECOFAST can communicate with all DP masters that behave in compliance with EN 50170, Volume 2, PROFIBUS. However, some DP masters can process only limited frame lengths. Check whether the DP master you are using can receive frames from the ET 200X-DESINA and ET 200X-ECOFAST in their entirety. To ascertain this, you will find a list of maximum frame lengths in the configuration and parameter assignment frames for ET 200X at http://www.ad.siemens.de/simatic-cs. Configuration of ET 200X-DESINA/ECOFAST (examples) SF RUN DC 24 V-NS DC 24 V-S X01 X1 X2 X1 X1 X2 X2 X2 X1 X02 X4 X3 X5 X7 X6 X8 Basic module X4 X3 X5 X7 X3 X6 X8 X4 X5 X7 X3 X6 X8 X4 X5 X7 X6 X8 Expansion modules DESINA connector Figure 1-3 Configuration of the ET 200X-DESINA/ET 200X-ECOFAST distributed I/O device (example) ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 1-9 X8 X7 X8 X7 X02 X01 SF RUN DC 24 V-NS DC 24 V-S X3 X1 X5 X4 X6 X2 X1 X3 X2 X4 X3 X1 X5 X4 X6 X2 X1 X2 X1 X3 SF 24 VDC X2 X4 X1 X3 X2 Product Overview Figure 1-4 1-10 Configuration of the ET 200X-DESINA/ET 200X-ECOFAST distributed I/O device with various expansion modules ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Product Overview 1.4 ET 200X with pneumatic functionality 40 per cent of all actuators are pneumatic cylinders. Three expansion modules for the pneumatic connection to the ET 200X are available for optimum adaptation of the ET 200X to the overall process: EM 148-P DI 4 DC 24V/DO 2 P expansion module (pneumatic module) EM 148-P DO 16 P/CPV10 expansion module (pneumatic interface module for FESTO valve island CPV10) EM 148-P DO 16 P/CPV14 expansion module (pneumatic interface module for FESTO valve island CPV14) Pneumatic module The pneumatic module is an expansion module with four digital inputs and two separate 4/2-way valves. The pneumatic module is used to control: a maximum of two double-acting pneumatic cylinders having a piston diameter of up to 50 mm a single-acting pneumatic cylinder with a piston diameter up to 50 mm when a plug is used for the second connection to the valve other pneumatic drives such as rotary actuators or a nozzle. Pneumatic cylinders having a piston diameter greater than 50 mm can similarly be controlled with constraints at the piston speed. The digital inputs can be used to acquire the limits of travel of the pneumatic cylinders. You can integrate up to seven pneumatic modules into an ET 200X. Configuration of the ET 200X with pneumatic modules (example) SF BF ON 24 VDC X1 X2 X3 X1 X4 X2 X3 X1 X2 X1 X2 X1 X4 X2 X3 X4 Pneumatic modules Figure 1-5 Configuration of the ET 200X with pneumatic modules (example) ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 1-11 Product Overview Pneumatic interface module for the CPV10 and CPV14 The pneumatic interface modules are expansion modules for connecting two Regular CPV10 or CPV14 FESTO valve islands. Each of the two FESTO valve islands can be equipped with as many as 16 valves (standard components of the FESTO company). The valve islands differ in respect of their rated air flows (CPV10: 400 l/min; CPV14: 800 l/min). You can integrate up to six pneumatic interface modules into an ET 200X. Configuration of the ET 200X with pneumatic interface module and FESTO valve island (example) SF BF ON 24 VDC X1 X2 X3 X1 X4 X1 X2 X3 X4 X2 X3 Pneumatic interface module for CPV10 FESTO valve island CPV10 Figure 1-6 1-12 Configuration of the ET 200X with pneumatic interface module (example) ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Product Overview Address assignment, pneumatic interface module for CPV10 and CPV14 The figure below shows the pneumatic interface module with FESTO CPV10 valve island and addresses. 0.1 0.0 0.3 0.2 0.3 0.2 0.5 0.4 0.5 0.4 0.7 0.6 0.7 0.6 1.1 1.0 1.1 1.0 1.3 1.2 1.3 1.2 1.5 1.4 1.5 1.4 1.7 1.6 1.7 1.6 0.1 0.0 LEDs Figure 1-7 Assigning addresses to the pneumatic interface module ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 1-13 Product Overview 1.5 ET 200X with PM 148 DO 4 DC 24V/2A power module Function The power module is an expansion module for ET-voltage feed. You can use power modules to loop through or feed load voltage separately from multiple supply points to the digital-output modules of the ET 200X. You can integrate a maximum of 7 power modules into an ET 200X. Switching load voltage ON/Off selectively A separate load-voltage supply means that you can switch load voltage on and off selectively for individual modules. The "DC 24V" LED on the power module indicates whether or not load voltage is applied. Configuration of ET 200X with power module (example) SF BF ON 24 VDC X1 SF 24 VDC X2 X3 X1 X4 X2 X3 X1 X4 X1 X2 X3 X4 X1 X2 X3 X4 X2 X3 X4 Power module Figure 1-8 1-14 Configuration of ET 200X with power module (example) ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Product Overview 1.6 ET 200X with SITOP power Function SITOP-mode power supply unit for ET 200X. It integrates into the ET 200X without additional wiring and supply the power for electronics/sensors and/or the load voltage. Response to faults is parameterizable (restart or shutdown following a short circuit on the output side). Note SITOP power 24V/10A must always be installed in the rightmost slot of the ET 200X. If a SITOP power module is installed on a BM 143-DESINA or BM 141-ECOFAST, do not use the DESINA hybrid cable to supply power (power is supplied by the SITOP power). In this case the DESINA hybrid cable is used only for connection to PROFIBUS-DP. Do not loop through the power supply from a BM 143-DESINA or BM 141-ECOFAST with SITOP power. Configuration of ET 200X with SITOP power 24V/10A (example) SF BF ON 24 VDC X1 X2 X3 X1 X4 X2 X3 X1 X4 X2 24 VDC ELECTRONIC/SENSOR 1L+ LOAD 2L+ TEMP > X3 SITOP power Figure 1-9 Configuration of ET 200X with SITOP power (Example) ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 1-15 Product Overview 1.7 ET 200X with CP 142-2 communication processor Function You can connect an AS interface to the ET 200X with the aid of the CP 142-2 (as AS-i master). A configuration of this nature can include a maximum of 31 AS-i slaves. LEDs on the front panel of the CP 142-2 indicate the operating statuses of the slaves. The CP 142-2 is parameterized with STEP 7. Separate configuration for AS-i is not necessary. You can connect a maximum of 6 CP 142-2 communication processors to each basic module (except the BM 147/CPU). You can connect a maximum of 7 CP 142-2 communication processors to the BM 147/CPU basic module. Configuration of ET 200X with CP 142-2 (example) SF BF ON 24 VDC X1 SF APF X2 X1 X2 X1 X2 X1 CER X2 AUP CM X3 X4 X3 X4 X3 X3 X4 X4 CP 142-2 Figure 1-10 1-16 Configuration of ET 200X with CP 142-2 (Example) ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Product Overview 1.8 Guide to the ET 200X manuals Components and the manuals required for them The components of the ET 200X are described in various manuals in the ET 200X package. The figure below shows possible ET 200X configurations and the manuals required for them. You require information from the following manuals: The ET 200X consists of the following components: EM BM DI/DO DI EM EM DO AI EM 143 EM 143 EM AO EM 143 Distributed I/O Device ET 200X EM 143 Distributed I/O Device ET200X-DESINA/ECOFAST DI/DO DI/DO DI/DO DI/DO BM 147 EM DI EM EM DO AI BM 147/CPU Basic Module EM AO + Distributed I/O Device ET 200X EM BM DI/DO DI EM EM DO AI EM AO MS MS Distributed I/O Device ET 200X + EM 300 Motor Starter BM 147 EM DI EM EM DO AI EM AO MS MS BM 147/CPU Basic Mo+ dule Distributed I/O Device ET 200X + EM-FC EM EM BM DI/DO DI AI EM AO MS EM 300 Motor Starter Distributed I/O Device ET 200X MS + EM 300 Motor Starter + Frequency Converter Figure 1-11 Components and the manuals required for them Where do you find what information? The table below will help you get your bearings and find the information you need quickly. It tells you which manual you need to refer to and which chapter deals with the topic you are interested in. ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 1-17 Product Overview Table 1-2 Topics of the manuals in the ET 200X manual package Manual Subject Distributed BM 147/C I/O device PU basic ET 200X module EM 300 motor starter EM 148-FC frequency converter Chapter/ Appendix ET 200X configuration options x 2 Installation of ET 200X, motor starters and frequency converters; setting the PROFIBUS address connecting the terminating resistor x 3 Installation of ET 200X-DESINA/ECOFAST; setting the PROFIBUS address x 3 BM 147/CPU addressing x 2 Electrical configuration and wiring of the ET 200X x 4 Electrical configuration and wiring of the ET 200X-DESINA/ECOFAST x 4 Wiring of motor starters x Wiring of frequency converters 2 x ET 200X with BM 147/CPU with PROFIBUS-DP x 2 3 Commissioning and diagnostics of the ET 200X x 5 Commissioning and diagnostics of the ET 200X-DESINA/ECOFAST x 5 Commissioning and diagnostics of the ET 200X with the BM 147/CPU x Commissioning and diagnostics of the ET 200X with motor starters 4 x Commissioning and diagnostics of the ET 200X with frequency converters 3 x 3 General technical specifications of the ET 200X (standards, certificates and approvals, EMC, environmental conditions, etc.) x 6 Technical specifications of the basic and expansion modules with DI, DO, AI and AO x 7 Technical specifications of the BM 147/CPU x Technical specifications of the motor starters x Functions and technical specifications of the frequency converters 1-18 5 x BM 147/CPU cycle and response times Order numbers of the components 5 x x 4 6 A ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Product Overview Table 1-2 Topics of the manuals in the ET 200X manual package, continued Manual Subject Distributed BM 147/C I/O device PU basic ET 200X module Order numbers of the motor starters EM 300 motor starter EM 148-FC frequency converter x Order numbers of the frequency converters Dimensioned drawings of the basic modules and digital and analog expansion modules A x x A C Dimensioned drawings of the motor starters x Dimensioned drawings of the frequency converters B x Configuration and parameter assignment frames for the BM 147/CPU Chapter/ Appendix x Configuration assignment frame for the motor starter B A x C STEP 7 list of operations x B Execution times of SFCs x C x Glossar y Glossary Table 1-3 x Separate manuals for ET 200X components Subject Using a CP 142-2 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Manual CP 142-2 Manual Order No.: 6GK7 142-2AH00-8AA0 1-19 Product Overview 1-20 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 2 Configuration Options Configuration options There are several different ways in which ET 200X distributed I/O devices can be connected to PROFIBUS-DP. This chapter provides an overview of the various configuration options. The restrictions regarding the maximum number of modules allowed in each configuration are described in a separate section. Contents of Chapter Section Subject Page 2.1 Brief overview of the different basic modules 2-2 2.2 Feeding and looping through the supply voltage for the electronic components/sensors and PROFIBUS-DP 2-3 2.3 Disconnecting the ET 200X from the bus and looping through the supply voltage/PROFIBUS-DP (not ET 200X-DESINA/ ET 200X-ECOFAST) 2-6 2.4 Connecting the load supply voltage to the motor starters, frequency converters and looping it through 2-8 2.5 Connecting and looping through the load voltage 2-10 2.6 Use of the SITOP power power supply unit 2-11 2.7 Connecting and looping through load voltages and PROFIBUS-DP to ET 200X-DESINA / ET 200X-ECOFAST 2-12 2.8 Restrictions on the number of modules 2-13 2.9 Maximum configuration and configuration options with power modules 2-16 Modules for the ET 200X This chapter does not contain any further information about the types of module that can be used for the ET 200X. Please refer to Chapter 7 for the technical specifications, pinouts, basic circuit diagrams, etc. Terminating resistor There must be a terminating resistor on the first and last node of a PROFIBUS-DP network with copper conductors (see Section 3.4). The ET 200X-DESINA FO has a fiber-optic waveguide to transmit bus signals. This waveguide does not require a terminating resistor. ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 2-1 Configuration Options Configuring a PROFIBUS-DP network The principles and rules for configuring a PROFIBUS-DP network are described in the manual for the DP master. 2.1 Table 2-1 Brief overview of the different basic modules Brief overview of the different basic modules Common features BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V (6ES7 141-1BF12-0XB0) Operation as a DPV0 slave Operation as a DPV1 slave Operation as a S7 slave Diagnostic interrupt Hardware interrupt Direct communication IP 67 8 digital inputs Connectors for the supply and PROFIBUS-DP (copper conductors) DDB file for DPV1: SI03803D.GSG (as of version 1 of the basic module) BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST (6ES7 141-1BF01-0AB0) 8 digital inputs ECOFAST connectors for the supply and PROFIBUS-DP (copper conductors) DDB file for DPV1: SI0380D2.GSG (as of version 1 of the basic module) BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG (6ES7 141-1BF40-0AB0) 8 digital inputs ECOFAST connectors for the supply and PROFIBUS-DP (copper conductors) Diagnostic interrupt for short circuit and wire break for each channel Hardware interrupt at rising and falling edge for each channel DDB file for DPV1: SI0380D3.GSG (as of version 2 of the basic module) BM 142 DO 4 DC 24V/2A (6ES7 142-1BD22-0XB0) 4 digital outputs (2A per output) Connectors for the supply and PROFIBUS-DP (copper conductors) DDB file for DPV1: SI03803C.GSG (as of version 3 of the basic module) BM 143-DESINA FO (6ES7 143-1BF00-0XB0) 8 digital inputs or outputs (separately parameterizable as an input or output), diagnostic input for each channel ECOFAST connectors for the supply and PROFIBUS-DP (fiber-optic cables) DDB file for DPV1: SI03809A.GSG as of version 5 of the basic module BM 143-DESINA RS485 (6ES7 143-1BF00-0AB0) 8 digital inputs or outputs (separately parameterizable as an input or output), diagnostic input for each channel ECOFAST connectors for the supply and PROFIBUS-DP (fiber-optic cables) DDB file for DPV1: SI03809A.GSG (as of version 2 of the basic module) 2-2 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Configuration Options 2.2 Feeding and looping through the supply voltage for the electronic components/sensors and PROFIBUS-DP Configuration options Each ET 200X consists of a basic module (BM) and up to 7 expansion modules (EM). There are various ways of connecting ET 200X distributed I/O devices to PROFIBUS-DP: feeding and looping through the supply voltage for the electronics/sensors and PROFIBUS-DP via a common cable feeding and looping through the supply voltage for the electronics/sensors and PROFIBUS-DP via separate cables feeding and looping through the supply voltage for the electronics/sensors and PROFIBUS-DP via separate cables feeding the supply voltage for the electronics/sensors to every ET 200X and looping through PROFIBUS-DP via separate cables Each of the above configuration options is described below using an example. Connection You can hook up the supply voltage and PROFIBUS-DP by means of a connector on the basic module of the ET 200X. Use a second connector for looping through. ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 2-3 Configuration Options Feeding via a common cable The supply voltage for the electronic components and the sensors is fed to the first ET 200X and looped through to the downstream ET 200Xs via the same cable as PROFIBUS-DP. Supply voltage + PROFIBUS-DP BM EM EM EM EM ET 200X (DP slave 1) BM 5-core, shielded cable ET 200X (DP slave 2) BM EM EM ET 200X (DP slave 3) ... Figure 2-1 Feeding and looping through the supply voltage and PROFIBUS-DP via a common cable Looping through via a common cable The supply voltage for the electronic components/sensors and PROFIBUS-DP are fed to the first ET 200X via two separate cables. They are looped through to the downstream ET 200Xs via a common cable. Supply voltage BM EM EM EM EM PROFIBUS-DP ET 200X (DP slave 1) BM ET 200X (DP slave 2) BM EM EM 3-core cable 2-core, shielded cable 5-core, shielded cable Figure 2-2 2-4 ET 200X (DP slave 3) ... Feeding the supply voltage and PROFIBUS-DP via separate cables and looping them through via a common cable ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Configuration Options Feeding/looping through via separate cables The supply voltage for the electronic components/sensors and PROFIBUS-DP are fed to the first ET 200X and looped through to the downstream ET 200Xs via two separate cables. Supply voltage BM EM EM EM EM PROFIBUS-DP ET 200X (DP slave 1) BM ET 200X (DP slave 2) BM EM EM 3-core cable 2-core, shielded cable Figure 2-3 ET 200X (DP slave 3) ... ... Feeding the supply voltage and PROFIBUS-DP and looping them through via separate cables Feeding/looping through of PROFIBUS-DP via 1 cable The supply voltage for the electronic components/sensors is fed to each ET 200X separately. PROFIBUS-DP is fed and looped through to the downstream ET 200Xs via a common cable. Supply voltage BM EM EM EM EM PROFIBUS-DP ET 200X (DP slave 1) Supply voltage BM ET 200X (DP slave 2) Supply voltage BM EM EM ET 200X (DP slave 3) 3-core cable 2-core, shielded cable Figure 2-4 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 ... Feeding the supply voltage separately to each ET 200X and looping PROFIBUS-DP through via a separate cable 2-5 Configuration Options Cables Please refer to Section 4.4 and Appendix A for a list of suitable cable types. Load supply voltage If you use motor starters (EM 300...) and/or frequency converters, you must supply them with 400 VAC (see Chapter 2.4). Load power supply If you use basic/expansion modules that have outputs, you must connect the relevant ET 200X to a load power supply (see Section 2.5). Exception: ET 200X-DESINA (see Figure 4-4). 2.3 Disconnecting ET 200X from the bus and looping through the supply voltage/PROFIBUS-DP (not ET 200X-DESINA/ET 200X-ECOFAST) Looping through PROFIBUS-DP The two connectors for feeding and looping through the supply voltage and PROFIBUS-DP are plugged into a connector plate in the basic module. Remove the two connectors from the BM 141/BM 142/BM 147 basic module of the ET 200X together with the connector plate beneath them. Advantage The relevant ET 200X distributed I/O device is disconnected from PROFIBUS-DP, but the supply voltage and PROFIBUS-DP are still looped through to the next ET 200X. 2-6 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Configuration Options Example This principle is demonstrated by the example shown in the diagram below. BM EM EM EM EM Remove the connector and connector plate ET 200X (DP slave 1) disconnected from PROFIBUS-DP Supply voltage + PROFIBUS-DP looped through Connector plate BM ET 200X (DP slave 2) BM EM EM ET 200X (DP slave 3) ... Figure 2-5 ! Disconnecting the ET 200X from the bus and looping through the supply voltage/PROFIBUS-DP Caution There are freely accessible live contacts on the underside of the connector plate. Take steps to ensure that no short-circuits can occur between these contacts, or the fuse on the connector plate may be tripped and damage caused to other connected devices. ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 2-7 Configuration Options 2.4 Connecting the load supply voltage to motor starters/frequency converters and looping it through Necessity If you use motor starters (EM 300...) and/or frequency converters (EM148-FC), you must supply them with a 400 VAC load voltage. You must also supply the basic module of the relevant ET 200X with DC 24V load voltage (exception: ET 200X-DESINA and ET 200X-ECOFAST, see Figure 4-4 and Figure 4-5). Connection Hook up the load supply voltage and the load to the power socket and power connector on the motor starter/frequency converter. Looping through The load supply voltage can be looped through from one motor starter/frequency converter to the next by connecting an additional power connector to the motor starter/frequency converter. The load supply voltage can be looped through both within the same ET 200X and from one ET 200X to the next. 2-8 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Configuration Options Configuration example The diagram below shows you three possible configurations with connections for the 400 VAC load supply voltage, the load and looping through. The possible configurations for motor starters and frequency converters are the same. You must take into account that the frequency converters have to be positioned to the right of the motor starters. Switch cabinet for power distribution Supply voltage + PROFIBUS-DP looped through EMFC BM EM MS Fed separately to each motor starter/ frequency converter M 3 M 3 BM EM BM EM MS MS MS M 3 M 3 M 3 EMFC Fed separately to each ET 200X BM Fed to the 1st motor starter Figure 2-6 EM M 3 EMFC BM EM MS MS MS M 3 M 3 M 3 Load voltage supply M 3 Connecting and looping through the load supply voltage Cables Please refer to Section 4.4 for a list of suitable cable types. ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 2-9 Configuration Options 2.5 Connecting and looping through the load voltage Necessity A load voltage is only necessary if you wish to use a basic module/expansion module(s) with outputs (e. g. DO) and/or motor starters/frequency converters. In the case of the ET 200X-DESINA and ET 200X-ECOFAST, the load voltage is carried by the DESINA hybrid cable. Connection You can hook up the load voltage by means of a connector on the basic module of the ET 200X. Power can also be supplied from a power module or a SITOP power. Configuration example The diagrams below show you a configuration with basic/expansion modules that have digital outputs (DO). Please refer to Section 7.1 for a list of the modules that can be used. Supply voltage + PROFIBUS-DP BM EM EM EM DI DI DO DO Load voltage MS 3-core cable MS BM EM EM DI DI DI BM DO Feeding of the load supply voltage Load voltage BM EM EM PM EM EM DO DO DI DO DO DI ... ... Figure 2-7 Connecting and looping through the load voltage Looping through The load voltage can be looped through from one ET 200X to the next by wiring the load voltage connector accordingly (see Section 4.4.2). 2-10 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Configuration Options Cables Please refer to Section 4.4 for a list of suitable cable types. 2.6 Use of the SITOP power power supply unit The SITOP power 24V/10A power supply unit can provide the ET 200X with the supply voltage for electronics/sensors and/or the load voltage. Configuration example The diagrams below show you some configuration examples. Feeds the supply voltage for the electronics/sensors and the load voltage directly into the bus PROFIBUS-DP BM EM DI DI EM EM SITOP DO power DO MS MS 230 V Feeding the load supply voltage Figure 2-8 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 ET 200X with SITOP power 24V/10A 2-11 Configuration Options 2.7 Connecting and looping through load voltages and PROFIBUS-DP to ET 200X-DESINA / ET 200X-ECOFAST Non-switched and switched load voltage and PROFIBUS-DP are fed to the first ET 200X-DESINA/ET 200X-ECOFAST in a shared DESINA hybrid cable and looped through to the downstream ET 200X-DESINA/ ET 200X-ECOFAST. BM Non-switched and switched load voltages + PROFIBUS-DP (FO and RS485) EM EM EM ET 200X-DESINA / ET 200X-ECOFAST (DP slave 1) BM DESINA hybrid cable ET 200X-DESINA / ET 200X-ECOFAST (DP slave 2) BM EM EM ET 200X-DESINA / ET 200X-ECOFAST ... (DP slave 3) Figure 2-9 Supply voltage and PROFIBUS-DP supplied and looped through with a DESINA hybrid cable For the connection with controller or power supply on the DESINA hybrid cable, we recommend the MCP12P media converter manufactured by Harting. See ordering data in Appendix A. 2-12 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Configuration Options 2.8 Restrictions on the number of modules Maximum configuration Every ET 200X consists of a basic module and up to seven expansion modules. Motor starter, frequency converter: A maximum of 6 motor starters or frequency converters can be connected for each basic module (EM 300..., EM 148-FC). They can be inserted anywhere in the ET 200X but frequency converters must always be to the right of the motor starters. Pneumatic interface modules: A maximum of 6 pneumatic interface modules (EM 148-P DO 16 P/CPV...) can be connected in the ET 200X configuration. CP 142-2 communication processor: A maximum of 6 CP 142-2 communication processors can be connected to each basic module (except BM 147/CPU). Up to seven CP 142-2 processors can be connected to the BM 147/CPU. Restrictions imposed by power input The maximum configuration is dependent on the power input of the individual modules. The table below shows you all the possible configurations (described in the previous sections) and specifies the restrictions imposed on them. It also indicates ways of overcoming these restrictions. Note The PM 148 DO 4DC 24V/2A power module interrupts the supply of load voltage to the downline expansion modules of an ET 200X. It has a separate load-voltage feed, which it uses to supply the downline expansion modules (see Section 2.9). ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 2-13 Configuration Options Table 2-2 Restrictions imposed on the maximum configuration by the power input Configuration options Restrictions Supply voltage and Power input of the whole configuration: PROFIBUS-DP fed Up to 40 C 6 A and looped Up to 55 C 4 A through via a common cable Maximum cable length: Supply voltage and PROFIBUS-DP fed via separate cables and looped through via a common cable 25 m if the power input of the whole configuration is as follows: Up to 40 C 6 A Up to 55 C 4 A 120 m if the power input of the whole Calculation/overcoming the restrictions 1. Calculate the power input of each module (see the technical specifications as of Section 7.1). 2. Add up the power input of all the modules in the whole configuration. 3. If the current input > 6 A (4 A), then feed the supply voltage to a few ET 200Xs from the power system again (permissible power input per ET 200X 1 A or 0.8 A as a function of temperature). configuration is as follows: Up to 40 C 1 A Up to 55 C 0.8 A Supply voltage and Power input of one ET 200X: PROFIBUS-DP fed Up to 40 C 1 A and looped Up to 55 C 0.8 A through via separate cables 1. Calculate the power input of each module (see the technical specifications as of Section 7.1). 2. Add up the power input of the modules of each ET 200X. 3. If the power input > 1 A (0.8 A), reduce the number of expansion modules per ET 200X. The maximum cable length for the supply voltage is dependent on the cable core cross-section and on the power input of the whole configuration: Cable core cross-section 0.75 mm2 and power input 1 A (0.8 A): cable length 120 m Cable core cross-section 0.75 mm2 and To calculate the cable length: 1. Add up the power input of all the modules in the whole configuration. 2. Increase the cable length, if necessary, by feeding the supply voltage for a few ET 200Xs from the power system again. power input 6 A (4 A): cable length 12 m Cable core cross-section 1.5 mm2 and power input 1 A (0.8 A): cable length 240 m Cable core cross-section 1.5 mm2 and power input 6 A (4 A): cable length 24 m The length of the bus cable is dependent on the transmission rate of the PROFIBUS-DP network (see the manual for the DP master) 2-14 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Configuration Options Table 2-2 Restrictions imposed on the maximum configuration by the power input, continued Configuration options Supply voltage fed to each ET 200X from the power system and PROFIBUS-DP looped through via a separate cable Load voltage connected and looped through to the basic module (see Figure 2-7) Restrictions Power input of one ET 200X: Up to 40 C 1 A Up to 55 C 0.8 A Calculation/overcoming the restrictions 1. Calculate the power input of each module (see the technical specifications as of Section 7.1). 2. Add up the power input of the The length of the bus cable is dependent on the modules of each ET 200X. transmission rate of the PROFIBUS-DP 3. If the power input > 1 A (0.8 A), network (see the manual for the DP master) reduce the number of expansion modules per ET 200X. Power input from the load of one ET 200X: Up to 40 C 10 A Up to 55 C 8 A Power input from the load of the whole configuration if the load voltage is looped through: Up to 40 C 16 A Up to 55 C 12 A 1. Calculate the power input from the load of each module (see the technical specifications as of Section 7.1). 2. Add up the power inputs of all the modules of an ET 200X or of the whole configuration. 3. If the power input from the load of an ET 200X > 10 A (8 A), you have two options: - Reduce the number of expansion module(s) with DOs and/or motor starters/frequency converters on the ET 200X - Feed in the load voltage using a power module (see Figure 2-10) If the power input from the load of the whole configuration > 16 A (12 A), feed the load voltage to a few ET 200Xs from the power system again. ! Caution If you ignore the restrictions on the maximum system configuration specified in Table 2-2, the cable insulation and the contacts may be overheated and the device damaged as a result. Currents of motor starters You will find the power input and aggregate current of motor starters in the manual EM 300 motor starters. Currents of frequency converters You will find the power input and aggregate current of frequency converters in the manual EM 148-FC frequency converters. ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 2-15 Configuration Options 2.9 Maximum configuration and configuration options with power modules Maximum configuration Every ET 200X consists of a basic module and up to seven expansion modules, of which a maximum of seven expansion modules can be PM 148 DO 4 DC 24V/2A power modules. Restrictions imposed by power input The maximum system configuration is limited amongst other things by the power input of the load of the digital output modules in the configuration (see Section 2.7). Limits for current consumption by load without use of power modules: Limits for one ET 200X Limits for ET 200X overall configuration (load voltage looped through) Up to 40 C: 10 A Up to 40 C: 16 A Up to 55 C: 8 A Up to 55 C: 12 A Raising the limit If the power input from the load exceeds the above limits, use power modules that correspond to the load power consumption of your configuration. A power module provides 10 A of load current for the downline digital-output modules. 2-16 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Configuration Options Configuration examples The illustration below shows a number of ET 200X configurations with power modules. The load voltage can be: fed separately to each basic module and each power module looped through from basic module to power module looped through from power module to power module Supply voltage + PROFIBUS-DP BM EM PM EM DO DO DO DO Load voltage Load voltage 3-core cable Load voltage Load voltage BM EM PM EM DO DO DO DO BM EM PM EM DO DO DO DO Load voltage BM EM PM DI DI DO ... Figure 2-10 Configuration examples with power modules Note Load voltage cannot be supplied to power modules from the basic module via the ET 200X backplane bus. The load voltage must always be supplied via the power module's connector plug. ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 2-17 Configuration Options 2-18 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 3 Installation Structure of the ET 200X The ET 200X distributed I/O device is a modular DP slave. An ET 200X consists of a basic module and up to 7 expansion modules. Installation procedure You have to install the ET 200X distributed I/O device in several stages. See Chapter 3.1 and 3.2. Required settings You can set the PROFIBUS address between with the 7 DIL switches in the basic module or by means of the configuration connector (BM 143-DESINA and BM 141-ECOFAST). If the ET 200X distributed I/O device is the first or last DP slave in a PROFIBUS-DP network with copper conductors (RS 485), you must terminate the bus on the basic module with a terminating resistor (not required with BM 143-DESINA FO). Contents of Chapter Section Subject Page 3.1 Installing/deinstalling the ET 200X 3-2 3.2 Installing/disassembling pneumatic components 3-11 3.3 Setting/modifying the PROFIBUS address 3-16 3.4 Terminating PROFIBUS with a terminating resistor 3-20 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 3-1 Installation 3.1 Installing/deinstalling the ET 200X Installation Position The ET 200X with no motor starters or frequency converters can be installed in any position. An ET 200X with motor starters or frequency converters can be installed on a vertical wall in the following positions: ET 200X tilted up to 22.5 to the front or the rear, and/or ET 200X rotated up to 90 to the right or the left. DIN rail As a preference, the ET 200X modules must be installed on a DIN rail. Five types are available (see Table 3-1 and Figures 3-1 and 3-2). Table 3-1 3-2 DIN rails for installing an ET 200X Description Order No. DIN rail, narrow, length 400 mm for ET 200X electronic module 6ES7 194-1GA00-0XA0 DIN rail, narrow, length 640 mm for ET 200X electronic module 6ES7 194-1GA10-0XA0 DIN rail, narrow, length 2000 mm for ET 200X electronic module 6ES7 194-1GA20-0XA0 DIN rail, wide, length 520 mm for ET 200X electronic module and motor starter/frequency converter/pneumatic interface module 6ES7 194-1GB00-0XA0 DIN rail, wide, length 1000 mm for ET 200X electronic module and motor starter/frequency converter/pneumatic interface module 6ES7 194-1GB10-0XA0 Screws with washer assemblies (100 screws M5 x 20, crossed recessed head with washer) for fitting ET 200X modules onto DIN rail 6ES7 194-1KC00-0XA0 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Installation DIN rail, narrow Screw thread undercuts for BM, EM, DESINA, ECOFAST Position of fixing point, 2 x M8 Screw thread undercuts for valve island DIN rail, wide Screw thread undercuts for MS/FC Screw thread undercuts for BM, EM, DESINA, ECOFAST Position of fixing screw 4 x M8 Figure 3-1 DIN rail for installing the ET 200X modules Cross recessed head screws M5 x 20 8.8 Z4-1 as per DIN 7985 and a lock ring and washer should be used to fasten the module to the DIN rail. The screw length of 20 mm is absolutely essential. Figure 3-2 shows dimensioned drawings for the narrow DIN rails. Figure 3-3 shows dimensioned drawings for the wide DIN rails. ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 3-3 Installation 6ES7 194-1GA00-0XA0 6ES7 194-1GA10-0XA0 6ES7 194-1GA20-0XA0 (without mounting holes) Max. 200 Figure 3-2 Dimensioned drawings of the narrow DIN rails Note You must cut the narrow DIN rail (with a length of 2000) to suit your requirements and drill the mounting holes for M8 screws. To ensure that all the ET 200X modules have the specified vibration resistance, the mounting holes should be spaced at even intervals of a maximum 200 mm after initial spacing of 12 mm. 3-4 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Installation 6ES7 194-1GB00-0XA0 6ES7 194-1GB10-0XA0 Figure 3-3 Dimensioned drawings of the wide DIN rails ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 3-5 Installation Installing the ET 200X 1. Use M8 screws to secure the DIN rail to the substrate at all the fixing points provided. 2. Remove the cover panel from the expansion port of the basic module. 3. Screw the basic module to the DIN rail at the 4 fixing points using cross-recess M5 x 20 screws Tightening torque: 2 Nm (max. 3 Nm) 4. Plug the expansion module into the expansion interface of the basic module and fasten the modules using two M3.5 x 25 screws. 3-6 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Installation Note If both frequency converters and motor starters are to be fitted in an ET 200X, you must always fit the frequency converters to the right of the motor starters (because the connector pin assignment of the motor starters is different from the assignment on the DESINA). SITOP power 24V/10A must always be fitted in the extreme right position in the ET 200X and the lid fitted to seal the expansion interface. 5. Use M5 x 20 cross-recess screws to screw the expansion module to the DIN rail at the two or three fixing points. Tightening torque: 2 Nm (max. 3 Nm) 6. Plug the next expansion module into the interface of the previous expansion module and fasten the module using two or three M3.5 x 25 screws. 7. Use M5 x 20 cross-recess screws to screw the expansion module to the DIN rail at the two or three fixing points. Tightening torque: 2 Nm (max. 3 Nm) 8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until the ET 200X is completely installed on the DIN rail. 9. Fix the cover panel for the expansion port onto the last expansion module of the ET200X. 9 2 4 Figure 3-4 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Installing expansion modules 3-7 Installation Deinstalling the ET 200X Note the following before deinstalling the ET 200X: ! Caution Before you deinstall expansion modules, you must switch off all the supply voltages for the ET 200X (i.e. the ET 200X must be deenergized). If you do not do this, when you remove the expansion modules their electronic components can get damaged. Note If servicing is required, it is possible to eliminate a module fault by replacing the upper section (the ET 200X must be in a deenergized state). In this case, disassemble the replacement module and use the upper section. This renders complete disassembly of the ET 200X unnecessary. 3-8 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Installation Dimensioned drawing for fixing holes The diagrams below show you the positions of the fixing screw holes for one basic module, one expansion module and one motor starter or frequency converter. Use the specified screws. Note The ET 200X must be installed on the rail, and screws must be affixed at all the fixing points. M5 20 M3.5 20 M5 20 M5 20 M5 20 M3.5 20 Rail Figure 3-5 Fixing screws for basic and expansion modules ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 3-9 Installation M3.5 25 Rail M5 20 M5 20 M3.5 25 M5 20 M3.5 25 Figure 3-6 3-10 Fixing screws for motor starters and frequency converters ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Installation 3.2 Installing/disassembling pneumatic components Supply and service line connections to the pneumatic module Valve 1 service connections Valve 2 service connections Silencer or waste air line connection Supply line (compressed air) Figure 3-7 Supply and service lines on pneumatic module EM 148-P DI 4 x DC 24V/DO 2 x P Diameters of tubing for pneumatic connection Table 3-2 Outer diameters of pneumatic tubing Tubing Outside diameter Supply and waste air connections 8 mm each Service connections per valve 6 mm each ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 3-11 Installation Supply, waste air and service line connection to pneumatic module Prerequisite: You have installed the ET 200X (see Section 3.1). 1. Use tubing exhibiting outside tolerance from FESTO for example, type PUN ... or type PAN .... Push the tubing having an outer diameter complying with Table 3-2 as far as the stop over the appropriate connection on the module (refer to Figure 3-7). 2. Close unused service connections with plugs. (2 plugs are included with the pneumatic module.) Note Bundle laid tubing with hose band clips for the sake of tidiness on your system. Directing waste air into the environment If you want to direct the waste air from the module into the environment, you can leave the waste air connection on the module open (refer to Figure 3-7). We recommend you to place a silencer on the waste air connection to reduce noise. You will find the order number for the silencer in Appendix A. Containing waste air If you place tubing on the waste air connection of the module, you can then guide the waste air away or collect it. Collection is practical, for instance, the pneumatic system is enriched with oil and you would like to dissipate the oily air. In the case of contained air, the tubing has to be run by the shortest possible route to a large-volume waste air line or outdoors. Please note that the operating pressure must not rise with hose length. Waste air must not be impeded at the waste air connection of the module. Note When the waste air from several modules is funneled, the resulting back pressure in the common waste air line my be too high - for example, with a long waste air tube length or a small tube diameter. In this case we recommend you to install a non-return valve between the waste air line of the pneumatic module and the common waste air line - for example, type H-QS-8 from FESTO. 3-12 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Installation Central supply of compressed air to pneumatic modules There is no pneumatic connection between several pneumatic modules of the ET 200X. This means that you must supply compressed air to each pneumatic module separately. In order to feed the pneumatic modules centrally with air all the same, there is a simple solution. You interconnect the compressed air lines by means of T plug connections - for example, type QST-10-8 from FESTO, as basically shown in the figure below. ET 200X BM EM EM PM PM Central supply of compressed air ET 200X BM EM EM EM PM PM PM T plug connection ... Supply line Figure 3-8 Central supply of compressed air to pneumatic modules Note The rate of air flow is lower when T plug connections are used. Note on starting up and operating pneumatic components Note Please note that the permissible operating pressure is reached before the valve is switched electrically. FESTO valve island for ET 200X The pneumatic interface modules are expansion modules for connecting two Regular FESTO valve islands: EM 148-P DO 16 P/CPV10 for FESTO valve island CPV10 EM 148-P DO 16 P/CPV14 for FESTO valve island CPV14 You can obtain valve islands from FESTO. The valve islands are described in separate documents. ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 3-13 Installation Installing a FESTO valve island and pneumatic interface module Prerequisite: You have installed the ET 200X (see Chapter 3.1). If you want to install a pneumatic interface module or a PM 148 DO 4DC 24V/2A power module directly next to a motor starter, the motor starter must be version 02. A maximum of six pneumatic interface modules can be plugged into an ET 200X. To install, perform the followings steps: 1. Slide the pneumatic interface module into the expansion interface of the preceding module. 2. Tighten the securing screws of the extension interface. 3. Plug the valve island in the interface module. 4. Screw the valve island and the interface module tightly to the rail (see Section 3.1). 6 5 4 Figure 3-9 3-14 Installing a valve island with an interface module ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Installation Dimensioned drawing for installation holes on the pneumatic interface module The diagram below contains the dimensions and positions of the mounting screw holes for one basic module and a pneumatic interface module. 132 53.5 48.25 109.5 120 126.8 n + 120 n = number of expansion modules (without pneumatic interface module) Figure 3-10 Dimensions of installation holes on the pneumatic interface module Disassembling modules featuring pneumatic functionality Please take the following important note into account before disassembling pneumatic and pneumatic interface modules: ! Caution Before disassembling expansion modules featuring pneumatics, you must: disconnect all supply voltages for the ET 200X disconnect the supply of compressed air If you fail to comply with these rules, the following effects are possible: damage to module electronics uncontrollable motions of detached tubing unwanted motions of the actuators connected ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 3-15 Installation 3.3 Setting/modifying the PROFIBUS address The PROFIBUS address defines the address of the ET 200X distributed I/O device on PROFIBUS-DP which is used by the DP master. Set the PROFIBUS address using the DIP switches on the basic module. Valid PROFIBUS addresses The PROFIBUS address can be anything from 1 to 125. The PROFIBUS address 0, which is set when the ET 200 distributed I/O system leaves the factory, is reserved for a programming device/PC. Location of the DIP switches on the BM 141, BM 142 and BM 147/CPU The DIP switches for setting the PROFIBUS address are inside the basic module underneath the connector plate for the connectors for PROFIBUS-DP and the supply voltage. Location of the DIP Switches on the BM 143-DESINA and BM 141-ECOFAST The DIL switches for setting the PROFIBUS address are in a removable configuration connector. The configuration connector is secured to the basic module by an 8-pin M12 round plug. This means that if the basic module has to be replaced it is not necessary to reset the PROFIBUS address. 3-16 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Installation Procedure for BM 141, BM 142 and BM 147/CPU 1. Remove the connector plate from the basic module before you set the PROFIBUS address. The DIL switches are concealed by the connector plate. 2. Set the PROFIBUS address using the DIL switches. The diagram below shows the location of the DIL switches in the basic module as well as an example of the switch settings. Example: PROFIBUS address 78 21 +22 + 23 + 26 = 2 + 4 + 8 + 64 = 78 ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8* * Switch 8 must be OFF! Figure 3-11 Setting the PROFIBUS address Note: The PROFIBUS address in the basic module must always correspond to the PROFIBUS address specified in the configuration software for this ET 200X. ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 3-17 Installation Procedure for BM 143-DESINA and BM 141-ECOFAST 1. Unscrew the configuration connector from the basic module and disconnect the plug (see Figure 3-12). Configuration connector Figure 3-12 Position of the configuration connector on the ET 200X-DESINA/ET 200X-ECOFAST 2. On the configuration connector, slacken the screw securing the cover and remove the cover. 3. Set the PROFIBUS address using the DIL switches. The diagram below shows the configuration connector with the cover removed, as well as an example of the switch settings. 3-18 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Installation Example: PROFIBUS address 92 22 + 23 + 24 + 26 = 4 + 8 + 16 + 64 = 92 ON 1 2 Figure 3-13 ON 3 4 5 6 7 Setting the PROFIBUS address at the configuration connector Note: The PROFIBUS address in the basic module must always correspond to the PROFIBUS address specified in the configuration software for this ET 200X-DESINA/ET 200X-ECOFAST. 4. Reinstall the cover and plug the configuration connector back into the basic module. Secure the configuration connector to the basic module. Modifying the PROFIBUS address You can modify the PROFIBUS address in exactly the same way as you set it. Any change made to the PROFIBUS address takes effect when the supply voltage is turned on the ET 200X. ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 3-19 Installation 3.4 Terminating PROFIBUS with a terminating resistor Purpose of the terminating resistor A bus cable must be connected at both ends (i.e. at the first and last node in the network) with its characteristic impedance. Note The terminating resistor is only necessary with copper conductors with an RS-optic cables (FO). Because the BM 143-DESINA FO basic module is connected to the PROFIBUS-DP by means of fiber-optic cables there is no terminating resistor there. How to proceed with the ET 200X In the case of the ET 200X you switch the terminating resistor using two DIP switches. The two DIP switches are inside the basic module of the ET 200X, under the connector plate for the connector for PROFIBUS-DP and the supply voltage for electronic components/sensors. 1. Remove the connector plate from the basic module before you connect the terminating resistor. The DIL switches are concealed by the connector plate. 2. Connect the terminating resistor using the DIL switches. The diagram below shows the location of the DIL switches in the basic module as well as an example of the switch settings. Note The terminating resistor will not function correctly unless both DIP switches of the terminating resistor are set to "on" or "off". Example: terminating resistor connected on off Figure 3-14 3-20 Connecting the terminating resistor ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Installation How to proceed with the ET 200X-DESINA and ET 200X-ECOFAST with RS 485 Interface Connect these bus nodes using DESINA hybrid cables with copper conductors (RS 485). Attach the terminating resistor for the first and last bus node on the right-hand DESINA connector of the relevant BM 141-ECOFAST or BM 143-DESINA RS485 basic module. You can find the order numbers for the terminating resistor in Appendix A. PROFIBUS-DP with RS 485 interface Terminating resistor Figure 3-15 Attaching the terminating resistor Note The terminating resistor is supplied by the non-switched DC 24 V-NS load voltage. The terminating resistor can only be guaranteed to function without problems if the non-switched DC 24 V-NS load voltage has a tolerance range of 10%. ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 3-21 Installation 3-22 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 4 Wiring In this Chapter This chapter provides an overview of the rules and regulations for operating the ET 200X distributed I/O device. It also shows you how you have to wire the ET 200X distributed I/O device. Contents of Chapter Section Subject Page 4.1 General rules and regulations for operating an ET 200X 4-2 4.2 Operating an ET 200X on a grounded supply 4-4 4.3 Electrical design of the ET 200X 4-6 4.4 Wiring the ET 200X 4-11 Grounding You can set up a grounded or ungrounded configuration for the ET 200X distributed I/O device. For reasons of electromagnetic compatibility, the ET 200X and ET 200X-DESINA/ET 200X-ECOFAST distributed I/O devices must always be non-isolated (connect PE terminal to protective ground!). ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 4-1 Wiring 4.1 General rules and regulations for operating an ET 200X As a component part of a plant or system, the ET 200X distributed I/O device necessitates observance of special rules and regulations, depending on where it is to be used. This chapter provides an overview of the most important rules which you have to observe for integrating the ET 200X distributed I/O device in a plant or system. Specific application Observe the safety and accident prevention regulations that apply to specific applications, e.g. the directive on machinery 89/392/EEC. EMERGENCY STOP devices EMERGENCY STOP devices conforming with IEC 204 (corresponds to DIN VDE 113) must remain effective in all the operating modes of the plant or system. Plant Start-up after certain events The following table shows the points you have to take into account upon start-up of a plant following certain events. If ... Then ... Start-up follows a voltage drop or No dangerous operating states may occur. If failure they do, an emergency stop must be triggered. Start-up of the ET 200X follows an interruption of bus communications Start-up follows unlocking of the EMERGENCY STOP device 4-2 There must not be an uncontrolled or undefined start-up. ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Wiring 24 VDC supply The following table shows you the items you have to take into account in respect of the 24 VDC supply. With ... Pay attention to ... Buildings Outdoor lightning protection Take lightning protection precautions 24 VDC supply lines, signal lines Indoor lightning protection - for example, lightning conductors 24 VDC supply Safe (electrical) isolation of extra-low voltage Protection against external electrical phenomena The following table shows you the items you have to take into account in respect of protection against electrical phenomena or faults. With ... Make sure that ... Any plant or system in which the ET 200X is installed The plant or system is connected to a protective ground for diverting electromagnetic interference. Supply, signal and bus lines The wiring arrangement and installation are correct. Signal and bus lines Any break of a line or conductor does not result in undefined states of the plant or system. ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 4-3 Wiring 4.2 Operating the ET 200X on a grounded supply In this section, you will find information on the overall configuration of an ET 200X distributed I/O device on a grounded supply (TN-S system). The specific subjects discussed are: Circuit-breaking devices, short-circuit and overload protection in accordance with DIN VDE 0100 and DIN VDE 0113 Load power supplies and load circuits Definition: Grounded supply With grounded supplies, the neutral conductor of the system is grounded. A simple ground fault between a live conductor and ground or a grounded section of the plant causes the protective devices to trip. Components and protective measures Different components and protective measures are specified for erecting a complete plant. The types of component and the degree to which the protective measures are binding depend on the DIN VDE regulation that applies to the configuration of your plant. The following table refers to Figure 4-1. Compare ... Ref. to Fig. 4-1 DIN VDE 0100 DIN VDE 0113 Circuit-breaking device for PLC, sensors and signal control elements ... Part 460: Main switch ... Part 1: Disconnector Short-circuit and overload protection: Grouped for sensors and signal control elements ... Part 725: Single-pole protection of circuits ... Part 1: In the case of a grounded secondary circuit: provide single-pole protection Otherwise: Provide all-pole protection Safe electrical isolation Safe electrical isolation must be provided for: Modules that must be supplied with voltages 60 VDC or 25 VAC 24 VDC load circuits Configuring the ET 200X with grounded reference potential When the ET 200X is configured with grounded reference potential, any interference currents are diverted to the protective ground. The connections must be connected externally or in the connector (see Figure 4-1). 4-4 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Wiring Configuring the ET 200X with ungrounded reference potential When the ET 200X is configured with ungrounded reference potential, any interference currents that occur are diverted to the protective ground via an RC network in the basic module. Insulation monitor You must set up an insulation monitor in the following cases: Ungrounded configuration of the ET 200X When dangerous system states can occur as a result of double faults ET 200X in overall configuration Figure 4-1 shows the location of the ET 200X distributed I/O device in the overall system (load power supply and grounding philosophy) for supply from a TN-S system. L1 L2 L3 N PE Low-voltage distribution For example, TN-S system (3 400 V) ET 200X BM In the case of the ET 200X-DESINA and ET 200X-ECOFAST: DC 24 V-NS AC DC mP Data Minternal 1L+ 1M In an ungrounded ET 200X configuration, there is no con nection between 1M and PE. Ground bus AC Load circuit AC 400V for motor starters and frequency converters DC 24 VDC load circuit for digital and analog outputs and motor starters (fed via connectors on basic module) Figure 4-1 Operating the ET 200X with reference potential ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 4-5 Wiring 4.3 Electrical design of the ET 200X Electrical isolation between ... The electrical design of the ET 200X includes isolation between: The load circuits and all the other circuit components of the ET 200X The PROFIBUS-DP port in the basic module and circuit components ET 200X configuration The diagrams below show the potentials in an ET 200X configuration. L1 L2 L3 N PE BM EM DO EM DI EM 300 DS Data mP 1M 1L+ AC DC 1M 2L+ AC DC 2M Actuator Ground bus Note: The potentials of the analog modules EM AI and EM AO correspond to those of the EM DI expansion modules. Figure 4-2 4-6 M 3 Potentials present in an ET 200X configuration with motor starter ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Wiring L1 L2 L3 N PE BM EM DO EM DI EM 148-FC Data mP 1M mC 1L+ AC DC 1M 2L+ AC DC 2M mC Actuator Filter Ground bus Note: The potentials of the analog modules EM AI and EM AO correspond to those of the EM DI expansion modules. Figure 4-3 M 3 Brake Potentials present in an ET 200X configuration with frequency converter ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 4-7 Wiring L1 L2 L3 N PE BM 143-DESINA FO or BM 143-DESINA RS485 Data Feed DESINA connection mP Interface A B DC 24 V-NS AC DC M-NS DC 24 V-S AC DC M-S Loop through DESINA connection A B DC 24 V-NS M-NS DC 24 V-S M-S Ground bus Figure 4-4 4-8 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 Potentials present in an ET 200X-DESINA configuration ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Wiring L1 L2 L3 N PE BM 141-ECOFAST Data Feed DESINA connection mP RS 485 interface A B DC 24 V-NS AC DC M-NS DC 24 V-S AC DC M-S Loop through DESINA connection A B DC 24 V-NS M-NS DC 24 V-S M-S Ground bus Figure 4-5 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 Potentials present in an ET 200X-ECOFAST configuration Note In the case of the ET 200X-DESINA/ET 200X-ECOFAST distributed I/O device, the frame potentials of the switched and non-switched load voltage are connected to each other. ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 4-9 Wiring Note The following applies to the BM 143-DESINA FO, BM 143-DESINA RS485, and EM 143-DESINA modules: All inputs receive the non-switched load voltage. Outputs (if present) of sockets X1, X3, X5, X7 are supplied by the switched load voltage. Outputs (if present) of sockets X2, X4, X6, X8 are supplied by the non-switched load voltage. The outputs of all other expansion modules receive the switched load voltage. Protection against destruction of components In order to prevent the components of the ET 200X from being destroyed, you must always protect the supply voltage lines to the electronics/sensors and the load voltage with an external circuit-breaker - for example, Siemens Series 5SN1 that has the following characteristics: 4-10 Protection of the supply voltage for the electronic components/sensors: 230 VAC (with rated current)/max. 6 A: tripping characteristic (type) B or C Protection of the load voltage: 230 VAC (with rated current)/max. 16 A: tripping characteristic (type) B or C ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Wiring 4.4 Wiring the ET 200X Wiring procedure You have to wire the ET 200X distributed I/O device in several steps. We recommend you adopt the following procedure: Table 4-1 Order of steps for wiring the ET 200X Step Procedure See ... 1. Install the connectors for PROFIBUS-DP, supply and load voltage, if required. Section 4.4.1 2. Wire the above connectors. Section 4.4.2 3. Wire the connectors for connection to the inputs and outputs on the modules. Section 4.4.4 4. Connect the protective ground to the basic module. Section 4.4.5 5. Connect the protective ground to expansion modules with analog inputs and outputs. Section 4.4.6 6. Install the connectors and the plugs for the inputs and outputs on the modules. Section 4.4.7 7. Seal unused sockets with M12 plugs. Note Steps 1 and 2 do not apply to ET 200X-DESINA, because the cables used are of the ready-to-use DESINA hybrid type. ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 4-11 Wiring Suitable cable types The table below shows the suitable cable types and their applications. You can find a list of cables and their order numbers in Appendix A. If cables other those listed in Appendix A are used for connecting and looping through PROFIBUS-DP, these cables must meet the specification for cable type A as per PROFIBUS-DP. Table 4-2 Cable types Cable type 5-core cable, shielded Application Connecting and looping through PROFIBUS-DP and supply voltage to electronics/sensors via a common cable 3-core Connecting supply voltage to electronics/sensors or load copper cable, flexible voltage1 2-core cable, shielded (bus cable) Connecting and looping through PROFIBUS-DP DESINA hybrid cable (fiber-optic cable or RS 485, prepared with a DESINA connector) Connecting and looping through PROFIBUS-DP and non-switched and switched supply voltages via a common cable The DESINA hybrid cable is supplied ready for use (wired) with DESINA connectors in various lengths. See Appendix A. 3-, 4- or 5-core Connecting the actuators and sensors to the digital copper cable, flexible inputs/outputs2 4-core copper cable, shielded Connecting the actuators and sensors to the analog inputs/outputs2 4 or 6-core copper cable, flexible Connecting the motor starter3: The load and brake supply voltage (with looping through) A load (with brake, only a 6-core cable can be used; see the EM 300 Motor Starters manual for order number) 4-, or 8-core copper cable, flexible, shielded 1 2 3 4 4-12 Connecting the frequency converter4: The load supply voltage (with looping through) A load with brake and thermistor (only an 8-core cable) For order number see EM 148-FC frequency converter Manual Core cross-section must be 2.5 mm2 Core cross-section must be 0.75 mm2 Core cross-section must be = 1.5 or 2.5 mm2 Core cross-section must be = 1.5, 2.5 or 4 mm2 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Wiring Table 4-3 Technical specifications of the 5-core cable Parameters Value Type of cable With PVC sheath 02Y(ST)C LIY-J Y 120.65/2.56-150 LI 310.75 VI KF30 With PUR sheath, suitable for drum 02Y(ST)C LIY-J Y 11 120.65/2.56-150 LI 310.75 PETROL use Cable structure a) Core LIY 0.75/1.70 Copper strands 24 0.2 BLW Polyvinylchloride sheathing (PVC) Section thickness 1.23 mm 1.7 mm approx. 0.23 mm b) Core 02Y 0.65/2.56 LI Copper strands 19 0.13 BLW Celled polyethylene sheathing 0.65 mm 2.56 mm c) Pair LI02Y(ST)C 120.25/2.6 2 cores to b) RD, GN braided Aluminum coated foil, overlapped Braided shield made of Cu wires Outer sheath 0.15 mm VZN approx. 65 % Core 1 bundle to c), 3 cores to a) GNYE, BK, BL Filler Plastic foil, overlapped 7.9 mm Sheath PVC or PUR Section thickness approx. 0.8 mm Outside diameter (9.5 0.5) mm Permissible minimum bending radius recurrent bending once-only bending 70 mm Operating temperature -30 C to +60 C Weight approx. 105 kg/km ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 35 mm 4-13 Wiring Table 4-3 Technical specifications of the 5-core cable, continued Parameters Value Electrical properties at 20 C Tests in accordance with DIN VDE 0472 Conductor resistance of cores to a) Conductor resistance of cores to b) Insulation resistance Operating capacity 1 Surge impedance at 3 to 20 MHz Wave attenuation at 0.2 MHz 1 Operating voltage (peak voltage) Test voltage (core/core eff. 50 Hz 1 min) Test voltage (core/shield eff. 50 Hz 1 min) 1 Flame test 26 /km 84 /km 20 M/km 30 pF/m 135 to 165 0.6 dB/100 m 35 V 500 V 500 V to VDE 0472, Part 804, test type B only cables with PUR sheath Oil resistance Suitable for drum use 1 4.4.1 to VDE 0471, Part 804, test type B Yes Values for pair to c) Installing/removing connectors To affix the cables and provide IP 65, IP 66, and IP 67 protection, the connectors for PROFIBUS-DP, the supply voltage, and load voltage are supplied with M16 cable glands. A connector assembly consists of a protective shell, a 6-pin connector, 1(2) M16 cable gland(s) and 1(2) lock nut(s). You can find the order numbers for the connectors in Appendix A. Shell 1st M16 cable gland Figure 4-6 4-14 2nd M16 cable gland can be attached Connector: protective shell with an M16 cable gland ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Wiring Installing connectors Proceed as follows to install a connector: 1. Pierce the shell of the connector with a screwdriver at the point at which you want to feed through the cable. Risk of injury. Watch your fingers. 2. Place the lock nut in the shell over the pierced hole. 3. Screw the M16 cable gland tightly onto the protective shell. Note: If you feed PROFIBUS-DP and the supply voltage for the electronic components/sensors to the basic module via 2 separate cables, you must install two M16 cable glands on the protective shell. 4. Feed the cable through the installed M16 cable gland. 5. Wire the 6-pin plug connector (see Section 4.4.2). In doing so, comply with the wiring rules listed in Table 4-4. 6. Withdraw the cable until the start of the sheath is roughly level with the start of the M16 cable gland, then screw the M16 cable gland tight (the sheath is clamped). 7. Feed the wired plug connector back into the shell until it snaps into place. This is shown in the diagram below (apart from the wiring). Locking hooks Connector Shell Locking hooks Figure 4-7 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Snapping the connector into place in the shell 4-15 Wiring Removing connectors If you want to remove a connector, proceed as follows 1. Release the two locking hooks as illustrated in Figure 4-8 using a pointed implement. 2. Remove the connector from the shell. 1 1 Connector Shell 2 2 1 1 Figure 4-8 4-16 1 Release locking hooks 2 Remove the connector from the shell Removing the connector from the shell ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Wiring 4.4.2 Wiring connectors Rules for wiring connectors The following table shows you the rules you have to take into account in respect of the wiring of the connectors. Table 4-4 Wiring rules for connectors Wiring connectors Rules for ... Connectable core cross-sections: Solid conductors Options for PROFIBUS-DP connection: 2-core cable, shielded (bus cable) Direct-buried cable Flexible conductors with wire end ferrule without wire end ferrule 0.25 to 1.5 mm2 0.25 to 2.5 mm2 Number of cores per terminal connection 1 or combination of 2 cores up to 1.5 mm2 (sum) in a common wire end ferrule Permissible outside diameter of cable 4 to 10 mm Bared length of cores (with or without insulation collar) 6 mm Bared length of cable sheath 45 mm Wire end ferrules to DIN 46228 without insulation collar with insulation collar Form A up to 7 mm long Form E up to 8 mm long Bared Lengths: Example The diagram below shows an example of bared lengths. These lengths apply to all cables that are suitable for use with the connector assembly. Braided shields must be twisted and inserted into wire end ferrules, and the projecting lengths cut off. The shield around the PROFIBUS cores must be brought as close as possible to the connectors. 45 IIIII IIIII IIIII Braided shield twisted and cut to correct length 6 Figure 4-9 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Bared length of a 5-core cable 4-17 Wiring Connection alternatives The following connection alternatives are available for the ET 200X in accordance with the configuration options: Supply voltage for the electronics/sensors and PROFIBUS-DP fed via a common cable Supply voltage for the electronics/sensors and PROFIBUS-DP fed via separate cables The load voltage must either be fed separately to each ET 200X or looped through. Wiring of PROFIBUS-DP and supply voltage If you want to feed PROFIBUS-DP and the supply voltage for the electronics/sensors to the basic module separately, you will need: A connector A 2-core cable, shielded for the PROFIBUS-DP terminal connection (the braided shield must be twisted, inserted in a wire end ferrule and connected to pin 2 of the shield; see Figure 4-10) A 3-core, flexible copper cable for the supply voltage connection If you want to feed PROFIBUS-DP and the supply voltage for the electronics/sensors to the basic module via a common cable, you will need a 5-core, shielded cable in addition to the connector (6ES7 194-1LY00-0AA0-Z). Connector pinout You must always wire the connector as shown in the diagram below, irrespective of whether you are using one or two cables. The pins for the PROFIBUS-DP terminal connection are highlighted in bold type. B (red) Shield (PE) A (green) 1 2 3 4 5 6 BM 141/142: PE (green-yellow)* L+* (black) M* (blue) BM 147/CPU: unassigned * Connect supply voltage for electronics/sensors to these pins; either do not connect the cable's 3rd core when using a BM 147/CPU or connect it to pin 3 Figure 4-10 4-18 Pinout of the connector for wiring PROFIBUS-DP and the supply voltage for the electronics/sensors ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Wiring Looping through PROFIBUS-DP and supply voltage If you want to loop PROFIBUS-DP and/or the supply voltage for the electronics/sensors through to the next ET 200X, you have to wire the second connector. This connector must be wired in exactly the same way as the connector for feeding the first ET 200X (see Figure 4-10). Wiring of load power supply If you want to connect a load power supply (24 VDC), you will need: A connector A 3-core, flexible Cu cable Wire the connector to pins 1, 2 and 3 as shown in the diagram below. Terminals 1 and 4; 2 and 5; 3 and 6 are internally jumpered. PE L+ PE 1 2 3 4 5 6 M Figure 4-11 ! L+ M Pinout of the load voltage connector Caution If you wire the connectors incorrectly, the device or its components may be damaged beyond repair! Looping through load voltage If you want to loop a load voltage (24 VDC) through to the next ET 200X, you must wire a 3-core, flexible, copper cable to the connector (pins 4, 5 and 6) in addition to the wiring arrangement shown in Figure 4-11. Then wire the other end of the cable to pins 1, 2 and 3 of the next load voltage connector. Always use the same core colors for the same signals. Note The load voltage can be looped through from the power module only when the connector is plugged into the power module. ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 4-19 Wiring Looping through the load voltage from the power module If you want to loop the load voltage through to the next power module or ET 200X, you must install a second M16 cable gland on the connector (see wiring in Figure 4-11). Load voltage supply Connector assembly Load voltage looped through to next module Figure 4-12 Power module with connector and 2 M16 cable glands Note The load voltage can be looped through from the power module only when the connector is plugged into the power module. Using a common power supply You can feed the supply voltage for the electronics/sensors and for loads from a single power supply, providing no electrical isolation is necessary between the sensor and the load supply. You simply need to wire the two connectors together externally (L+, M and PE). Note the restrictions imposed by the current consumption (see Section 2.8)! If necessary, use a power module or a SITOP power 24V/10A. Always plug in 3 connectors Note You must always plug all three connectors into the basic module, irrespective of whether or not they are wired, in order to ensure that the degree of protection (IP 65, IP 66 or IP 67) is achieved. An alternative is to close unused connectors with covers. You can find the order numbers for the covers in Appendix A. 4-20 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Wiring 4.4.3 Pinout of the ET 200X-DESINA / ET 200X-ECOFAST Figure 4-13 shows the pinout of the connector for the BM 143-DESINA FO basic module. View of the connections of the basic module (fiber-optic cable) Supply 5 2 1 Looping through Figure 4-13 Pinout X01 Supply 1 2 3 4 5 6 L+ (NS) M (NS) M (S) L+ (S) Signal A (RD) Signal B (TD) 1 2 3 4 5 6 L+ (NS) M (NS) M (S) L+ (S) Signal A (RD) Signal B (TD) (Supply voltage for electronics/ sensors, actuators PROFIBUS-DP) 6 3 4 5 2 1 Socket X02 Loop through 6 3 4 Pinout of the connector for the BM 143-DESINA FO Figure 4-14 shows the pinout of the connector for the BM 141-ECOFAST and BM 143-DESINA RS485 basic modules. View of the connections of the basic module (RS 485) Supply 5 2 1 6 3 4 Socket Pinout X01 Supply 1 2 3 4 5 6 L+ (NS) M (NS) M (S) L+ (S) Signal A Signal B 1 2 3 4 5 6 L+ (NS) M (NS) M (S) L+ (S) Signal A Signal B (Supply voltage for electronics/ sensors, actuators PROFIBUS-DP) Looping through X02 Loop through 5 2 1 Figure 4-14 6 3 4 Pinout of the connector for the BM 141-ECOFAST and BM 143-DESINA RS485 basic modules ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 4-21 Wiring 4.4.4 Wiring the connectors for inputs and outputs Connectors for digital inputs and outputs You can connect digital inputs and outputs to the round, 5-pin M12 sockets on the front of the basic/expansion modules. Alternatively, you can use 5-pin M12 coupler plugs or Y connectors. Please refer to Appendix A for the order numbers. Connectors for analog inputs and outputs You connect analog inputs and outputs to the round, 5-pin M12 sockets on the front of the expansion module. You use 4- or 5-pin M12 coupler plugs. You can obtain further information on the connectors on request: 4-pin Outgoing cable unit PG 7 99-1429-814-04 4-pin Outgoing cable unit PG 9 99-1429-812-04 5-pin Outgoing cable unit PG 7 99-1437-814-05 5-pin Outgoing cable unit PG 9 99-1437-812-05 Address for ordering: Franz Binder GmbH + Co. Elektrische Bauelemente KG Rotelstrae 27 D-74172 Neckarsulm 4-22 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Wiring Wiring of M12 coupler plug for digital inputs To connect the digital inputs, you require: A 5-pin, M12 coupler plug, possibly integrally molded A flexible 3-, 4- or 5-core copper cable with a core cross-section of 0.75 mm2 Wire the coupler plug in accordance with the pinout table below. The pinout of the sockets X1 to X4/X8, which are used for the inputs on the ET 200X, is shown together with the data for the individual modules in Section 7.1 ff. Table 4-5 Pinout of the coupler plug for digital inputs Assignment Pin 1 2** View of coupler plug (wiring side) 24 V power supply for sensor* 2 Input signal 1 3 Chassis ground, power supply 4 Input signal 5 PE 5 3 4 * Made available by the ET 200X for the connected sensor ** Only relevant if socket has 2 assigned channels Note If a sensor has a normally-closed contact and a normally-open contact, the normally-closed contact is automatically wired to pin 2. The channel assigned to pin 2 can thus no longer be used for the adjacent socket. Wiring of M12 coupler plug for digital inputs (DESINA/ECOFAST) To connect the digital inputs, you require: A 5-pin, M12 coupler plug, possibly integrally molded A flexible 4- or 5-core copper cable with a core cross-section of 0.75 mm2 Wire the coupler plug in accordance with the pinout table below. The pinout of sockets X1 to X8, which are used for the inputs on the ET 200X-DESINA/ECOFAST, is shown together with the data for the individual modules in Section 7.5 ff. Connecting digital inputs (DESINA): You have set the following parameters: Pin 2 as diagnostic input and pin 4 as digital input. Channel type (pin 4): digital input Input functionality (pin 2): diagnostic input ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 4-23 Wiring Table 4-6 * 4-24 Pinout of the coupler plug for digital inputs (DESINA) Pin Assignment for digital input (DESINA) 1 24 V power supply for sensor* 2 Diagnostic input of DESINA sensor 3 Chassis ground, power supply 4 Input signal from DESINA sensor 5 not assigned View of coupler plug (wiring side) Digital input (DESINA) 2 1 5 3 4 Made available by the ET 200X-DESINA/ET 200X-ECOFAST for the connected sensor ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Wiring Connecting digital inputs (standard): You have set the following parameters: Pin 2 as input with NC function and pin 4 as digital input. Channel type (pin 4): digital input Input functionality (pin 2): input with NC function Table 4-7 Pinout of the coupler plug for digital inputs (standard) Pin Assignment for digital input (standard) 1 24 V power supply for sensor* 2 Input signal** (NC function) 3 Chassis ground, power supply 4 Input signal 5 not assigned View of coupler plug (wiring side) Digital inputs (standard) 2 1 5 3 4 * Made available by the ET 200X-DESINA/ET 200X-ECOFAST for the connected sensor ** NC function: Non-switched means: To the process when status is "1", in PII status "0"; switched means: To the process when status is "0", in PII status "1" Wiring of M12 coupler plug for digital outputs To connect the digital inputs, you require: A 5-pin, M12 coupler plug, possibly integrally molded A flexible, 3- or 4-core copper cable with a core cross-section of 0.75 mm2 Wire the coupler plug in accordance with the pinout table below. The pinout of sockets X1 to X4/X8, which are used for the outputs on the ET 200X, is shown in Section 7.4 ff. Table 4-8 Pinout of the coupler plug for digital outputs Assignment Pin * 1 - 2* Output signal 3 Chassis ground, load voltage 4 Output signal 5 PE View of coupler plug (wiring side) 2 1 5 3 4 Only relevant if socket has 2 assigned channels ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 4-25 Wiring Wiring of M12 coupler plug for digital inputs (DESINA/ECOFAST) To connect the digital inputs, you require: A 5-pin, M12 coupler plug, possibly integrally molded A flexible 4- or 5-core copper cable with a core cross-section of 0.75 mm2 Wire the coupler plug in accordance with the pinout table below. You can find the pinout of sockets X1 to X8 which are used for the outputs on the ET 200X-DESINA/ET 200X-ECOFAST as of Section 7.5. Connecting digital outputs (DESINA): Your parameter settings are as follows: Channel type (pin 4): digital output Input functionality (pin 2): diagnostic input Table 4-9 * 4-26 Pinout of the coupler plug for digital outputs (DESINA) Pin Assignment for digital output (DESINA) 1 24 V power supply for diagnostics input* 2 Diagnostic input 3 Chassis ground, load supply 4 Output signal to DESINA actuator 5 not assigned View of coupler plug (wiring side) Digital output (DESINA) 2 1 5 3 4 Made available by the ET 200X-DESINA for the diagnostics input ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Wiring Connecting digital outputs (standard): Your parameter settings are as follows: Channel type (pin 4): digital output Input functionality (pin 2): diagnostic input Table 4-10 Pinout of the coupler plug for digital outputs (standard) * Pin Assignment for digital output (standard) 1 24 V power supply for diagnostics input* 2 Diagnostic input 3 Chassis ground, load supply 4 Output signal to actuator 5 not assigned View of coupler plug (wiring side) Digital output (standard) 2 1 5 3 4 Diagnostics input Made available by the ET 200X-DESINA/ET 200X-ECOFAST for the diagnostic input Y connector The Y connector permits double wiring of actuators and sensors at the inputs or outputs of the ET 200X. It is advisable to use the Y connector if each socket of a module has two assigned channels. The Y connector divides the two channels between two coupler plugs (see Tables 4-11 and 4-12 for pinout). Note: You cannot use the Y connector in conjunction with the M12, 5-pin angular coupler plug. OO OO Screw to ET 200X Figure 4-15 O O O O O O A (top) Inputs or outputs connected via M12 coupler plugs B (bottom) Y connector Note The Y connector cannot be used on the expansion modules EM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V (long type of construction) and EM 142 DO 8 x DC 24V/1.2A. ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 4-27 Wiring Wiring of coupler plugs (DI) for Y connector To connect the digital inputs using a Y connector, you require: A Y connector and 2 M12 coupler plugs A flexible, 3- or 4-core copper cable with a core cross-section of 0.75 mm2 Wire the two M12 coupler plugs for the Y connector in accordance with the pinout table below. The assignment of pin 4 depends on the socket of the ET 200X to which you screw the Y connector. Table 4-11 Pinout of the coupler plugs for digital inputs when a Y connector is used Coupler plug assignment ... Pin A (top) B (bottom) 1 24 V power supply for sensor* 2 - 3 Chassis ground, power supply 4 Input signal on socket X1: channel 0 socket X2: channel 1 socket X3: channel 2 socket X4: channel 3 5 View of Y connector 4 - Input signal on so. X1: channel 4/1** so. X2: channel 5/-** so. X3: channel 6/3** so. X4: channel 7/-** 3 5 1 A (top) 2 2 1 5 4 PE 3 B (bottom) * Made available by the ET 200X for the connected sensor ** Channel specified after the "/" valid if the BM/EM has four channels 4-28 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Wiring Wiring of coupler plugs (DO) for Y connector To connect the digital outputs using a Y connector, you require: A Y connector Two M12 coupler plugs A flexible, 3- or 4-core copper cable with a core cross-section of 0.75 mm2 Wire the two M12 coupler plugs for the Y connector in accordance with the pinout table below. The assignment of pin 4 depends on the socket of the ET 200X to which you screw the Y connector. Table 4-12 Pinout of the coupler plugs for digital outputs when a Y connector is used Coupler plug assignment ... Pin A (top) B (bottom) 1 - 2 - 3 Chassis ground, load voltage 4 Output signal on socket X1: channel 0 socket X2: channel 1 socket X3: channel 2 socket X4: channel 3 5 View of Y connector 4 - Output signal on socket X1: channel 1 socket X2: - socket X3: channel 3 socket X4: - 3 5 1 A (top) 2 2 1 PE 5 4 3 B (bottom) Pinout of the sockets for inputs/outputs The pinout of the sockets for inputs/outputs is shown together with the data for the individual modules in Section 7.1 ff. Wiring the M12 coupler plug for analog inputs and outputs To connect the analog inputs and analog outputs, you require: A 4- or 5-pin, M12 coupler plug A shielded 4-core copper cable with a core cross-section of 0.75 mm2 Wire the coupler plug in accordance with the pinout of the sockets on the expansion module. You will find the pinout in the information on the various modules as of Section 7.21.9. You may have to connect the expansion module to the protective ground (see Section 4.4.6). ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 4-29 Wiring 4.4.5 Connecting the protective ground to the basic module Protective ground connection You must connect the protective ground to the basic module. A grounding screw is provided on the basic module for this purpose. Minimum cross-section from the conductor to the protective ground: 4 mm2. The connection to the protective ground is also required to divert the interference currents and for EMC resistance. To improve the EMC performance, it is advisable to select the largest possible cross-section for the wire to the protective ground (e.g. copper braided cable). Note Make sure that the protective ground connection always has a low impedance. Figure 4-16 shows how the protective ground connects to the BM 141, BM 142 and BM 147/CPU basic modules. The fixing screw M5 is enclosed with the basic module as standard. Figure 4-16 4-30 Connecting the protective ground to the BM 141, 142 and 147/CPU basic modules ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Wiring Figure 4-17 shows how the basic modules BM 143-DESINA FO, BM 143-DESINA RS485, and BM 141 DI 8DC 24V ECOFAST must be connected to protective ground. Grounding screw Wire to protective ground Figure 4-17 Connecting the basic modules BM 143-DESINA FO, BM 143-DESINA RS485, and BM 141 DI 8DC 24V ECOFAST to protective ground EMC You will find additional notes on EMC installation and wiring in the manual for the DP master you are using or for the host system. ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 4-31 Wiring 4.4.6 Connecting a protective ground to expansion modules with analog inputs and outputs Grounding expansion modules with AI/IO To ensure the ET 200X remains operative even when subject to interference (especially RF coupling in accordance with ENV 50141), you must ground every expansion module with analog inputs or outputs separately. Connection to protective ground You must connect the protective ground to the expansion module. A grounding screw is provided on the expansion module for this purpose. You either connect the protective ground to the PE screw of the basic module (see Section 4.4.5) or directly to protective ground. Minimum cross-section from the conductor to the protective ground: 4 mm2. Note Make sure that the protective ground has a low impedance (Figure 4-18). Figure4-18 shows you how to connect the protective earth to the analog module. The M5 fixing screw is attached to the analog module such that it cannot get lost. Figure 4-18 Connecting the protective ground to the analog module EMC You will find additional notes on EMC installation and wiring in the manual for the DP master you are using or for the host system. 4-32 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Wiring 4.4.7 Plugging the connectors into the ET 200X Requirements for plugging in connectors You must have wired the cables to the connectors. In addition, you must have set the PROFIBUS address (in accordance with your configuration) and if necessary connected the terminating resistance. Plugging connectors into the ET 200X Proceed as follows after you have completed the wiring: 1. Press two fixing screws into each connector and plug the connectors into the plate. 2. Plug the plate with the two connectors and the connector for the load voltage into the basic module. Note the mechanical polarization of the connector plate. Note: You must always plug all three connectors into the basic module irrespective of whether or not they are wired in order to ensure that the degree of protection (IP 65, IP 66 or IP 67) is achieved. An alternative is to close unused connectors with covers. 3. Screw the connectors tightly onto the basic module with a torque of max. 0.8 Nm. 4. Plug all the other connectors into the appropriate sockets on the front of the basic module/expansion modules. ! Caution The connector for the load voltage, the coupler plugs and the Y connectors must not be removed from the sockets for the inputs/outputs while the ET 200X is operating, nor must the power connectors be removed from the motor starters or frequency converters. You should therefore always either disconnect the ET 200X from PROFIBUS-DP (by removing the PROFIBUS-DP connector) or switch off the supply voltage to the electronics/sensors, the load voltage and the load before you remove the above connectors! ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 4-33 Wiring Installing the connector on the ET 200X-DESINA/ET 200X-ECOFAST Proceed as follows after you have completed the wiring of the sensors and actuators: 1. Push up the latch for the DESINA connectors on the basic module. 2. Plug the DESINA connectors (non-switched and switched load voltages and PROFIBUS-DP via fiber-optic or copper cables) into the sockets on the basic module. Note the mechanical coding of the connectors for feed and loop-through. Note: You must always plug both DESINA connectors into the basic module in order to ensure that the degree of protection (IP 65, IP 66, or IP 67) is achieved. Fit a cover if a DESINA socket remains unused. You can find the order numbers for the covers in Appendix A. 3. Push down the latch for the DESINA connectors. Latch DESINA connector 1 3 2 Figure 4-19 Plugging connectors into the ET 200X-DESINA/ET 200X-ECOFAST 4. Plug all the other connectors into the appropriate sockets on the front of the basic module/expansion modules. 4-34 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Wiring ! Caution Do not unplug the DESINA connectors or the coupler plugs for the inputs/outputs or the power connector for the motor starters or frequency converters while the ET 200X-DESINA/ET 200X-ECOFAST is operating, or the modules may be damaged or possibly even destroyed. Always switch off the non-switched and switched load voltages and loads before unplugging the connectors. Installing connectors on analog modules Note You must push the M12 coupler plug securely into the analog socket (against the resistance of the shield plate) so that the thread of the coupler plug is engaged. When doing this, watch the mechanical coding on the connector. Installing connectors on power modules Install the connector with the two short screws on the power module. The short screws are enclosed with the power module as standard. Covering up unused sockets You must seal off any sockets which are not required with M12 screw caps in order to ensure the degree of protection (IP 65, IP 66 or IP 67) is maintained. You can find the order numbers for the M12 screw caps in Appendix A. ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 4-35 Wiring Wired ET 200X The diagram below shows a wired ET 200X. (The power connectors for the load supply voltage and the load on the motor starter are not featured here.) Figure 4-20 4.4.8 Wired ET 200X Wiring the SITOP power power supply and adapting It to deployment conditions Only very little wiring work is required to integrate the SITOP power 24V/10A power supply into the ET 200X. The output voltage can either be used as supply voltage for electronics/sensors and/or load voltage. The power supply response in the event of a fault can be parameterized. 4-36 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Wiring Wiring ! Warning Before starting the installation work, the main switch on the system is to be switched off and secured to prevent it from being turned on again. If this point is not observed, death or severe physical injury may be caused through touching live components. Proceed as follows to wire the SITOP power: 1. The connections for the incoming voltage are accessible once the terminal cover has been removed. Undo the four screws to gain access . ! Caution Only qualified personnel may open the device. They must know how to handle electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD). Terminal cover Figure 4-21 Removing the terminal cover 2. Take off the terminal cover. When doing this, make sure that the seal is not damaged. 3. Feed the power cable through the M16 cable gland. The outside diameter of the mains power supply cable must be between 4 mm and 10 mm and be suitable for special operating conditions (environmental influences). . 4. Connect the mains power supply cable to supply terminals L1, N and PE Conductor cross-sections between 0.5 mm2 and 2.5 mm2 can be clamped. ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 4-37 Wiring Note The screw-type terminals can be plugged in as a unit. AC 120V LINK N L1 INPUT 120/230 VAC 50/60Hz R306 L+ M L+ M OUTPUT 24 VDC / 10A AD22.8...25.2 JUST VDC AC INPUT Figure 4-22 Connecting the mains power supply cable Note When installing the SITOP power 24V/10A power supply, the relevant DIN/VDE regulations or the regulations specific to the country are to be observed. The supply voltage (120/230 VAC) must be in accordance with VDE 0100 and VDE 0160. A protective device (fuse) and disconnecting device to isolate the power supply must be provided. Operation on 120 VAC When operating on a 120 VAC power supply, a bridge must be wired between the two "AC 120V LINK" terminals. The bridge must have the same cross-section and insulation as the mains power supply cable. The length must not exceed 100 mm. ! Warning Even the optional bridge carries dangerous electrical voltage! 5. Install the M16 cable gland(s). 4-38 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Wiring 6. If required, make the following settings: Setting the output voltage The output voltage can be set in the range from 22.8 V to 25.2 V using potentiometer R306. AC 120V LINK N L1 INPUT Figure 4-23 ! AC 120/230V 50/60Hz R306 L+ M L+ M OUTPUT 24 VDC / 10A AD22.8...25.2 JUST VDC Potentiometer R306 for setting the output voltage Warning Potentiometer R306 may only be operated with an insulated screwdriver in accordance with DIN 7437, because components carrying dangerous electrical voltage may be touched unintentionally. ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 4-39 Wiring Switching the output voltage to the bus segment of the ET 200X The top section of the SITOP power must be removed to make the following settings. ! Warning The top section may only be removed when the mains voltage has been switched off and measures put in place to ensure that it cannot be turned on again. Undo the six screws and remove the top section. When doing this, make sure that the seal is not damaged. Figure 4-24 Removing the top section The output voltage can be switched on the underside of the top section by rearranging adapter plate A1 on the various bus segments of the ET 200X. For this, the combinations listed in Table 4-13 are possible. In the case of adapter position IV, basic insulation is provided between the bus segments and the output terminals (for an insulation rating voltage of 400 VAC). The reference potential of the supply voltage for electronics/sensor 1L+ and load voltage supply 2L+ are not floating. 4-40 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Wiring Table 4-13 Switching the output voltage to the bus segment of the ET 200X Supply voltage for electronics/ sensor 1L+ Position of adapter plate A1 Load voltage supply 2L+ Output terminals I x - x II x x x III - x x IV - - x "As delivered" condition x: Voltage present -: No voltage present STORE RESTART R230 8A 10 A Adapter plate A1 in position I Figure 4-25 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Adapter plate A1 in position II Adapter plate A1 in position III ("As delivered" condition) Adapter plate A1 in position IV Positions of adapter plate A1 4-41 Wiring Switching over the short circuit response The SITOP power response in the event of a short circuit on the output side can be switched over using potentiometer R230. Table 4-14 Switching over the short circuit response Position of potentiometers R230 Response in the event of a short circuit Right-hand stop "RESTART" Automatic attempts to start up Left-hand stop "STORE" Stored shutdown. RESET by switching off the mains voltage for at least 5 minutes. STORE "As delivered" condition RESTART 8A R230 STORE 10 A Figure 4-26 4-42 RESTART R230 Position of the R230 potentiometer ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Wiring Switching over the power supply Output current limitation can be changed by rearranging adapter plate A2. Note Switching over to 10 A is only permissible at ambient temperature < 40 C. Table 4-15 Switching over current limiting Position of adapter plate A2 Application of current limiting at approx. 8A 9.5 A 10 A 11 A STORE RESTART 8A R230 10 A "As delivered" condition RESTART R230 8A 10A Adapter plate A2 in position 8 A ("As delivered" condition) Figure 4-27 RESTART R230 8A 10A Adapter plate A2 in position 10 A Positions of the adapter plate A2 7. Refit the top section and the terminal cover and screw down both units securely. Note In order to ensure that IP 65 degree of protection is maintained, once the wiring and setting is complete, all M16 cable glands and covers must be screwed together correctly. Tightening torque ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 For casing screws: 0.5 Nm For M16 cable glands: tighten the cap nut until the rubber seal lies on the cable. Then tighten for a further 1/2 turn. 4-43 Configuration Options 2-18 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Commissioning and Diagnostics 5 Contents of Chapter Section Subject Page 5.1 Configuring ET 200X-DESINA 5-2 5.2 Commissioning and starting up the DP slave 5-7 5.3 Diagnostics using LEDs 5-13 5.4 Parameterizable diagnostic messages 5-20 5.5 Evaluating ET 200X interrupts 5-24 5.6 ET 200X diagnostics with STEP 7 and STEP 5 5-27 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 5-1 Commissioning and Diagnostics 5.1 Configuring ET 200X-DESINA Introduction An ET 200X-DESINA channel assumes the functionality determined by the settings sent to it on parameterization. The possibilities are: Digital input Digital output Diagnostic input Diagnostics input with diagnostics frame Input with NC function pin 4 pin 2 Parameterization for the functional input (Pin 2) is displayed and analyzed in accordance with Table5-1. Table 5-1 Display and analysis of the parameters for the DESINA functional input Pin 2 is "1" (+24 V) Process image is always "0" Analysis Diagnostics input (default) Red off Process image Diagnostics input with diagnostics frame Red off Process image and SFC 13, for example (see Section 5.6.1) Input with NC function Yellow on Process image Pin 2 is "0" Process image is always "1" 5-2 LEDs LEDs Analysis Diagnostics input (default) Red on Process image Diagnostics input with diagnostics frame Red on Process image and SFC 13, for example (see Section 5.6.1) Input with NC function Yellow off Process image ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Commissioning and Diagnostics Configuration 2 bytes for inputs and 2 bytes for outputs are reserved for data transfer in the process image (PI). In the process image the input and output ranges must not be at the same address. Figure 5-1 shows the arrangement of the digital inputs and outputs on the BM 143-DESINA and EM 143-DESINA in relation to the bits of the inputs and outputs in the PI. SF RUN DC 24 V-NS DC 24 V-S X1 X01 X2 X02 X3 X4 X5 X7 X6 X8 7 Figure 5-1 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Correlation of DIs/DOs on BM 143-DESINA/EM 143-DESINA with bits of inputs/outputs in the PI 5-3 Commissioning and Diagnostics Signals (user data) and diagnostics data are mutually independent. The diagnostics input merely shows the state of the sensor or actuator; there is no defined effect on the signal. The necessary or desired reaction can only be derived from the application. The examples below illustrate the relationship between the individual signals and the diagnostic inputs. Bit assignment of the inputs In the PI, inputs are assigned as shown in Figure 5-2. 7 6 5 Byte 0 ND7 ND6 ND5 Byte 1 FI7 FI6 FI5 4 3 2 1 0 ND4 ND3 ND2 ND1 ND0 FI4 FI2 FI1 FI0 FI3 ND0 ... ND7: Signal (user datum, digital) channel 0 to channel 7 FI0 ... FI7: Functional input (diagnostics datum) channel 0 to channel 7 Each functional input can be parameterized - as a diagnostics input or - as an input with NC function. Bit Default: diagnostic input Figure 5-2 Assignment of the inputs in the process image (PI) Bit assignment of the outputs In the PI, outputs are assigned as shown in Figure 5-3. 7 6 5 Byte 0 ND7 ND6 ND5 Byte 1 0 0 0 ND0 ... ND7: 4 3 ND4 ND3 0 0 2 1 0 ND2 ND1 ND0 0 0 0 Bit Signal (user datum, digital) channel 0 to channel 7 Byte 1 is not used (= 0) Figure 5-3 5-4 Assignment of the outputs in the process image (PI) ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Commissioning and Diagnostics Examples of assignment 1. The 8 channels of a BM 143-DESINA are to be parameterized as 5DIs + 3DOs. The functional inputs are parameterized as diagnostics inputs. Channel 7 Channel 6 Channel 5 Channel 4 channel 3 Channel 2 Channel 1 Channel 0 DI DI DO DI DO DI DO DI The input/output assignment in the process image is thus: PII: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 0 ND7 ND6 0 ND4 0 ND2 0 ND0 Byte 1 FI7 (D) FI6 (D) FI5 (D) FI4 (D) FI3 (D) FI2 (D) FI1 (D) FI0 (D) Byte 0 0 0 ND5 0 ND3 0 ND1 0 Byte 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit PIO: FEn (D): Diagnostics input n The arrows indicate the permanent relationship between signal and diagnostics input. The following applies in the example: Diagnosis for channel 0 (DI) is in bit 0 of byte 1 of the PII Diagnosis for channel 1 (DO) is in bit 1 of byte 1 of the PII Diagnosis for channel 2 (DI) is in bit 2 of byte 1 of the PII . . . This assignment has to be taken into account when the application is programmed. ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 5-5 Commissioning and Diagnostics 2. The 8 channels of a EM 143-DESINA are to be parameterized as 5DIs + 3DOs. Of these, two DIs should have NC functionality. The remaining six functional inputs are parameterized as diagnostics inputs. Channel 7 Channel 6 Channel 5 Channel 4 channel 3 Channel 2 Channel 1 Channel 0 DI (NC contact) DI DI (NC contact) DI DI DO DO DO The input/output assignment in the process image is thus: PII: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 0 ND7 ND6 ND5 ND4 ND3 0 0 0 Byte 1 FI7 (NC) FI6 (D) FI5 (NC) FI4 (D) FI3 (D) FI2 (D) FI1 (D) FI0 (D) Byte 0 0 0 0 0 0 ND2 ND1 ND0 Byte 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit PIO: FEn (D): Diagnostics input n FEn (O): Input with NC functionality The arrows indicate the permanent relationship between signal and diagnostics input. This assignment has to be taken into account when the application is programmed. 5-6 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Commissioning and Diagnostics 5.2 Commissioning and starting up the DP slave Software requirements Table 5-2 Software requirements for commissioning an ET 200X (except DESINA) Project software used STEP 7 Version Version 3.1 Version 3.1 COM PROFIBUS Version 2.1 Configuration software for a different DP master being used ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Explanations The type file of the DP slave is integrated in STEP 7. Included in STEP 7 or new modules to be embedded with OM or type file You have embedded the type file of the DP slave in COM PROFIBUS. You require the device master file and the contents of the configuration frame and parameter assignment frame for the DP slave (refer to Appendix B and the configuration and parameter assignment frame for ET 200X at http://www.ad.siemens.de/simatic-cs). 5-7 Commissioning and Diagnostics Table 5-3 Software requirements for commissioning an ET 200X-DESINA Project software used Version Explanations ET 200X with BM 143-DESINA FO STEP 7 Version 5.0 and Service Pack 3 You have embedded the device master file of the DP slave in STEP 7 or You use HWCONFIG. As of Service Pack 3, the ET 200X-DESINA with fiber-optic cable is included in the hardware catalog. ET 200X with BM 143-DESINA RS485/ BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST STEP 7 Version 5.1 and Service Pack 2 You have embedded the device master file of the DP slave in STEP 7 or You use HWCONFIG. As of Service Pack 2, the ET 200X with RS 485 is included in the hardware catalog. ET 200X with BM 141 DI 8 STEP 7 COM PROFIBUS Configuration software for a different DP master being used 5-8 DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG Version 5.1 and Service Pack 4 You have embedded the device master file of the DP slave in STEP 7 or Version 2.1 You have embedded the device master file of the DP slave in COM PROFIBUS (refer to Appendix B). You use HWCONFIG. As of Service Pack 4, the ET 200X with RS 485 is included in the hardware catalog. You require the device master file and the contents of the configuration frame and parameter assignment frame for the DP slave (refer to Appendix B and configuration and parameter assignment frame for ET 200X at http://www.ad.siemens.de/simatic-cs). ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Commissioning and Diagnostics Device master file You can download the DDB file From the Internet at http://www.ad.siemens.de/csi_e/gsd Integrating the DDB file in the configuration software The following table 5-4 tells you how to integrate the type file in SIMATIC S7 or SIMATIC S5 (COM PROFIBUS). Table 5-4 Integrating the DDB file in the configuration software Step STEP 7, as of V3.1 1 Start STEP 7 and in HWCONFIG call the Options " Install New GSD menu command. COM PROFIBUS, as of V2.11 Copy the DDB file from the ET 200X to the COM PROFIBUS directory: ...CPBV..\GSD (default) Copy the bitmap file to the directory: ...CPBV..\BITMAPS 1 2 Select the DBB file you want to install from the following dialog box and confirm with OK. Result: The ET 200X is displayed in the hardware catalog in the PROFIBUS-DP directory. Start COM PROFIBUS, and choose the File " Read GSD File menu command. Result: The ET 200X is displayed in the hardware catalog at slave configuration. 3 Configure the ET 200X with STEP 7 (see the integrated help system in STEP 7). Configure the ET 200X with COM PROFIBUS (see the integrated help system in COM PROFIBUS). If you are using a different configuration software package, refer to its software documentation ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 5-9 Commissioning and Diagnostics Function: Direct communication between basic modules In STEP 7 V5.0 and later, you can configure direct communication for PROFIBUS nodes. The following basic modules can participate in direct communication as the sender (publisher): BM 141 DI 8DC 24V, BM 141 DI 8DC 24V ECOFAST, 6ES7 141-1BF01-0XB0, from product version 08 6ES7 141-1BF11-0XB0, from product version 01 6ES7 141-1BF12-0XB0, from product version 01 6ES7 141-1BF00-0AB0, from product version 01 6ES7 141-1BF01-0AB0, from product version 01 BM 141 DI 8DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG, 6ES7 141-1BF40-0AB0, from product version 01 BM 142 DO 4DC 24V/2A, 6ES7 142-1BD11-0XB0, from product version 08 6ES7 142-1BD21-0XB0, from product version 01 6ES7 142-1BD22-0XB0, from product version 01 BM 143-DESINA FO, 6ES7 143-1BF00-0XB0, from product version 01 BM 143-DESINA RS485, 6ES7 143-1BF00-0AB0, from product version 01 You will find a detailed description of direct communication in the STEP 7 Online Help. Requirements for commissioning Table 5-5 Requirements for commissioning the DP slave Presumed activity See ... 1. DP slave installed Section 3.1 2. PROFIBUS address set on DP slave Section 3.3 3. If the bus signals are transferred using copper conductors and the DP slave is at the end of the segment, the terminating resistor must be activated on the DP slave: Section 3.4 - In the case of the BM 141, BM 142 and BM 147/CPU by bringing it into the circuit - In the case of the BM 141-ECOFAST and BM 143-DESINA RS485 by mounting the terminating resistor on the right-hand DESINA connector 4. DP slave wired Section 4.4 5. DP slave configured Online Help/configuration software manual 6. Supply voltage turned on for DP master Manual for DP master 7. DP master set to RUN mode Manual for DP master 5-10 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Commissioning and Diagnostics Commissioning the DP slave Table 5-6 Order of steps for commissioning the DP slave Procedure Step 1. Turn on the supply voltage to the DP slave. 2. Turn on the supply voltage to the load as necessary. Starting up the ET 200X Supply voltage to the ET 200X electronics/sensors The "ON" and "BF" LEDs come on ET 200X sets outputs to "0" and applies set PROFIBUS address ET 200X receives configuration data from DP master Does configuration data agree with real installation? No Yes The "BF" LED goes out; inputs and outputs are enabled; Data transfer between the ET 200X and the DP master is possible. Figure 5-4 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 SF red BF flashing red Supply voltage to the ET 200X electronics/sensors Match configuration data to configuration or vice versa Start-up of the ET 200X 5-11 Commissioning and Diagnostics Starting up the ET 200X-DESINA Switch on non-switched load voltage for ET 200X-DESINA "DC 24V-NS" LED comes on ET 200X-DESINA sets outputs to "0" and applies set PROFIBUS address ET 200X-DESINA receives configuration data from DP master Does configuration data agree with real installation? Yes "RUN" LED comes on. Inputs and outputs enabled; data transfer possible between the ET 200X-DESINA and DP master. No SF red RUN flashing green Switch off non-switched load voltage for ET 200X-DESINA Match configuration data to configuration or vice versa Figure 5-5 5-12 Start-up of the ET 200X-DESINA ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Commissioning and Diagnostics 5.3 Diagnostics using LEDs All the basic and some of the ET 200X expansion modules have LEDs for displaying the status and errors. 5.3.1 LEDs on BM 141 and BM 142 basic modules Table 5-7 Status and error display by means of LEDs on the BM 141 and BM 142 basic modules SF (system fault): BF (bus fault): ON (supply voltage): 24 VDC (load supply voltage): LEDs SF Off BF Off red red green green Meaning Action ON Off There is either no supply voltage to Turn on the supply voltage to the the electronics/sensors on the DP slave or it is too low. * * On * On On DP slave. A hardware fault has occurred. Replace the basic module. Supply voltage is applied to the DP slave. - The DP slave is starting up. The connection to the DP master - has failed. The DP slave does not detect a Check the PROFIBUS-DP connection. Check the DP master. baud rate. Bus interrupt Check all the cables in your PROFIBUS-DP network. The DP master is not operating Check whether the cable connectors for PROFIBUS-DP are firmly attached to the basic module. On Off On Diagnostic message has been issued. The PROFIBUS address set on the DP slave is not allowed. A DP slave hardware fault has Evaluate the diagnosis. Change the PROFIBUS address set on the basic module. Check whether the modules are securely connected together. occurred. On Flash. On The configuration data sent by the DP master to the DP slave does not agree with the configuration of the DP slave. ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Check the configuration of the DP slave (input/output, PROFIBUS address). 5-13 Commissioning and Diagnostics Table 5-7 Status and error displays by means of LEDs on the basic module, continued SF (system fault): BF (bus fault): ON (supply voltage): 24 VDC (load supply voltage): LEDs SF Off BF red red green green Meaning Action ON Flash. On The DP slave has detected the baud rate but is not being addressed by the DP master. The DP slave has not been configured. Flash. On On A basic module hardware fault has Check the PROFIBUS address set in the DP slave or in the configuration software. Check the configuration of the DP slave (station type). Replace the basic module. occurred. * Not applicable SF LED On the BM 141 and BM 142 basic modules, version 06 or later, the red system fault LED (SF) comes on as soon as a diagnostic event is registered. The SF LED goes not go out unless all diagnostic events have been acknowledged. 24 VDC LED The 24 VDC LED is on when the ET 200X is connected to a load power supply. 5-14 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Commissioning and Diagnostics 5.3.2 Table 5-8 LEDs on basic modules BM 143-DESINA FO, BM 143-DESINA RS485 BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V DIAG Status and fault displays using LEDs on the basic modules SF RUN DC 24 V-NS DC 24 V-S (system fault): (status indicator): (non-switched load voltage): (switched load voltage): Meaning LEDs SF red green green green Action RUN DC 24 V-NS DC 24 V-S On * * * Diagnostic message has been issued. The PROFIBUS address set on the DP slave is not allowed. A DP slave hardware fault has occurred. On Flash. On Off Flash. On On On Evaluate the diagnosis. Change the PROFIBUS address for the basic module as set by means of the configuration connector. Check whether the modules are securely connected together. The configuration data sent Check the configuration of by the DP master to the DP slave does not agree with the configuration of the DP slave. the DP slave (input/output, PROFIBUS address). PROFIBUS address is incorrect Bus interruption at Correct the PROFIBUS address Rectify the bus interruption PROFIBUS-DP * Not applicable RUN LED The RUN LED lights up when the DP slave is in the process of exchanging data with the DP master. DC 24-NS LED The DC 24V-NS LED is on when the DC 24V-NS non-switched supply voltage is applied. ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 5-15 Commissioning and Diagnostics DC 24V-S LED The DC 24V-S LED is on when the switched DC 24V-S supply voltage is available along with the DC 24V-NS supply voltage. BM 143-DESINA FO and BM 143-DESINA RS485 status display The ET 200X-DESINA has two LEDs per channel (X1 to X8) 2 LEDs for status indication: "Yellow" LED (for digital input or output, pin 4) The LED is yellow when the input or output is active. LED "red/yellow" (for pin 2 input functionality, see Table 5-1) The LED is red when - the functional input is parameterized as a diagnostics input for DESINA and - a DESINA fault (status "0") is registered for the sensor/actuator. The LED is yellow when - the functional input is parameterized as an input with NC function and - The status of the sensor connected to the input is non-switched ("1"). Status display of the BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST In the case of the BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST basic module there is one LED for each channel (X1 to X8) for status display: Green LED (for digital input) The LED is green when the input is active. Status display of the BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG In the case of the BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG basic module there are two LEDs for each channel (X1 to X8) for status display: Green LED The LED is green when the input is active. Red LED The LED is red if there is a fault on the channel: - Short circuit of the 24 V sensor power supply - Digital input wire break 5-16 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Commissioning and Diagnostics 5.3.3 LEDs on expansion modules (except DESINA) SF LED (system fault display) Some ET 200X expansion modules have an "SF" LED: EM 142 DO 4 DC 24V/2A expansion module with digital outputs (6ES7 142-1BD40-0XB0) PM 148 DO 4 DC 24V/2A power module All expansion modules with analog inputs All expansion modules with analog outputs Parameterizable and non-parameterizable diagnostic messages There are parameterizable and non-parameterizable diagnostic messages. Non-parameterizable diagnostic messages are issued without you having to take any action. You have to set parameterizable diagnostic messages in the configuration software for them to be issued (refer to Table 5-10 onwards). SF LED On The SF LED on the expansion module is turned on as soon as a diagnostic message is triggered by the expansion module. Status display In addition, all the ET 200X modules have a status display for every input and output. The LEDs are lit when the inputs and outputs are active. Status display of the EM 141 DI 8 DC 24V DIAG (6ES7 141-1BF40-0AB0) In the case of the expansion module there are 2 LEDs for each channel (X1 to X8) for status display: Green LED The LED is green when the input is active. Red LED The LED is red when there is a fault on the channel: - Short circuit of the 24 V sensor power supply - Digital input wire break ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 5-17 Commissioning and Diagnostics Status display of the EM 141 DI 8 DC 24V DIAG (6ES7 141-1BF30-0AB0) In the case of the expansion module there is 1 LED (with two colors) for each channel (X1 to X4) for status display: Green/red LED The LED is green when the input is active. The LED is red when there is a fault on the channel: - Short circuit of the 24 V sensor power supply - Digital input wire break 24 VDC LED The power module also has a 24 VDC LED. The 24 VDC LED is on when the power module is connected to a load-voltage supply. If no load voltage is available: 5.3.4 the SF LED on the power module is on the 24 VDC LED on the power module is off LEDs on EM 143-DESINA expansion modules Status display The ET 200X-DESINA has two LEDs per channel (X1 to X8) 2 LEDs for status indication: "Yellow" LED (for digital input or output, pin 4) The LED is yellow when the input or output is active. Red/yellow LED (for pin 2 input functionality, see Table 5-1) The LED is red when - the functional input is parameterized as a diagnostics input for DESINA and - a DESINA fault (status "0") is registered for the sensor/actuator. The LED is yellow when - the functional input is parameterized as an input with NC function and - the status of the sensor connected to the input is non-switched ("1"). 5-18 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Commissioning and Diagnostics 5.3.5 Table 5-9 LED on SITOP power Status and error displays by means of LEDs on SITOP power 24 VDC (24 V at output terminals): ELECTRONIC/SENSOR 1L+ (supply voltage for electronic components/sensors): LOAD 2L+ (load voltage supply): TEMP > (temperature rise): LEDs Meaning 24 VDC ELECTRONIC/ SENSOR 1L+ LOAD 2L+ TEMP > Off Off Off * green green green red Action No supply voltage Switch on the Short circuit at Repair the short mains voltage. output1) Flash. Flash. Flash. * Overload in circuit. Check the current RESTART mode Short circuit at output 1) On * * * 24 V is applied to consumption and reduce, if appropriate, the number of modules (see Section 2.7) Repair the short circuit. - the output terminals. * On On * Associated bus - segment is supplied with 24 V * * * Flash. Switch off as maximum temperature exceeded Check environmental and load conditions * Not applicable 1) Depends on parameterized short-circuit response ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 5-19 Commissioning and Diagnostics 5.4 Parameterizable diagnostic messages You can assign parameters to diagnostic messages for the following modules with STEP 7 or COM PROFIBUS: EM 142 DO 4 DC 24V/2A expansion module with digital outputs (6ES7 142-1BD40-0XB0) PM 148 DO 4 DC 24V/2A power module All expansion modules with analog inputs All expansion modules with analog outputs Diagnostics messages of the EM 142 DO 4 DC 24V/2A (6ES7 142-1BD40-0XB0) and the PM 148 DO 4 DC 24V/2A Table 5-10 Diagnostics messages of the EM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A and PM 148 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A Diagnostic message Configurable Configuration or parameter assignment error Expansion module Not configurable Wire break Channel Configurable Short-circuit to M Channel Configurable Short circuit to L+ Channel Configurable * 5-20 Area affected by diagnostics The broken wire signal is triggered at a current value of < 6 mA and only if the corresponding channel has been set. ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Commissioning and Diagnostics Diagnostic messages of expansion modules with analog inputs When a fault is detected, modules with analog inputs supply a signal value of "7FFF H", irrespective of parameter assignment. Table 5-11 Diagnostic messages for modules with AI Diagnostic message Area affected by diagnostics Configuration or parameter assignment error Expansion module Not configurable Wire break (only with current inputs and over the measuring ranges 4 to 20 mA)1 Channel Configurable Upper limit violation Channel Parameterizable2 Lower limit violation Channel Parameterizable2 1 2 Configurable The broken wire signal is triggered at a current value of 3.6 mA. Perform the setting by activating the "group diagnosis" parameter in the configuration software. Diagnostic messages of expansion modules with analog outputs Table 5-12 Diagnostic messages for modules with AO Diagnostic message Area affected by diagnostics Configurable Configuration or parameter assignment error Expansion module Not configurable Wire break (with current outputs only)1 Channel Parameterizable2 Short-circuit to M (with voltage outputs only)3 Channel Parameterizable2 1 2 3 In the case of EM 145 AO 2 I (6ES7 145-1GB31-0XB0) the broken wire signal is triggered at a current value of -2 mA or +2 mA. Perform the setting by activating the "group diagnosis" parameter in the configuration software. In the case of EM-circuit signal is triggered at a voltage value of -750 mV or +750 mV. ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 5-21 Commissioning and Diagnostics Action following diagnostic message in STEP 7 Every diagnostic message results in the following action: If you have selected the "enable diagnostic interrupt" parameter, a diagnostic interrupt is triggered (refer to Section 5.5.1). A diagnostic interrupt is followed by the diagnostic message being entered in the diagnostic buffer of the master CPU or - if you are using the BM 147/CPU on the ET 200X - in the diagnostic buffer of the BM 147/CPU. The SF LED on the expansion module goes on. The OB 82 is called. If it is not present, the CPU then switches to STOP mode (either the master CPU or, if the BM 147/CPU is being used on the ET 200X, the CPU of the BM 147/CPU). Action following diagnostic message in COM PROFIBUS If you have enabled diagnostic interrupts with COM PROFIBUS, diagnostic interrupts are shown in the device-specific diagnosis of the ET 200X. In other words, the module that triggered the interrupt and the cause of the interrupt are entered in the device-specific diagnosis (see Section 5.6.9). The SF LED on the expansion module goes on. 5-22 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Commissioning and Diagnostics Causes and action The following table shows all the diagnostic messages possible for expansion modules, together with their causes and remedial action. Table 5-13 Diagnostic messages - causes and remedial action Diagnostic message Configuration/parameter assignment error Possible cause You have assigned different parameters to the module in the user program (possible in STEP 7 SFC call). Remedial action Assign new parameters to module The new values are not within the permissible range or are not consistent. Wire break Resistance of sensor/actuator wiring too high Use a different sensor/actuator type or wire differently - for example, use wires having a larger cross-section Interruption of the cable between the module and the sensor/actuator Establish cable connection Channel not wired (open) Deactivate channel at AI (by means of "measurement type" parameter) Wire up channel Output overloaded Output short-circuited to M Clear overloading Clear short-circuit Short-circuit to L+ Output short-circuited to L+ of module supply Replace module Lower limit violation Input value below underrange, fault possibly caused by: Short-circuit to M (error detection only when output at "1") Sensor connected with reverse polarity Incorrect measuring range set Check connections Assign parameters to other range Lower limit violation Input value higher than overrange Assign parameters to other range Parameters The parameters you can set and their ranges can be found in the technical data applicable to expansion modules: for EM 142 DO 4 DC 24V/2A (6ES7 142-1BD40-0XB0) in Table 7-28 for PM 148 DO 4 DC 24V/2A in Table 7-37 for the expansion modules with analog inputs in Table 7-41 for the expansion modules with analog outputs in Table 7-42 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 5-23 Commissioning and Diagnostics 5.5 Evaluating ET 200X interrupts With certain faults, interrupts are triggered by the DP slave. Interrupts are evaluated differently from each other, depending on the DP master being used. Evaluating interrupts with S7 DP master Prerequisite: You have configured the ET 200X with STEP 7 as of version 3.1. When an interrupt occurs, interrupt OBs are processed automatically in the CPU of the DP master if you have programmed them (refer to the System Software for S7-300/S7-400, Program Design programming manual). Evaluating interrupts with a different DP master If you are operating the ET 200X with a different DP master, the alarms are simulated within the extended diagnosis of the ET 200X (see Section 5.6.7 onwards). You must continue processing the results of the diagnosis in the application of the DP master. Note In order to be able to evaluate alarms by means of the extended diagnosis with a different DP-master, take note of the following: The DP master must be able to save the diagnostic messages; it might store the diagnostic messages in a ring buffer, for example. If the DP master cannot store diagnostic messages, only the latest diagnostic message to be received is stored, for instance. You have to poll regularly in your user program the corresponding bits in the extended diagnosis. Take into account the bus transit time with PROFIBUS-DP so that you can retrieve the bits at least in synchronism with the bus transit time, for example. With an IM 308-C as a DP master you cannot use process alarms and cycle end alarms within the extended diagnosis. 5-24 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Commissioning and Diagnostics 5.5.1 Module interrupts (STEP 7) You can assign parameters to diagnostic and hardware interrupts for modules having analog inputs with STEP 7. For modules with analog outputs EM 142 DO 4 DC 24V/2A (6ES7 142-1BD40-0XB0) PM 148 DO 4 DC 24V/2A BM 143-DESINA and EM 143-DESINA BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG and EM 141 DI 8 DC 24V DIAG it is possible to configure diagnostic interrupts. Triggering a diagnostic interrupt With a coming or going event - for example, wire break fault - the module triggers a diagnostic interrupt if the "enable diagnostic interrupt" parameter has been assigned. Table 5-14 Events that can trigger diagnostic interrupt Event EM 142 DO 4 DC 24V/2A Module with analog inputs Module with analog outputs PM 148 DO 4 DC 24V/2A BM 143-DESINA BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG EM 143-DESINA EM 141 DI 8 DC 24V DIAG Configuration/ parameter assignment error* Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Wire break Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Short-circuit to M Yes Yes Yes No Yes Short circuit to L+ Yes No No No No Lower limit violation No Yes No No No Upper limit violation No Yes No No No Rising edge No No No No Yes Falling edge No No No No Yes * MAINS OFF/MAINS ON for the ET 200X is required following rectification of the configuration/parameter-assignment error. The CPU interrupts the processing of the user program and processes the diagnostic interrupt block (OB 82). The event that led to the interrupt is entered in the start information of OB 82. ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 5-25 Commissioning and Diagnostics Triggering a hardware interrupt from modules with analog inputs You define a work area by assigning parameters to an upper and lower limit value. If the process signal - for example, the ignition temperature - of a module leaves this work area, the module triggers a hardware interrupt the "enable hardware interrupt upon limit exceeded" parameter has been assigned. The CPU interrupts the processing of the user program and processes the hardware interrupt block OB 40. The channels violating a limit value and the limit value concerned are entered in the start information of the OB 40 in tag OB40_POINT_ADDR. You will find an assignment of the bits to local data double word 8 in the figure below. LB 9 LB 8 LB 11 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 1817 16 1 1 1 1 1 0 Bit no. LD 8 Lower limit value violated on channel 0 Lower limit value violated on channel 1 Upper limit value exceeded on channel 0 Upper limit value exceeded on channel 1 Figure 5-6 Start information of OB 40: modules with analog inputs Triggering of a hardware interrupt in the case of the BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG and EM 141 DI 8 DC 24V DIAG The channel that triggered the hardware interrupt is entered in the start information of the OB 40 in the variable OB40_POINT_ADDR. You will find an assignment of the bits to local data double word 8 in the figure below. LB 9 LB 8 LB 11 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 1817 16 1 1 1 1 1 1 : : 1 0 Bit no. LD 8 Falling edge, channel 0 Falling edge, channel 1 Falling edge, channel 7 : : Rising edge, channel 0 Rising edge, channel 1 Rising edge, channel 1 Figure 5-7 Start information of OB 40: BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG and EM 141 DI 8 DC 24V DIAG Note You will find a description of OBs 40 and 82 in the System and Standard Functions reference manual. 5-26 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Commissioning and Diagnostics 5.5.2 Module interrupts (COM PROFIBUS) You can assign parameters to diagnostic and hardware interrupts for modules having analog inputs with COM PROFIBUS. For modules with analog outputs EM 142 DO 4 DC 24V/2A (6ES7 142-1BD40-0XB0) PM 148 DO 4 DC 24V/2A BM 143-DESINA and EM 143-DESINA BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG EM 141 DI 8 DC 24V DIAG it is possible to configure diagnostic interrupts. The alarms are simulated in the extended diagnosis of the ET 200X (see Section 5.6.9). You can continue processing the interrupt messages in the user program of the DP master. 5.6 ET 200X diagnostics with STEP 7 and STEP 5 Slave diagnosis The slave diagnosis behaves in accordance with the IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1 standard. Depending on the DP master, It can be read using STEP 7 or STEP 5 for all DP slaves that comply with the standard. Displaying and structuring the slave diagnostics is described in the following sections. BM 141, BM 141-ECOFAST, BM 142 and BM 143-DESINA provide the slave diagnosis that complies with the Standard. Note the differences in the diagnostic frame depending on which version and which release you have. The basic modules provide an extended diagnosis, depending on the DP master and the parameterization. Note The extended diagnosis can only be used in the slave mode that complies with the Standard (not in S7 slave operation). Diagnosis as per the Standard and module diagnosis will always be signaled, even if no alarm is enabled during parameterization of the basic module. ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 5-27 Commissioning and Diagnostics S7 diagnostics S7 diagnosis can be requested for all modules in the SIMATIC S7/M7 range of modules. The structure of the S7 diagnosis is identical for base unit and distributed modules. The diagnosis data of a module is in data records 0 and 1 of the system data part of the module. Data record 0 contains 4 bytes of diagnostic data describing the current state of a module. Data record 1 contains module diagnostics data in addition. Data records 0 and 1 are contained in the slave diagnosis (refer to Section for its structure 5.6.2). 5-28 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Commissioning and Diagnostics 5.6.1 Reading out the diagnosis Options for reading out the diagnosis Table 5-15 Reading out the diagnosis of ET 200X with STEP 7 and STEP 5 Programmable logic controller with DP master SIMATICS7/M7 Block or register in STEP 7 "DP slave diagnosis" register Application See ... Display slave diagnostics as plain text on the STEP 7 user interface The section on hardware diagnostics in the STEP 7 SFC 13 "DP NRM_DG" Display slave diagnosis (store in data area of the user program) SFC 59 "RD_REC" Read out data records of S7 diagnosis (store in data area of the user program) Configuration, see Section 5.6.2; for the SFC see System and Standard Functions online help system reference manual FB 125/FC 125 Evaluate slave diagnostics On the Internet at http://www.ad.siemens.de/ simatic-cs under the ID 387 257 SFB 52 Read data record from a DP slave See online help system in STEP 7 SFB 54 Receive interrupts from the interrupt OBs SIMATIC S5 with the IM 308-C as DP master FB192 "IM308C" Display slave diagnosis (store in data area of the user program) SIMATIC S5 with S5-95U as DP master FB 230 "S_DIAG" Note: not for enhanced diagnosis ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Configuration, see Section 5.6.2; for the FB see the ET200 Distributed I/O Device manual 5-29 Commissioning and Diagnostics Example of reading out the slave diagnosis with SFC 13 "DPNRM_DG" Here you will find an example of how to use SFC 13 to display the slave diagnosis for a DP slave in the STEP 7 user program. Assumptions The following assumptions apply to this STEP 7 user program: The diagnosis address of the ET 200X is 1022 (3FEH). The slave diagnosis should be stored in DB 82: as of address 0.0, length 64 bytes. The slave diagnosis consists of 64 bytes. STEP 7 user program STL CALL Description SFC 13 REQ LADDR RET_VAL RECORD BUSY 5-30 :=TRUE :=W#16#3FE :=MW 0 :=P#DB82.DBX 0.0 BYTE 64 :=M2.0 Read request Diagnosis address of the ET 200X RET_VAL of SFC 13 Data mailbox for the diagnosis in DB 82 Read operation runs over several OB1 cycles ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Commissioning and Diagnostics Example of displaying the slave diagnosis with FB 192 "IM308C" Here you will find an example of how you use FB 192 to read out the slave diagnosis for a DP slave in the STEP 5 user program. Assumptions The following assumptions apply to this STEP 5 user program: The IM 308-C is assigned pages 0 to 15 (number 0 of the IM 308-C) as the DP master. The DP slave has PROFIBUS address 3. The slave diagnosis is required to be stored in DB 20. However, you can also use any other data block for this. The slave diagnosis consists of 26 bytes. STEP 5 user program STL Description Name DPAD IMST FCT GCGR TYPE STAD LENG :A DB :JU FB :IM308C : KH : KY : KC : KM : KY : KF : KF ERR : 30 192 F800 0, 3 SD 0 0, 20 +1 -1 DW 0 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Default address area of the IM 308-C IM No. = 0, PROFIBUS address of DP slave = 3 Function: Read slave diagnosis Not evaluated S5 data area: DB 20 Diagnostic data from data word 1 Diagnosis length = joker length (all permissible bytes) Error code stored in DW 0 of DB 30 5-31 Commissioning and Diagnostics 5.6.2 Structure of the slave diagnosis, ET 200X Structure of slave diagnosis, ET 200X Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Station statuses 1 to 3 Byte 3 Master PROFIBUS address Byte 4 Byte 5 High byte Manufacturer identification * Module diagnosis ... Byte 6 : Byte 8 Low byte Enhanced diagnostics : Up to max. byte 28 Station diagnosis .. .... Byte 9 (can be adjusted via parameter in configuration tool) Byte 9 * : Module Byte 15 status Byte 16 * Byte 17 . . . Channel-specific diagnosis (3 bytes per error) * ** Max. 20 bytes Interrupts (only 1 interrupt per slave diagnostic frame) Max. length: 64 bytes * These diagnoses can be enabled or disabled using the DPV1 parameters (DDB file Rev. 3). If you disable these diagnoses, they are removed from the diagnostic frame. ** If you disable the interrupts using the DPV1 parameters (DDB file Rev. 3), the additional area is available for channel-specific diagnoses. Figure 5-8 5-32 Structure of the slave diagnosis, ET 200X ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Commissioning and Diagnostics Data records of the S7 diagnosis contained in the station diagnosis Bytes 13 to 16 of the device-specific diagnosis correspond to data record 0 of the S7 diagnosis. Bytes 13 to 28 of the station diagnosis correspond to data record 1 of the S7 diagnosis. (Data record 1 contains data record 0 in the first 4 bytes.) ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 5-33 Commissioning and Diagnostics 5.6.3 Station statuses 1 to 3 Definition Station statuses 1 to 3 provide an overview of the status of a DP slave. Station status 1 Table 5-16 Structure of station status 1 (Byte 0) ET 200X Bit Meaning 0 1: The DP slave cannot be addressed by the DP master. The bit in the DP slave is always 0. Cause/remedy Correct PROFIBUS address set on the DP slave? Bus connector/fiber-optic cable connected? Voltage at DP slave? RS 485 repeater set correctly? Reset on the DP slave executed (switch on/off) 1 1: The DP slave is not yet ready to exchange data. Wait while the DP slave starts up. 2 1: The configuration data sent by the DP master to the DP slave does not agree with the configuration of the DP slave. Correct station type or correct configuration 1: External diagnosis available. Evaluate the module diagnostics, the 3 of the DP slave entered in the configuration software? module status and/or the channel-specific diagnostics. Bit 3 is reset as soon as all the faults have been rectified. The bit is reset when there is a new diagnostic message in bytes of the above-mentioned diagnostics. 4 1: The requested function is not supported by the DP slave (e.g. SYNC/FREEZE). Check the configuration. 5 1: The bit is always "0". Note: When reading the station status from the DP master, is the bit at "1"? The DP master cannot interpret the response of the DP slave. 5-34 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Commissioning and Diagnostics Table 5-16 Structure of station status 1 (Byte 0) ET 200X Bit 6 7 Meaning Cause/remedy 1: The DP slave type does not agree with the software configuration. Compare the desired configuration with the 1: Parameters have been assigned to the DP slave by a different DP master (not that which currently has access to the DP slave). The bit is always "1" when you are actual configuration. accessing the DP slave with the programmer or another DP master, for example. The PROFIBUS address of the DP master which assigned parameters to the DP slave is located in the "master PROFIBUS address" diagnostic byte. Station status 2 Table 5-17 Structure of station status 2 (Byte 1) ET 200X Bit Meaning 0 1: New parameters have to be assigned to the DP slave. 1 1: A diagnostic message has been issued. The DP slave will not work until the fault has been corrected (static diagnostic message). 2 1: The bit is always "1" in the DP slave. 3 1: Response monitoring has been enabled for this DP slave. 4 1: The DP slave has received the "FREEZE" control command. 5 1: The DP slave has received the "SYNC" control command. 6 0: The bit is always at 0. 7 1: The bit is always at 0. Note: When the station status is read by the DP master, the bit is at "1" if the DP slave in the DP master has been deactivated. The DP slave is deactivated - that is, it has been removed from current processing. Station Status 3 Table 5-18 Structure of Station Status 3 (Byte 2) ET 200X Bit Meaning 0 to 6 0: The bits are always at "0". 7 1: There are more channel-specific diagnostic messages than can be represented in the diagnostic frame. ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 5-35 Commissioning and Diagnostics 5.6.4 Master PROFIBUS address Definition The PROFIBUS address of the DP master is stored in diagnostics byte 3: this is the master which assigned parameters to the DP slave which has read and write access to the DP slave FFH in byte 3 If the value FFH is defined as the master PROFIBUS address in byte 3, the DP slave has not been parameterized by the DP master. 5.6.5 Manufacturer identification Definition A code is stored in the manufacturer ID that describes the type of the DP slave. Manufacturer identification Table 5-19 Structure of the manufacturer ID (Byte 4, 5) ET 200X 5-36 Byte 4 Byte 5 Manufacturer ID for 80H 3DH BM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V 80H D2H BM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V ECOFAST 80H D3H BM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V EDOFAST DIAG 80H 3CH BM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A 80H 9AH BM 143-DESINA FO 80H 9AH BM 143-DESINA RS485 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Commissioning and Diagnostics 5.6.6 ID-specific diagnosis Definition The ID-specific diagnosis states whether or not the modules of the ET 200X are defective. The module diagnosis begins as of byte 6 and comprises 3 bytes. Module diagnosis The module diagnosis for the ET 200X is structured as follows: Byte 6 7 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 Bit no. Length of the module diagnosis including byte 6 (= 3 bytes) Code for module diagnosis 7 6 5 4 3 1 Bit no. Byte 7 Entry for ET 200X Entry for I/O section of basic module Entry for expansion module 1 Entry for expansion module 2 Entry for expansion module 3 Entry for expansion module 4 2 1 0 Bit no. See legend Byte 8 Entry for expansion module 5 Entry for expansion module 6 Entry for expansion module 7 Legend for the entry for a module: Bit is set when - a module is pulled - an unconfigured module is inserted - access to a module is not possible - a module reports a diagnostic interrupt Figure 5-9 Structure of ID-specific diagnosis for ET 200X ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 5-37 Commissioning and Diagnostics 5.6.7 Module status Definition The module status indicates the status of the configured modules and provides details of the ID-specific diagnosis in respect of the configuration. The module status begins after the module diagnosis and comprises 7 bytes. The module is only contained in the diagnosis frame if you have activated "extended diagnosis" during parameterization. Module status The module status for ET 200X is configured as follows: Byte 9 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 Length of the module status incl. byte 9 (= 7 bytes) Code for station diagnosis Byte 10 Byte 11 Byte 12 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 Status type: Module status 2H = Module status Code for status message 7 0 0H Always "0" 0H Always "0" 7 6 Byte 13 0 0 0 0 0 0 I/O section of the basic module 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 14 Expansion module 1 Expansion module 2 Expansion module 3 Expansion module 4 Byte 15 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 00B: Module OK; valid data 01B: Module fault; invalid data (module defective) 10B: Incorrect module; invalid data 11B: no module; invalid data Expansion module 5 Expansion module 6 Expansion module 7 Figure 5-10 5-38 Configuration of the module status for ET 200X ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Commissioning and Diagnostics 5.6.8 Channel-specific diagnosis Definition The channel-specific diagnosis gives information on channel errors of modules and expands on the module diagnosis. Channel-specific diagnosis begins after the module status. Channel-specific diagnosis does not affect the module status. Channel-specific diagnosis Important: The diagnostic interrupt must be switched on for each module! The channel-specific diagnosis is only contained in the diagnosis frame if have activated the "extended diagnosis" during parameterization. The maximum number of channel-specific diagnoses is limited by the maximum overall length of the slave diagnosis of 64 Bytes. The length of the slave diagnosis is dependent on the number of the channel-specific diagnoses currently present. If more channel-specific diagnoses are present than can be shown in the slave diagnosis, bit 7 "diagnosis overrun" is set in the station status 3. Tip: If you disable the interrupts for the ET 200M during parameter assignment, there are still up to 20 additional bytes available in the interrupt section for the channel-specific diagnosis (see also Figure 5-8). ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 5-39 Commissioning and Diagnostics 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 0 as of byte 16 Bit no. 000001B to 001000B: ID number of the module that delivers the channel-specific diagnosis. The slot is encrypted. The following applies: displayed number + 1 slot of the module (3 slot 4; 4 slot 5, etc.). Code for channel-specific diagnosis 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit no. Byte 17 000000B to 111111B: Number of the channel that delivers the diagnosis Input/output: 00B: DESINA or reserved 01B: input 10B: output 11B: input/output 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit no. Byte 18 Error type Channel type: To PROFIBUS standard (see Table 5-20) 001B: Bit 010B: 2 Bit 011B: 4 Bit 100B: Byte 101B: Word 110B: 2 words Next channel-specific diagnostic message (assignment as for bytes 16 to 18) .. Bytes 19 to 21 Max. byte 63 Figure 5-11 5-40 Configuration of channel-specific diagnosis, ET 200X ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Commissioning and Diagnostics Channel-specific error messages Table 5-20 Channel-specific error messages to PROFIBUS standard Error type 00001B 1D Error text Short circuit Meaning Short circuit because, for example: Sensor wiring to P potential short-circuited Action Correct the process wiring. Sensor wiring to M potential short-circuited Output wiring to P potential short-circuited Output wiring to ground short-circuited 00010B 2D Undervoltage Main voltage failed or too low 00011B 3D Overvoltage Mains voltage too high Correct mains voltage Correct mains voltage Braking power too high Increase rampdown time parameter on EM 148-FC 00100B 4D Overload The output level is overloaded Correct the module/actuator match. 00101B 5D Temperature rise The output level is overloaded and is too hot Correct the module/actuator match. 00110B 6D Open circuit Wire break because, for example: The signal line to a sensor is interrupted The signal line from an actuator is interrupted Power cable of the sensor interrupted Correct the process wiring 00111B 7D Upper limit violation Value is above the overrange. Correct the module/actuator match. 01000B 8D Lower limit violation Value is below the underrange. Correct the module/actuator match. 01001B 9D Error Internal module fault Exchange the frequency converter ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 5-41 Commissioning and Diagnostics Table 5-21 Channel-specific error messages - manufacturer-specific Error type 10000B 16D Error text Meaning Action Parameteriz Parameter assignment error, for example, because: Correct the ation error parameter The module cannot use the parameter assignment. (unknown, impermissible combination...) Module is not parameterized. 10001B 17D Load voltage is missing The following voltages may be missing: Load voltage at BM 141/BM 142 Switched load voltage in the case of BM 143 Correct the process wiring DESINA and BM 141-ECOFAST 8DI 10110B 22D Hardware Hardware interrupt lost interrupt lost Correction, coordination of program, process, module 11000B 24D Actuator fault Excess temperature on motor Check mechanical loading of motor Thermistor not connected Connect thermistor or deactivate thermistor monitoring, motor parameter on EM 148-FC External (process-related) error, for example: Replace the sensor/actuator; correct the process wiring. 11010B 5-42 26D External fault Sensor error Actuator error Sensor data is not correct Break in wire to EM ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Commissioning and Diagnostics 5.6.9 Interrupts Definition The interrupts section of the slave diagnosis provides information on the type of interrupt and the cause that triggered the interrupt. The interrupt section has a maximum of 20 bytes. A maximum of one interrupt can be used per slave diagnosis. Position in the diagnostic frame The position of the interrupt section in the slave diagnosis depends on the structure of the diagnostic frame and on the number of channel-specific diagnoses (see also Figure 5-8): No enhanced diagnosis: always as of byte 9 after the module diagnosis Enhanced diagnosis: after the channel-specific diagnoses. For example: if there are 3 channel-specific diagnoses, the interrupt section begins as of byte 25. More than one interrupt Interrupt information in the slave diagnosis is overwritten by the interrupt information of the next interrupt to be triggered. Contents The contents of the interrupt information depend on the type of interrupt: In the case of diagnostic interrupts, the diagnostic data record 1 for SIMATIC S7 (16 bytes) is sent as interrupt information (as of byte x+4). You can find out what these bytes mean for digital and analog modules in Figures 5-14 to 5-17. In the case of hardware interrupts, the additional interrupt information is 4 bytes long. You can find out what these bytes mean in Figure 5-18. ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 5-43 Commissioning and Diagnostics Alarms The alarm unit for ET 200X is configured as follows. Byte x 7 6 5 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 Bit no. Length of the interrupt section including byte x (= max. 20 bytes) Code for device-specific diagnosis 7 6 Byte x+1 0 0 Type of interrupt: 0000001B: Diagnostic interrupt 0000010B: Hardware interrupt Code for interrupt 7 0 Byte x+2 "Slot" number 02: BM provides the alarm 04 to 11: Slot of the module that is producing an interrupt 7 3 1 0 Byte x+3 00B: Hardware interrupt 01B: At least one fault is present 10B: Going error 11B: Reserved 00B: Bytes x+4 to ... . . . Figure 5-12 5-44 for BM 141 BM 141DI 8 x DC 24V ECOFAST BM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG BM 142 BM 143-DESINA FO BM 143-DESINA RS485 for BM 141 BM 142 (6ES7 141-1BF11-0XB0) (6ES7 141-1BF01-0AB0) (6ES7 141-1BF40-0AB0) (6ES7 142-1BD21-0XB0) (6ES7 143-1BF00-0XB0) (6ES7 143-1BF00-0AB0) (6ES7 141-1BF01-0XB0) (6ES7 142-1BD11-0XB0) ... Byte x+19 ... Byte x+7 Diagnostic-interrupt data (contents of data records 0 and 1) (see Figures 5-14 to 5-17) Hardware interrupt data (see Figure 5-18) Structure of the ET 200X alarm unit ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Commissioning and Diagnostics Diagnostic interrupt of modules with digital inputs Byte x+4 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 Module malfunction, i. e. a problem has been detected Internal fault in module External error: Module no longer addressable Channel fault in module Parameters not assigned to module Parameterization error 0 7 1FH: Module class, digital module Byte x+5 Bytes x+6 to x+7: Are not used 7 0 70H: Module with digital inputs Byte x+8 7 0 08H: Length of channel-specific diagnosis Byte x+9 7 0 08H: Number of channels per module Byte x+10 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte x+11 : Diagnostic event on channel 0 of module Diagnostic event on channel 1 of module : Diagnostic event on channel 7 of module Byte x+12 Channel 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 Diagnostic events for channel 0 Configuration or parameter assignment error Short circuit to M (in the event of an error, bit 2 or Bit 3 is set) Wire break Byte x+13: Assignment for channel 1 as for byte x+12 Byte x+14: Assignment for channel 2 as for byte x+12 : Byte x+19: Assignment for channel 7 as for byte x+12 Figure 5-13 Structure as of byte x+4 for diagnostic interrupt (digital input) ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 5-45 Commissioning and Diagnostics Diagnostic interrupt of modules with digital outputs Byte x+4 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 Module malfunction, i. e. a problem has been detected Internal fault in module Byte x+5 External error: Module no longer addressable Channel fault in module External auxiliary supply is missing, i. e.: Load power supply is missing or is too low Parameters not assigned to module Parameterization error 0 7 1FH: Module class, digital module Bytes x+6 to x+7: Are not used 7 0 72H: Module with digital outputs Byte x+8 7 0 Length of channel-specific diagnosis Byte x+9 7 0 Number of channels per module Byte x+10 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte x+11 : Diagnostic event on channel 0 of module Diagnostic event on channel 1 of module : Diagnostic event on channel 7 of module Byte x+12 Channel 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 Diagnostic events for channel 0 Configuration or parameter assignment error Short circuit to L+ Short-circuit to M Wire break Temperature rise Byte x+13: Assignment for channel 1 as for byte x+12 Byte x+14: Assignment for channel 2 as for byte x+12 : Byte x+19: Assignment for channel 7 as for byte x+12 Figure 5-14 5-46 Structure as of byte x+4 for diagnostic interrupt (digital outputs) ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Commissioning and Diagnostics Diagnosis alarm from EM 143-DESINA modules Byte x+4 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 Module malfunction, i. e. a problem has been detected Internal fault in module External error: Module no longer addressable Channel fault in module Parameters not assigned to module Parameterization error 0 7 1FH: Module class, digital module Byte x+5 Bytes x+6 to x+7: are not used 7 0 7AH: DESINA module with parameterized I/O channels Byte x+8 7 0 08H: Length of channel-specific diagnosis Byte x+9 7 0 08H: Number of channels per module Byte x+10 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte x+11 : Diagnostic event on channel 0 of module Diagnostic event on channel 1 of module : Diagnostic event on channel 7 of module Byte x+12 Channel 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Diagnostic events for channel 0 External fault (sensor/actuator fault or break in wiring) Byte x+13: Assignment for channel 1 as for byte x+12 Byte x+14: Assignment for channel 2 as for byte x+12 : Byte x+19: Assignment for channel 7 as for byte x+12 Figure 5-15 Structure from Byte x+4 for diagnosis alarm of EM 143-DESINA modules In channel-specific diagnostics, a diagnostic interrupt from the EM 143-DESINA expansion module leads to error type 11010B (see Table 5-20). ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 5-47 Commissioning and Diagnostics Diagnostic interrupt of modules with analog inputs 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 Byte x+4 Module malfunction, i. e. a problem has been detected Internal fault in module External error: Module no longer addressable Channel fault in module Parameters not assigned to module Parameterization error 7 0 15H: Module class, analog module Byte x+5 7 2 0 Byte x+6 Coding key incorrect or missing Module in STOP mode 7 4 0 Byte x+7 Error during analog/digital conversion in module Byte x+8 71H: Module with analog inputs Byte x+9 Length of channel-specific diagnosis Byte x+10 Number of channels per module 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte x+11 : Diagnostic event on channel 0 of module Diagnostic event on channel 1 of module : Diagnostic event on channel 7 of module Byte x+12 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 Diagnostic events for channel 0 Configuration or parameter assignment error Short-circuit to M Wire break Lower limit violation Upper limit violation Byte x+13: Assignment for channel 1 as for byte x+12 : Byte x+19: Assignment for channel 7 as for byte x+12 Figure 5-16 5-48 Structure as of byte x+4 for diagnostic interrupt (analog inputs) ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Commissioning and Diagnostics Diagnostic interrupt of modules with analog outputs Byte x+4 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 Module malfunction, i. e. a problem has been detected Internal fault in module External error: Module no longer addressable Channel fault in module Parameters not assigned to module Parameterization error 7 0 15H: Module class, analog module Byte x+5 7 0 2 Byte x+6 Module in STOP mode Byte x+7: Is not used Byte x+8 73H: Module with analog outputs Byte x+9 Length of channel-specific diagnosis Byte x+10 Number of channels per module 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte x+11 : Diagnostic event on channel 0 of module Diagnostic event on channel 1 of module Diagnostic event on channel 3 of module 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte x+12 0 0 0 0 0 Diagnostic events for channel 0 Configuration or parameter assignment error Short-circuit to M Wire break Byte x+13: Assignment for channel 1 as for byte 12 Byte x+14: Assignment for channel 2 as for byte 12 Byte x+13: Assignment for channel 3 as for byte 12 Bytes x+14 to x+19: Are always 00H Figure 5-17 Configuration as of byte x+4 for diagnostic interrupt (analog outputs) ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 5-49 Commissioning and Diagnostics Hardware interrupt of analog input modules 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte x+4 : Limit value exceeded on channel 0 of module Limit value exceeded on channel 1 of module : Limit value exceeded on channel 7 of module 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte x+5 : Limit value violated on channel 0 of module Limit value violated on channel 1 of module : Limit value violated on channel 7 of module Bytes x+6 to x+7: Are always 00H Figure 5-18 Structure as of byte x+4 for hardware interrupt (analog inputs) Hardware interrupt of digital input modules 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte x+4 : Rising edge on channel 0 of the module Rising edge on channel 1 of the module : Rising edge on channel 7 of the module 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte x+5 : Falling edge on channel 0 of the module Falling edge on channel 1 of the module : Falling edge on channel 7 of the module Bytes x+6 to x+7: Are always 00H Figure 5-19 5-50 Structure as of byte x+4 for hardware interrupt (digital inputs) ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Commissioning and Diagnostics Byte x+4 to x+7 (x+10) for diagnosis of ET 200X If byte x+2 contains the slot number 02, this indicates that a basic module is generating diagnostic messages. These diagnostic messages are contained in bytes x+4 to x+7 (x+10). Table 5-22 gives you the meaning of bytes x+4 to x+7 (x+10) when the following basic modules are used: Basic module MLFB BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V 6ES7 141-1BF11-0XB0 6ES7 141-1BF12-0XB0 BM 141 DI 8 DC 2 ECOFAST 6ES7 141-1BF00-0AB0 6ES7 141-1BF01-0AB0 BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG 6ES7 141-1BF40-0AB0 BM 142 DO 4 DC 24V/2A 6ES7 142-1BD21-0XB0 6ES7 142-1BD22-0XB0 BM 143-DESINA FO 6ES7 143-1BF00-0XB0 BM 143-DESINA RS485 6ES7 143-1BF00-0AB0 Table 5-22 Bytes x+4 to x+10 in the diagnosis of ET 200X Byte x+4 Bit Meaning Remarks 0 Error 1: 0: Error No error 1 Internal error Cause of fault is in BM 2 External error Cause of fault is in configuration of ET 200X 3 Module fault BM cannot access one or more plugged-in modules 4 Load voltage 1: 0: 5 not assigned - 6 Parameters not assigned to module - 7 Parameter assignment 1: 0: Error No error Error No error x+5 0 to 7 1BH Fixed x+6 0 to 7 not assigned - x+7 0 to 7 not assigned - x+8 0 to 7 Module ID 55H for basic module x+9 0 to 7 08H Length of channel-specific diagnosis x+10 0 to 7 08H Fixed x+11 to x+19 0 to 7 not assigned - ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 5-51 Commissioning and Diagnostics Table 5-23 gives you the meaning of bytes x+4 to x+7 (x+10) when the following basic modules are used: Basic module MLFB BM 141 6ES7 141-1BF01-0XB0 BM 142 6ES7 142-1BD11-0XB0 Table 5-23 Bytes x+4 to x+7 in the diagnosis of ET 200X Byte Bit Meaning Remarks 0 Module malfunction (power supply for sensor/logic too low or Bits 2 and 4 are set) 1: 0: 1 not assigned - 2 External error Cause of fault is configuration if ET 200X (EM can no longer be addressed) 3 not assigned - 4 No external auxiliary voltage (no load voltage supply or it is too low) 1: 0: 5 not assigned - 6 not assigned - 7 Parameter assignment 1: 0: 0 to 3 1011 Fixed (Module class: Basic module) 4 to 7 not assigned - x+6 0 to 7 not assigned - x+7 0 to 7 not assigned - x+4 x+5 5-52 Error No error Error No error Error No error ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Commissioning and Diagnostics 5.6.10 Analyzing interrupts from station diagnosis The structure of the station diagnosis is the same as the structure of the interrupt section, as described in Section 5.6.9. Interrupts with S7 DP master The ET 200X supports the following alarms: Diagnostic interrupt Hardware interrupt You can evaluate these interrupts with an S7 DP master. In the case of an interrupt, interrupt OBs run automatically in the CPU (see the System Software for S7-300/S7-400, Program Design programming manual). Interrupts with another DP master If you operate the ET 200X with another DP master, these alarms will be simulated as device-specific diagnosis of the ET 200X. You must postprocess the relevant diagnostic events in the DP master's user program. ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 5-53 Commissioning and Diagnostics Saving the diagnosis Depending on byte x+1, transfer the contents of the station diagnosis to a data block because: The interrupts are updated cyclically. The contents of the diagnosis as of byte x+3 depend on whether the S7 diagnosis or S7 hardware interrupt is reported. Note The following points are important in evaluating diagnostic interrupts and hardware interrupts with a different DP master by means of the station diagnosis: The DP master should be able to store the diagnostic messages, that is, the DP master should have a ring buffer in which to place these messages. If the DP master cannot store diagnostic messages, only the latest diagnostic message to be received is stored, for instance. You have to poll regularly in your user program the corresponding bits in the station diagnosis. You must also take PROFIBUS-DP's bus cycle time into consideration so that you can scan the bits at least once in sync with the bus cycle time, for example. You cannot use hardware interrupts in the station diagnosis in an IM 308-C as DP master, because only coming - and not going - interrupts are reported. For example, the "upper limit violation" bit is only reset when the "lower limit violation" bit is set. 5-54 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 General Technical Specifications 6 What are general technical specifications? The general technical specifications contain the standards and test values with which the ET 200X conforms and which it fulfills, and the test criteria by which the ET 200X distributed I/O device was tested. In this Chapter Section Subject Page 6.1 Standards, certificates and approvals 6-2 6.2 Electromagnetic compatibility 6-4 6.3 Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions 6-6 6.4 Details of insulation testing, safety class, degree of protection and rated voltage of the ET 200X 6-9 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 6-1 General Technical Specifications 6.1 Standards, certificates and approvals This chapter contains the following information about the components of the ET 200X: The most important standards for which the ET 200X satisfies the criteria The certificates and approvals available for the ET 200X PROFIBUS standard The ET 200X distributed I/O device is based on IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1. Identification code for Australia The ET 200X distributed I/O device complies with AS/NZS 2064 (Class A). IEC 61131 The ET 200X distributed I/O device meets the requirements and criteria of IEC 61131-2, (programmable controllers, part 2 on equipment requirements and tests). CE certification The ET 200X distributed I/O device meets the requirements and protection objectives of the following EC directives and complies with the harmonized European standards (ENs) that have been published in the Official Gazettes of the European Community for programmable logic controllers: 73/23/EEC "Electrical equipment for use within fixed voltage ranges" (low-voltage directive) 89/336/EEC "Electromagnetic compatibility" (EMC directive) The EC declarations of conformity are being kept available for the cognizant authorities at: Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Bereich Automatisierungs- und Antriebstechnik A&D AS RD42 Postfach 1963 D-92209 Amberg UL Recognition UL Recognition Mark Underwriters Laboratories (UL) as per Standard UL 508, File No. 116536 6-2 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 General Technical Specifications CSA Certification CSA Certification Mark Canadian Standard Association (CSA) to Standard C22.2 No. 142, File No. LR 48323 The SITOP power power supply has cUL certification. DESINA The ET 200X-DESINA fulfills the requirements of the DESINA specification. ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 6-3 General Technical Specifications 6.2 Electromagnetic compatibility Definition Electromagnetic compatibility is the ability of an electric device to function satisfactorily in its electromagnetic environment without interfering with this environment. The ET 200X distributed I/O device complies with the requirements of the EMC legislation of the European internal market. A requirement for this is that the ET 200 distributed I/O system meets the specifications and directives concerning electrical installation. Bus parameter settings for the PROFIBUS-DP Note To maintain the EMC values, you must increase the "Retry Limit" bus parameter to at leas "3" in your configuration software (e.g. COM PROFIBUS or STEP 7) for transmission rates of 500 kbps and 1.5 Mbps. Leave all the other bus parameters as they are, in accordance with your selected bus profile. Pulse-shaped interference The following table shows the electromagnetic compatibility of the ET 200X distributed I/O device with regard to pulse-shaped interference. Pulse-shaped interference Electrostatic discharge to IEC 61000-4-2. Burst pulses (fast transient interference) in accordance with IEC 61000-4-4. Tested with 8 kV 4kV Corresponds to severity 3 (air discharge) 2 (contact discharge) 2 kV (supply line) 1 kV (signal line) 3 2 Surge in accordance with IEC 61000-4-5 Only with lightning protection elements (refer to DP master manual) Asymmetrical connection Symmetrical connection 6-4 2 kV (supply line) 2 kV (signal line/ data line) 3 1 kV (supply line) 1 kV (signal line/ data line) ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 General Technical Specifications Sine-shaped interference The following table shows the electromagnetic compatibility of the ET 200X distributed I/O device with regard to sine-shaped interference. RF radiation in accordance with IEC 61000-4-3 Electromagnetic RF field Amplitude-modulated 80 to 1000 MHz Pulse-modulated 900 MHz 5 MHz 10 V/m 80 % AM (1 kHz) RF coupling in accordance with IEC 61000-4-6 0.15 to 80 MHz 10 Vrms unmodulated 50 % ED 80 % AM (1 kHz) 200 Hz repetition frequency 150 W source impedance Emission of radio interference Emitted interference of electromagnetic fields in accordance with EN 55011: limit value class A, group 1 (measured at a distance of 30 m). Frequency Emitted interference From 30 to 230 MHz < 30 dB (mV/m)Q From 230 to 1000 MHz < 37 dB (mV/m)Q ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 6-5 General Technical Specifications 6.3 Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions Shipping and storage conditions The ET 200X distributed I/O device exceeds the requirements of EC 61131-2 with regard to transport and storage conditions. The following figures are valid for modules that have been transported or stored in their original packaging. Type of condition Permissible range Free fall BM/EM/frequency converter: 1 m Motor starter: 0.35 m Temperature BM/EM, except the pneumatic module: from -40 C to +70 C Pneumatic module: from -30 C to +70 C Temperature variation 20 K/h Air pressure From 1080 to 660 hPa (corresponds to an altitude of -1000 to 3500 m) Relative humidity From 5 to 95 %, without condensation Climatic environmental conditions The following climatic environmental conditions apply: Environmental conditions Operating ranges Remarks Temperature From 0 to 55 C For horizontal installation; not for pneumatic components From 0 to 50 C For horizontal installation of pneumatic components From 0 to 40 C For all other installation positions Temperature variation 10 K/h Relative humidity From 5 to 100 % Air pressure From 1080 to 795 hPa Contaminant concentration SO2: < 0.5 ppm; rel. humidity < 60 %, no moisture condensation H2S: < 0.1 ppm; rel. humidity < 60 %, no moisture condensation 6-6 Corresponds to an altitude of -1000 to 2000 m Test: 10 ppm; 4 days 1 ppm; 4 days ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 General Technical Specifications Mechanical environmental conditions The mechanical environmental conditions are shown in the following table in the form of sinusoidal oscillations. For this, each module of the ET 200X is secured to the substrate. Basic and expansion modules Frequency range Permanent Tested with ... All except motor starters/frequency converters and pneumatic components 5 f 8 Hz 0.35 mm amplitude 0.75 mm amplitude 8 f 150 Hz 5 g constant acceleration 10 g constant acceleration 5 f 8 Hz 0.15 mm amplitude 0.15 mm amplitude 8 f 150 Hz 2 g constant acceleration 2 g constant acceleration Motor starters/frequency converters and pneumatic components ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 6-7 General Technical Specifications Testing mechanical environmental conditions The following tables provide information about the type and scope of tests for mechanical ambient conditions. For this, each module of the ET 200X is secured to the substrate. Test for ... Test standard Oscillations Oscillation test to Type of oscillation: frequency sweeps with a rate of change of 1 octave IEC 60068-2-8 per minute. 5 Hz f 8 Hz, constant amplitude of 0.75 mm 8 Hz f 150 Hz, constant acceleration of 10 g Duration of oscillation: 10 frequency sweeps per axis in each of the three perpendicular axes Shock Shock test to IEC 60068-2-27 Type of shock: half-sine Shock strength: 30 g peak value, 18 ms duration Direction of the shock: 3 shocks per +/- direction in each of the three perpendicular axes Repetitive shock Shock test to IEC 60068-29 Type of shock: half-sine Shock strength: 25 g peak value, 6 ms duration Direction of the shock: 1000 shocks per +/- direction in each of the three perpendicular axes Test for ... Test standard Motor starters/frequency converters and pneumatic components Oscillations Oscillation test to Type of oscillation: frequency sweeps with a rate of change of 1 octave IEC 60068-2-8 per minute. 5 Hz f 8 Hz, constant amplitude of 0.15 mm 8 Hz f 150 Hz, constant acceleration of 2 g Duration of oscillation: 10 frequency sweeps per axis in each of the three perpendicular axes Shock Shock test to IEC 60068-2-27 6-8 Basic and expansion modules without motor starter/ frequency converter and pneumatic components Type of shock: half-sine Shock strength: 15 g peak value, 11 ms duration Direction of the shock: 3 shocks per +/- direction in each of the three perpendicular axes ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 General Technical Specifications 6.4 Details of insulation testing, safety class, degree of protection and rated voltage of the ET 200X Test voltage Insulation strength is demonstrated in the routine test with the following test voltage in accordance with IEC 61131-2: Circuits with rated voltage Ue to other circuits and ground 0 V < Ue 50 V 300 V < Ue 600 V Test voltage 500 VDC 2.6 kVDC to ground 4 kVDC to backplane bus Pollution severity Pollution severity 3 in accordance with IEC 61131 Safety class Safety class I in accordance with IEC 60536 IP 65 degree of protection Degree of protection IP 65 in accordance with IEC 60529 for all basic and expansion modules, EM 148-FC frequency converters, motor starters and pneumatic components of the ET 200X. This means: Protection against the ingress of dust and complete protection against electric shock Protection against water jets from nozzles which are aimed at the casing from all directions. (There must be no harmful effects from the water.) IP 66 and IP 67 degrees of protection Degree of protection IP 66 and IP 67 in accordance with IEC 60529 for all basic and expansion modules (except motor starters, EM 148-FC frequency converters and pneumatic components): Protection against the ingress of dust and complete protection against electric shock IP 66: Protection against heavy seas or strong water jets. (There must be no ingress of harmful quantities of water into the casing.) IP 67: Protection against water when the casing is immersed in it under defined pressure and time conditions. (There must be no ingress of harmful quantities of water into the casing.) ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 6-9 General Technical Specifications Note The above-mentioned degrees of protection are only warranted when the ET 200X is completely closed. Therefore: Always plug all connectors for PROFIBUS-DP and the supply voltage for the electronics/sensors and the load into the basic module (BM 141, BM 142, BM 147/CPU), irrespective of whether or not they are all wired. An alternative is to close unused connectors with covers. Plug all the DESINA connectors into the BM 141-ECOFAST or BM 143-DESINA basic modules. Fit a cover if a DESINA socket remains unused. Seal off any terminal connections which are not required with screw caps. NEMA classification of the ET 200X (for the US market) All the basic and expansion modules of the ET 200X (except motor starters, EM 148-FC frequency converters, CPV 10 and CPV 40 valve terminals, and pneumatic modules) meet the requirements of NEMA: Enclosure rating Type: 4X - indoor use only. Rated voltage for operation The ET 200X distributed I/O device operates with the rated voltage and corresponding tolerances shown in the following table. 6-10 Rated voltage Tolerance range 24 VDC 20.4 to 28.8 VDC ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 7 Technical Specifications The ET 200X consists of different components that are connected together to form the ET 200X distributed I/O device. In this chapter, we have summarized the technical specifications relating to the different types of component. Contents of Chapter Section Subject Page 7.1 BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V basic module (6ES7 141-1BF12-0XB0) 7-3 7.2 BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST basic module (6ES7 141-1BF01-0AB0) 7-8 7.3 BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG basic module (6ES7 141-1BF40-0AB0) 7-12 7.4 BM 142 DO 4 DC 24V/2A basic module (6ES7 142-1BD22-0XB0) 7-18 7.5 BM 143-DESINA FO basic module (6ES7 143-1BF00-0XB0) 7-22 7.6 BM 143-DESINA RS485 Basic Module (6ES7 143-1BF00-0AB0) 7-28 7.7 EM 141 DI 4 DC 24V expansion module (6ES7 141-1BD31-0XA0) 7-34 7.8 EM 141 DI 8 DC 24V expansion module (6ES7 141-1BF31-0XA0) 7-37 7.9 EM 141 DI 8 DC 24V DIAG expansion module (6ES7 141-1BF30-0XB0) 7-39 7.10 EM 141 DI 8 DC 24V expansion module (6ES7 141-1BF41-0XA0) 7-44 7.11 EM 141 DI 8 DC 24V DIAG expansion module (6ES7 141-1BF40-0XB0) 7-47 7.12 EM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/0.5A expansion module (6ES7 142-1BD30-0XA0) 7-51 7.13 EM 142 DO 4 DC 24V/2A expansion module (6ES7 142-1BD40-0XA0) 7-54 7.14 EM 142 DO 4 DC 24V/2A expansion module (6ES7 142-1BD40-0XB0) 7-57 7.15 EM 142 DO 8 DC 24V/1.2A expansion module (6ES7 142-1BF30-0XA0) 7-62 7.16 EM 143-DESINA expansion module (6ES7 143-1BF30-0XB0) 7-65 7.17 EM 148-P DI 4 x DC 24V/DO 2 x expansion module (pneumatic module) (6ES7 148-1DA00-0XA0) 7-70 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 7-1 Technical Specifications Section 7-2 Subject Page 7.18 EM 148-P DO 16 x P/CPV10 expansion module (pneumatic interface module for CPV10) (6ES7 148-1EH00-0XA0) 7-74 7.19 EM 148-P DO 16 x P/CPV14 expansion module (pneumatic interface module for CPV14) (6ES7 148-1EH10-0XA0) 7-76 7.20 PM 148 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A power module (6ES7 148-1CA00-0XB0) 7-78 7.21 Expansion Modules with Analog Inputs and Outputs 7-83 7.22 SITOP power power supply 24V/10A (6EP1 334-2CA00) 7-129 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications 7.1 BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V basic module (6ES7 141-1BF12-0XB0) Features The basic module BM 141 DI 8DC 24V with the order number 6ES7 141-1BF12-0XB0 has the following features: 8 digital inputs Rated input voltage of 24 VDC Suitable for switches and proximity switches (BEROs) Pinout of the sockets for DI The following table shows the pinout of the four sockets used to connect the digital inputs. The connector wiring is described in Section 4.4.4. You can find the layout of the sockets 1 to 4 on the module in Appendix C. Table 7-1 Pin Pinout of the sockets for 8-channel digital inputs Assignment of socket X1 Assignment of socket X2 1 Sensor supply output 1L+ 2 Input signal, channel 4 3 Chassis ground, power supply 4 Input signal, channel 0 5 PE Input signal, channel 5 Input signal, channel 1 Assignment of socket X3 Assignment of socket X4 Input signal, channel 6 Input signal, channel 7 Input signal, channel 2 Input signal, channel 3 Front view of socket (Front view) 2 1 5 3 4 Covering up unused connections You must seal off any connections which are not required with M12 screw caps, in order to ensure that the degree of protection (IP 65, IP 66 or IP 67) is achieved. ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 7-3 Technical Specifications Basic circuit diagram The basic circuit diagram of the basic module is shown below. Connector assembly Supply voltage Electronic components/ sensors 1L+ 1M B A ON Internal power supply X01 PROFIBUS-D P connection A B BF SF Electronic components Electrical isolation Backplane bus interface X02 X03 Load voltage monitor 2L+ PROFIBUS address 24 VDC 2M Load voltage Short-circuit protection 1L+ Socket connections (see Table 7-1) So. X1 So. X2 So. X3 So. X4 Figure 7-1 7-4 Basic circuit diagram of the BM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V basic module ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications Parameters The following tables provide an overview of the parameters on the basic module that can be set. Table 7-2 Parameters of the BM 141 DI 8DC 24V Range Parameters S7 slave with HWCONFIG --- Standard slave with DDB file SIEM803D.GSG1 --- Default Standard slave with DDB file SI03803D.GSG1 DP interrupt mode Diagnostic interrupt Hardware interrupt --- Enhanced diagnostics2 --- --- --- Startup when expected/actual config. differ Diagnosis: no load voltage (S) Area affected DPV0/DPV1 DPV1 ET 200X Yes/no Yes ET 200X Yes/no Yes ET 200X Yes/no Yes ET 200X Yes/no No ET 200X Yes/no Yes ET 200X --- --- Module diagnosis Yes/no Yes ET 200X --- --- Module status Yes/no Yes ET 200X --- --- Channel-specific diagnosis Yes/no Yes ET 200X 1 2 As of basic module 6ES7 141-1BF12-0XB0, version 1 The length of the diagnostic frame is 32 bytes ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 7-5 Technical Specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W H D (mm) Weight 134 110 55 Approx. 500 g Module-specific data Electrical isolation Between channels Between load voltage Between Yes PROFIBUS-DP and all other circuit components 9.6/19.2/93.75/187.5 /500 kbps 1.5/3/6/12 Mbps Bus protocol PROFIBUS-DP Permissible potential difference FREEZE compatibility Yes Between different Yes Number of inputs 8 Yes and all other circuit components Baud rate SYNC compatibility No 75 VDC, 60 VAC circuits Insulation tested with 500 VDC Power input Cable length Unshielded Max. 30 m Manufacturer identification 803DH Voltages, currents, potentials From supply voltage Max. 180 mA 1L+ Power loss of module Typ. 3.5 W Status, alarms, diagnostics Rated supply voltage for electronic components and sensors 1L+ 24 VDC Max. perm. current for electronic components and sensors Reverse polarity Status display Green LED per channel Up to 40 C 1 A; Up to 55 C 0.8 A Alarms Diagnostic interrupt Diagnostic functions Configurable Yes Group error PROFIBUS-DP bus Red LED (SF) protection Short circuit protection Yes, electronic Rated load voltage 2L + 24 VDC Reverse polarity No protection Max. perm. power input from load Up to 40 C 10 A; Up to 55 C 8 A Maximum number of inputs driven simultaneously All installation positions To 55 C Monitoring of the Green LED (ON) electronics power supply Load voltage monitor Reading diagnostic information Green LED (24VDC) Possible Sensor supply outputs Outputs Output current* 8 Short circuit protection 7-6 Red LED (BF) monitoring 4 Up to 40 C max. 0.9A; Up to 55 C max. 0.7A Yes, electronic ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications Sensor selection data Input characteristic To IEC 61131, Type 1 Connection of two-wire BEROs Possible Permissible Max. 1.5 mA Input voltage Rated value With signal "1" With signal "0" 24 VDC 13 to 30 V -3 to 5 V closed-circuit current Input current With signal "1" Typ. 7 mA * Please note the total current per ET 200X. Input delay From "0" to "1" From "1" to "0" ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 1.2 to 4.8 ms 1.2 to 4.8 ms 7-7 Technical Specifications 7.2 BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST basic module (6ES7 141-1BF01-0AB0) Feature s The BM 141 DI 8DC 24V ECOFAST basic module with the order number 6ES7 141-1BF01-0AB0 has the following features: PROFIBUS-DP connection via copper conductors (RS 485) 8 digital inputs Rated input voltage of 24 VDC Suitable for switches and proximity switches (BEROs) Pinout of the sockets for DI The following table shows the pinout of the eight sockets used to connect the digital inputs. The connector wiring is described in Section 4.4.4. You can find the layout of the sockets in Appendix C. Table 7-3 Pin Pinout of sockets X1 to X8 for digital inputs Assignment of socket X1 Assignment of socket X2 1 Sensor supply output 1L+ 2 not assigned 3 Chassis ground, power supply 4 Input signal, channel 0 5 PE Pin Assignment of socket X5 Input signal, channel 1 Assignment of socket X6 1 Sensor supply output 1L+ 2 not assigned 3 Chassis ground, power supply 4 Input signal, channel 4 5 PE Input signal, channel 5 Assignment of socket X3 Assignment of socket X4 Front view of socket 2 Input signal, channel 2 Assignment of socket X7 Input signal, channel 6 Input signal, channel 3 1 5 3 4 Assignment of socket X8 Input signal, channel 7 Covering up unused connections You must seal off any connections which are not required with M12 screw caps, in order to ensure that the degree of protection (IP 65, IP 66 or IP 67) is achieved. 7-8 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications Basic circuit diagram The basic circuit diagram of the basic module is show below. DESINA connector DC 24 V-NS A 5 2 1 DC 24 V-NS Internal power supply X01 PROFIBUS address RUN SF Electronic components 6 3 4 B DC 24 V-S RS 485 interface Backplane bus interface B 6 3 4 X02 5 2 1 A DC 24 V-S Load voltage monitor Short-circuit protection Socket connections (see Table 7-3) Figure 7-2 So. X1 So. X2 So. X3 So. X8 Basic circuit diagram for the BM 141 DI 8DC 24V ECOFAST basic module (6ES7 141-1BF01-0AB0) ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 7-9 Technical Specifications Parameters The following tables provide an overview of the parameters on the basic module that can be set. Table 7-4 Parameters of the BM 141 DI 8DC 24V ECOFAST Range Parameters S7 slave with HWCONFIG --- Standard slave with DDB file SIEM80D2.GSG1 --- Default Standard slave with DDB file SI0380D2.GSG1 DP interrupt mode Diagnostic interrupt Hardware interrupt --- Enhanced diagnostics2 --- --- --- Startup when expected/actual config. differ Diagnosis: no load voltage (S) Area affected DPV0/DPV1 DPV1 ET 200X Yes/no Yes ET 200X Yes/no Yes ET 200X Yes/no Yes ET 200X Yes/no No ET 200X Yes/no Yes ET 200X --- --- Module diagnosis Yes/no Yes ET 200X --- --- Module status Yes/no Yes ET 200X --- --- Channel-specific diagnosis Yes/no Yes ET 200X 1 2 As of basic module 6ES7 141-1BF01-0AB0, version 1 The length of the diagnostic frame is 32 bytes 7-10 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W H D (mm) 175 180 110 Weight Approx. 650 g Module-specific data Baud rate 9.6/19.2/45.45/93.75/1 87.5/500 kbps 1.5/3/6/12 Mbps Between channels No Between load voltages No Between load voltage No and all other circuitry Between Yes PROFIBUS-DP and all other circuitry Permissible potential difference Bus protocol PROFIBUS-DP FREEZE compatibility Yes SYNC compatibility Yes Insulation tested with Number of channels 8 digital inputs Power input Max. 30 m Manufacturer identification 80D2H Power loss of module Status, alarms, diagnostics Up to 40 C 10 A; Up to 55 C 8 A Alarms Diagnostic interrupt Diagnostic functions Configurable No Red LED (SF) Max. perm. power Switched rated load voltage (NS) 24 VDC Group error Status indicator Indicator for Max. perm. power Up to 40 C 10 A; Up to 55 C 8 A Indicator for switched protection Short circuit protection No Reverse polarity No protection Maximum number of inputs driven simultaneously all installed positions to max. 55 C Typ. 3.5 W Green LED per channel 24 VDC input from load Max. 180 mA Status display Non-switched rated load voltage (NS) Reverse polarity 500 VDC (1L+) Voltages, currents, potentials input from load 75 VDC, 60 VAC circuits From backplane bus Cable length Unshielded Between different non-switched load voltage load voltage Reading diagnostic Green LED (RUN) Green LED (DC 24V-NS) Green LED (DC 24V-S) Possible information Sensor supply outputs 8 Electrical isolation Outputs Output current* Short circuit protection 8 Up to 40 C max. 1A; to 55 C max. 0.8A Yes, electronic Between channels and No backplane bus ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 7-11 Technical Specifications Sensor selection data Input voltage Rated value With signal "1" With signal "0" 24 VDC 13 to 30 V * With signal "1" To IEC 61131, Type 1 Connection of two-wire BEROs Possible Permissible Max. 1.5 mA closed-circuit current - 3 to 5 V Input current Input characteristic Please note the total current per ET 200X. Typ. 7 mA Input delay From "0" to "1" From "1" to "0" 7.3 1.2 to 4.8 ms 1.2 to 4.8 ms BM 141 DI 8DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG basic module (6ES7 141-1BF40-0AB0) Features The BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG with the order number 6ES7 141-1BF40-0AB0 has the following features: 7-12 PROFIBUS-DP connection via copper conductors (RS 485) 8 digital inputs Rated input voltage of 24 VDC Suitable for switches and proximity switches (BEROs) Diagnostic interrupt for short circuit and wire break for each channel (I/O component of the basic module) Hardware interrupt at rising and falling edges for each channel (I/O component of the basic module) Direct communication Parameterizable input delays ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications Pinout of the sockets for DI The following table shows the pinout of the eight sockets used to connect the digital inputs. You can find the wiring of the connector in the ET 200X manual, Section 4.4.4. You can find the layout of the sockets in the ET 200X manual, Appendix C. Table 7-5 Pin Pinout of sockets X1 to X8 for digital inputs Assignment of socket X1 Assignment of socket X2 1 Sensor supply output 1L+ 2 not assigned 3 Chassis ground, power supply 4 Input signal, channel 0 5 PE Pin Assignment of socket X5 Input signal, channel 1 Assignment of socket X6 1 Sensor supply output 1L+ 2 not assigned 3 Chassis ground, power supply 4 Input signal, channel 4 5 PE Input signal, channel 5 Assignment of socket X3 Assignment of socket X4 Front view of socket 2 Input signal, channel 2 Assignment of socket X7 Input signal, channel 6 Input signal, channel 3 1 5 3 4 Assignment of socket X8 Input signal, channel 7 Covering up unused connections You must seal off any connections which are not required with M12 screw caps, in order to ensure that the degree of protection (IP 65, IP 66 or IP 67) is achieved. ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 7-13 Technical Specifications Basic circuit diagram The basic circuit diagram of the basic module is show below. DESINA connector DC 24 V-NS A 5 2 1 DC 24 V-NS Internal power supply X01 RUN SF Electronic components PROFIBUS address 6 3 4 B DC 24 V-S RS 485 interface Backplane bus interface B 6 3 4 X02 5 2 1 A DC 24 V-S Load voltage monitor Socket connections (see Table 7-3) Short-circuit protection So. X1 Figure 7-3 7-14 Short-circuit protection So. X2 Short-circuit protection Short-circuit protection So. X3 So. X8 Basic circuit diagram for the BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG basic module (6ES7 141-1BF40-0AB0) ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications Parameters The following tables provide an overview of the parameters on the basic module that can be set. Table 7-6 Parameters of the BM 141 DI 8DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG Range Parameters S7 slave with HWCONFIG --- Standard slave with DDB file SIEM80D3.GSG1 --- Default Standard slave with DDB file SI0380D3.GSG1 DP interrupt mode Diagnostic interrupt Hardware interrupt --- Enhanced diagnostics2 --- --- --- Startup when expected/actual config. differ Diagnosis: no load voltage (S) Area affected DPV0/DPV1 DPV1 ET 200X Yes/no Yes ET 200X Yes/no Yes ET 200X Yes/no Yes ET 200X Yes/no No ET 200X Yes/no Yes ET 200X --- --- Module diagnosis Yes/no Yes ET 200X --- --- Module status Yes/no Yes ET 200X --- --- Channel-specific diagnosis Yes/no Yes ET 200X 1 2 As of basic module 6ES7 141-1BF40-0AB0, version 2 The length of the diagnostic frame is 32 bytes Table 7-7 Parameters of the BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG for digital inputs Parameters Input delay1 Range Default Area affected 0.5 ms/ 3 ms/ 15 ms/ 20 ms 3 ms Module Diagnosis: short circuit to M Yes/no No Channel Diagnosis: wire break Yes/no No Channel Diagnostic interrupt Yes/no No Module Hardware interrupt Yes/no No Module Hardware interrupt on rising edge2 Yes/no No Channel Hardware interrupt on falling edge2 Yes/no No Channel 1 2 The input delay applies at "0" to "1" and at "1" to "0". These parameters can only be set if you enable the hardware interrupt parameter. ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 7-15 Technical Specifications Technical data Dimensions and weight Dimensions W H D (mm) 175 180 110 Weight Approx. 650 g Between different 75 VDC, 60 VAC circuits Module-specific data Baud rate Permissible potential difference 9.6/19.2/45.45/93.75/1 87.5/500 kbps 1.5/3/6/12 Mbps Bus protocol PROFIBUS-DP FREEZE compatibility Yes SYNC compatibility Yes Number of channels 8 digital inputs Insulation tested with 500 VDC Power input From backplane bus Max. 180 mA (1L+) Power loss of the module Status, alarms, diagnostics Status display Green LED per channel Alarms Hardware interrupt Diagnostic interrupt Hardware interrupt Diagnostic interrupt Configurable Diagnostic functions Configurable Group error Status indicator Indicator for Red LED (SF) Cable length Unshielded Max. 30 m Manufacturer identification 80D3H Voltages, currents, potentials Non-switched rated load voltage (NS) 24 VDC Max. perm. power Up to 40 C 10 A; Up to 55 C 8 A input from load Reverse polarity No protection Configurable Green LED (RUN) Green LED (DC 24V-NS) non-switched load voltage Short-circuit protection No Indicator for switched Switched rated load voltage (NS) 24 VDC Max. perm. power Up to 40 C 10 A; Up to 55 C 8 A Channel error display Reading diagnostic input from load Reverse polarity Typ. 3.5 W load voltage Green LED (DC 24V-S) red LED per channel Possible information No protection Maximum number of inputs driven simultaneously all installed positions max. 55 C 8 Electrical isolation Between channels and No backplane bus Between channels No Between load voltages No Between load voltage No and all other circuitry Between Yes PROFIBUS-DP and all other circuitry 7-16 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications Sensor supply outputs Outputs Output current* Short-circuit protection 8 Up to 40 C max. 1A; to 55 C max. 0.8A Yes, electronic Sensor selection data Input voltage Rated value With signal "1" With signal "0" 24 VDC 13 to 30 V Typ. 0.5 ms Typ. 3 ms Typ. 15 ms Typ. 20 ms Input characteristic To IEC 61131, Type 2 Connection of two-wire BEROs Possible Permissible Max. 1.5 mA ** closed-circuit current - 3 to 5 V Input current With signal "1" At "0" to "1" and at "1" to "0" Typ. 10 mA * Please note the total current per ET 200X. ** The required closed-circuit current for wire break detection is 0.6 mA < I < 1.5 mA Input delay (parameterizable) ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 7-17 Technical Specifications 7.4 BM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A basic module (6ES7 142-1BD22-0XB0) Features The BM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A basic module, order number 6ES7 142-1BD22-0XB0, has the following features: 4 digital outputs Output current 2 A per output Rated load voltage 24 VDC Suitable for solenoids, DC contactors and indicator lights Pinout of the sockets for DO The following table shows the pinout of the four sockets used to connect the digital outputs. The connector wiring is described in Section 4.4.4. You can find the layout of the sockets X1 to X4 on the module in Appendix C. Table 7-8 Pin * Pinout of the sockets for 4-channel digital outputs Assignment of Assignment of Assignment of Assignment of socket X1 socket X2 socket X3 socket X4 1 - 2 Output signal, channel 1* - 3 Chassis ground, load power supply 4 Output signal, channel 0 5 PE Output signal, channel 1* Output signal, channel 3* Front view of socket (Front) - 2 1 Output signal, channel 2 Output signal, channel 3* 5 3 4 Note: Channel 1 and channel 3 are only allowed to be used at one socket (X1/X2 or X3/X4). Covering up unused connections You must seal off any connections which are not required with M12 screw caps, in order to ensure that the degree of protection (IP 65, IP 66 or IP 67) is achieved. 7-18 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications Basic circuit diagram The basic circuit diagram of the basic module is shown below. Connector assembly Supply voltage Electronic components/ sensors 1L+ 1M B A X01 ON Internal power supply X02 1M X03 Load voltage monitor 2L+ PROFIBUS-D P connection BF SF Electronic comp. Backplane bus interface A B Electrical isolation PROFIBUS address 24 VDC 2M Load voltage Socket connections (see Table 7-8) Figure 7-4 Basic circuit diagram of the BM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A basic module ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 7-19 Technical Specifications Parameters The following table provides an overview of the parameters that can be set on the basic module. Table 7-9 Parameters of the BM 142 DO 4DC 24V/2A Range Parameters S7 slave with HWCONFIG --- Standard slave with DDB file SIEM803C.GSG1 --- Default Standard slave with DDB file SI03803C.GSG1 DP interrupt mode Diagnostic interrupt Hardware interrupt --- Enhanced diagnostics2 --- --- --- Startup when expected/actual config. differ Diagnosis: no load voltage (S) Area affected DPV0/DPV1 DPV1 ET 200X Yes/no Yes ET 200X Yes/no Yes ET 200X Yes/no Yes ET 200X Yes/no No ET 200X Yes/no Yes ET 200X --- --- Module diagnosis Yes/no Yes ET 200X --- --- Module status Yes/no Yes ET 200X --- --- Channel-specific diagnosis Yes/no Yes ET 200X 1 2 As of basic module 6ES7 142-1BD22-0XB0, version 3 The length of the diagnostic frame is 32 bytes. Dimensions and weight Dimensions W H D (mm) 134 110 55 Weight Approx. 500 g Bus protocol PROFIBUS-DP FREEZE compatibility Yes SYNC compatibility Yes Number of outputs 4 Module-specific data Cable length Baud rate 7-20 9.6/19.2/93.75/187.5 /500 kbps 1.5/3/6/12 Mbps Unshielded Max. 30 m Manufacturer identification 803CH ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications Voltages, currents, potentials Rated supply voltage for electronic components and sensors 1L+ 24 VDC Max. perm. current for Up to 40 C 1 A; Up to 55 C 0.8 A electronic components and sensors Reverse polarity protection Yes Yes, electronic 24 VDC Reverse polarity No protection Up to 40 C 10 A; Up to 55 C 8 A Aggregate current of outputs Up to 20 C Max. 6 A Up to 55 C Max. 4 A Electrical isolation Yes backplane bus Diagnostic functions Configurable Group error PROFIBUS-DP bus Red LED (SF) Load voltage monitor Reading diagnostic information With signal "1" Output current No Yes 2A 5 mA to 2.4 A With signal "0" (residual Yes Load resistance range 12 W to 4 kW Lamp load Max. 10 W Parallel connection of two outputs load Not possible Possible Switching frequency 75 VDC, 60 VAC 500 VDC Resistive load Inductive load to Max. 100 Hz Max. 0.5 Hz IEC 947-5-1, DC13 Lamp load Max. 1 Hz Typ. 2L+ (- 47 V) Max. 12 mA Limitation (internal) of voltage induced on circuit interruption Short-circuit protection for output Yes, electronic Typ. 4 W Response threshold Typ. 3 A Max. 180 mA (without load) ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 same basic module only) improvement 1L+ Power loss of module Max. 0.5 mA For redundant control of Possible (outputs of Power input From load voltage 2L+ Min. of 2L+ (- 0.8 V) Permissible range Driving a digital input From supply voltage Possible Rated value Permissible potential difference Insulation tested with Green LED (DC24V) With signal "1" For performance circuits Green LED (ON) Actuator selection data PROFIBUS-DP and all other circuit components Between different Red LED (BF) electronics power supply Yes supply and all other circuit components Between Diagnostic interrupt current) supply voltage for electronic components Between channels Between load power Alarms Output voltage All installation positions Between channels and Green LED per channel Monitoring of the Rated load voltage 2L + Between channels and Status display monitoring Short-circuit protection Max. perm. power input from load Status, alarms, diagnostics 7-21 Technical Specifications 7.5 BM 143-DESINA FO basic module (6ES7 143-1BF00-0XB0) Features The BM 143-DESINA FO basic module (order number 6ES7 143-1BF00-0XB0) has the following features: PROFIBUS-DP connection via fiber-optic cables 8 digital inputs or outputs (individually parameterizable as input or output) plus 8 diagnostic inputs or inputs with NC functionality (individually parameterizable). Rated input voltage of 24 VDC Digital inputs are suitable for switches and proximity switches (BERO switches) Digital outputs are suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors and indicator lights Pinout of the sockets for DI/DO The tables below show the pinouts of the 8 sockets for connecting digital inputs and outputs. The connector wiring is described in Section 4.4.4. The arrangement of sockets X1 to X8 on the module in Appendix C. Table 7-10 Pinout of sockets X1, X3, X5 and X7 for digital inputs or outputs Pin * Assignment of socket X1 Assignment of socket X3 Assignment of socket X5 1 Non-switched supply voltage DC 24V-NS 2 Diagnostics input or input with NC functionality 3 Chassis ground, power supply 4* Digital input or output (DESINA) channel 0 5 not assigned Diagnostics input or input with NC functionality Digital input or output (DESINA) channel 2 Assignment of socket X7 Diagnostics input or input with NC functionality Diagnostics input or input with NC functionality Digital input or output (DESINA) channel 4 Digital input or output (DESINA) channel 6 Front view of socket (Front view) 2 1 5 3 4 If it is parameterized as a digital output, pin 4 is fed by the DC 24V-S switched supply voltage. 7-22 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications Table 7-11 Pinout of sockets X2, X4, X6 and X8 for digital inputs or outputs Pin * Assignment of socket X2 Assignment of socket X4 Assignment of socket X6 1 Non-switched supply voltage DC 24V-NS 2 Diagnostics input or input with NC functionality 3 Chassis ground, power supply 4* Digital input or output (DESINA) channel 1 5 not assigned Diagnostics input or input with NC functionality Digital input or output (DESINA) channel 3 Diagnostics input or input with NC functionality Assignment of socket X8 Front view of socket (Front view) Diagnostics input or input with NC functionality 2 1 Digital input or output (DESINA) channel 5 Digital input or output (DESINA) channel 7 5 3 4 If it is parameterized as a digital output, pin 4 is fed by the DC 24V-NS non-switched supply voltage. Covering up unused connections You must seal off any connections which are not required with M12 screw caps, in order to ensure that the degree of protection (IP 65, IP 66 or IP 67) is achieved. Basic circuit diagram The basic circuit diagram of the basic module is shown below. DESINA connector DC 24 V-NS A 5 2 1 DC 24 V-NS Internal power supply X01 RUN SF Electronic components PROFIBUS address 6 3 4 B DC 24 V-S FO interface Backplane bus B 6 3 4 X02 5 2 1 A DC 24 V-NS DC 24V-S (for digital outputs) Load voltage monitor Parameterizable digital inputs and outputs DC 24 V-S X1 X3 X5 X7 X2 X4 X6 X8 Figure 7-5 Basic circuit diagram of the BM 143-DESINA FO basic module ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 7-23 Technical Specifications Parameters The following table provides an overview of the parameters you can set for the basic module. Table 7-12 Parameters of the BM 143-DESINA FO Range Parameters S7 slave with HWCONFIG --- Standard slave with DDB file SIEM809A.GSG1 --- Default Standard slave with DDB file SI03809A.GSG1 DP interrupt mode Diagnostic interrupt Hardware interrupt --- Enhanced diagnostics2 --- --- --- Startup when expected/actual config. differ Diagnosis: no load voltage (S) Area affected DPV0/DPV1 DPV1 ET 200X Yes/no Yes ET 200X Yes/no Yes ET 200X Yes/no Yes ET 200X Yes/no No ET 200X Yes/no Yes ET 200X --- --- Module diagnosis Yes/no Yes ET 200X --- --- Module status Yes/no Yes ET 200X --- --- Channel-specific diagnosis Yes/no Yes ET 200X 1 2 As of basic module 6ES7 143-1BF00-0XB0, version 5 The length of the diagnostic frame is 32 bytes. 7-24 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications Table 7-13 Parameters of the BM 143-DESINA FO for digital inputs and outputs Range Parameters Channel type for I/On (n= 0...7) Digital input/ digital output Default Digital output (Channel K0, K2, K4, K6) Area affected Channel Digital input (Channel K1, K3, K5, K7) Functional input In (n=8...15) Diagnostic input/ Diagnostic input Channel Output No current or voltage Channel diagnostic input with diagnostic frame/ Input with NC function Response to CPU/master STOP Output No current or voltage hold last value/ Apply substitute value/ Substitute value On (n=0...7) 0/1 0 Channel Diagnostic interrupt Yes/no No Module ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 7-25 Technical Specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W H D (mm) 175 180 110 Weight Approx. 650 g Module-specific data Baud rate 9.6/19.2/45.45/93.75/ 187.5/500 kbps 1.5/3/6/12 Mbps Between channels Between load voltages Between load voltage No No No and all other circuitry Between Yes PROFIBUS-DP and all other circuitry Permissible potential difference Bus protocol PROFIBUS-DP FREEZE compatibility Yes SYNC compatibility Yes Insulation tested with 500 VDC Number of channels 8 digital inputs and outputs Power loss of module Typ. 3.5 W 8 functional inputs (diagnostics inputs or inputs with NC functionality) Between different 75 VDC, 60 VAC circuits Status, alarms, diagnostics Status display Yellow LED per channel Indicator for functional input Yellow/red LED per channel Cable length Unshielded Max. 30 m Alarms Diagnostic interrupt Manufacturer identification 809AH Diagnostic functions Configurable Group error Status indicator Indicator for Red LED (SF) Voltages, currents, potentials Non-switched rated load voltage (NS) 24 VDC Max. perm. power input Up to 40 C 10 A; Up to 55 C 8 A from load Reverse polarity No protection Short-circuit protection Switched rated load voltage 24 VDC (NS) Max. perm. power input from load Reverse polarity Up to 40 C 10 A; Up to 55 C 8 A No Indicator for switched Reading diagnostic Green LED (DC 24V-S) Possible information Sensor supply outputs Outputs Output current protection Maximum number of inputs driven simultaneously all installed positions max. 55 C Green LED (DC 24V-NS) non-switched load voltage load voltage No Green LED (RUN) Short-circuit protection 8 Up to 40 C max. 1 A; Up to 55 C max. 0.8 A Yes, electronic 8 Aggregate current of outputs All installation positions To 20 C Max. 10 A To 50 C Max. 6 A To 55 C Max. 5 A Electrical isolation Between channels and No backplane bus 7-26 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications Sensor selection data Input voltage for parameterized DI (pin 4) Rated value With signal "1" With signal "0" Output voltage 24 VDC With signal "1" Output current 13 to 30 V With signal "1" -30 to 5V Rated value 1.2 A Permissible range 7 mA to 1.3 A Input voltage for functional input (pin 2) Rated value With signal "1" With signal "0" With signal "0" (residual 24 VDC Load resistance range 21 ohms to 4 kohms Lamp load Max. 10 W Parallel connection of two outputs No Typ. 5 mA Driving a digital input Possible From "0" to "1" From "1" to "0" 1.2 to 4.8 ms Switching frequency 1.2 to 4.8 ms Input characteristic To IEC 61131, Type 2 Resistive load Inductive load to Connection of two-wire BEROs Possible Permissible Max. 1.5 mA ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Max. 0.5 mA current) -30 to 2 V Input delay closed-circuit current Min. NS/S (- 0.8 V) 13 to 30 V Input current With signal "1" Actuator selection data Max. 100 Hz Max. 2 Hz IEC 947-5-1, DC13 Lamp load Max. 1 Hz Limitation (internal) of voltage induced on circuit interruption Typ. NS/S (- 47 V) Short-circuit protection for output Yes, electronic Response threshold Typ. 1.8 A 7-27 Technical Specifications 7.6 BM 143-DESINA RS485 basic module (6ES7 143-1BF00-0AB0) Features The BM 143-DESINA RS485 basic module with the order number 6ES7 143-1BF00-0AB0 has the following features: PROFIBUS-DP connection via copper conductors (RS 485) 8 digital inputs or outputs (individually parameterizable as input or output) plus 8 diagnostic inputs or inputs with NC functionality (individually parameterizable). Rated input voltage of 24 VDC Digital inputs are suitable for switches and proximity switches (BERO switches) Digital outputs are suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors and indicator lights Pinout of the sockets for DI/DO The following tables show the pinouts of the eight sockets used to connect the digital inputs or outputs. The connector wiring is described in Section 4.4.4. The arrangement of sockets X1 to X8 on the module in Appendix C. Table 7-14 Pinout of sockets X1, X3, X5 and X7 for digital inputs or outputs Pin * Assignment of socket X1 Assignment of socket X3 Assignment of socket X5 1 Non-switched supply voltage DC 24V-NS 2 Diagnostics input or input with NC functionality 3 Chassis ground, power supply 4* Digital input or output (DESINA) channel 0 5 not assigned Diagnostics input or input with NC functionality Digital input or output (DESINA) channel 2 Assignment of socket X7 Diagnostics input or input with NC functionality Diagnostics input or input with NC functionality Digital input or output (DESINA) channel 4 Digital input or output (DESINA) channel 6 Front view of socket (Front view) 2 1 5 3 4 If it is parameterized as a digital output, pin 4 is fed by the DC 24V-S switched supply voltage. 7-28 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications Table 7-15 Pinout of sockets X2, X4, X6 and X8 for digital inputs or outputs Pin * Assignment of socket X2 Assignment of socket X4 Assignment of socket X6 1 Non-switched supply voltage DC 24V-NS 2 Diagnostics input or input with NC functionality 3 Chassis ground, power supply 4* Digital input or output (DESINA) channel 1 5 not assigned Diagnostics input or input with NC functionality Digital input or output (DESINA) channel 3 Diagnostics input or input with NC functionality Assignment of socket X8 Front view of socket (Front view) Diagnostics input or input with NC functionality 2 1 Digital input or output (DESINA) channel 5 Digital input or output (DESINA) channel 7 5 3 4 If it is parameterized as a digital output, pin 4 is fed by the DC 24V-NS non-switched supply voltage. Covering up unused connections You must seal off any connections which are not required with M12 screw caps, in order to ensure that the degree of protection (IP 65, IP 66 or IP 67) is achieved. Basic circuit diagram The basic circuit diagram of the basic module is shown below. DESINA connector DC 24 V-NS A 5 2 1 DC 24 V-NS Internal power supply X01 RUN SF Electronic components PROFIBUS address 6 3 4 B DC 24 V-S RS 485 interface Backplane bus B 6 3 4 X02 5 2 1 A DC 24 V-NS DC 24V-S (for digital outputs) Load voltage monitor Parameterizable digital inputs and outputs DC 24 V-S X1 X3 X5 X7 X2 X4 X6 X8 Figure 7-6 Basic circuit diagram of the BM 143-DESINA RS485 basic module ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 7-29 Technical Specifications Parameters The following table provides an overview of the parameters you can set for the basic module. Table 7-16 Parameters of the BM 143-DESINA RS485 Range Parameters S7 slave with HWCONFIG --- Standard slave with DDB file SIEM809A.GSG1 --- Default Standard slave with DDB file SI03809A.GSG1 DP interrupt mode Diagnostic interrupt Hardware interrupt --- Enhanced diagnostics2 --- --- --- Startup when expected/actual config. differ Diagnosis: no load voltage (S) Area affected DPV0/DPV1 DPV1 ET 200X Yes/no Yes ET 200X Yes/no Yes ET 200X Yes/no Yes ET 200X Yes/no No ET 200X Yes/no Yes ET 200X --- --- Module diagnosis Yes/no Yes ET 200X --- --- Module status Yes/no Yes ET 200X --- --- Channel-specific diagnosis Yes/no Yes ET 200X 1 2 As of basic module 6ES7 143-1BF00-0AB0, version 2 The length of the diagnostic frame is 32 bytes. 7-30 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications Table 7-17 Parameters of the BM 143-DESINA RS485 for digital inputs and outputs Range Parameters Channel type for I/On (n= 0...7) Digital input/ digital output Default Digital output (Channel K0, K2, K4, K6) Area affected Channel Digital input (Channel K1, K3, K5, K7) Functional input In (n=8...15) Diagnostic input/ Diagnostic input Channel Output No current or voltage Channel diagnostic input with diagnostic frame/ Input with NC function Response to CPU/master STOP Output No current or voltage hold last value/ Apply substitute value/ Substitute value On (n=0...7) 0/1 0 Channel Diagnostic interrupt Yes/no No Module ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 7-31 Technical Specifications Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W H D (mm) 175 180 110 Weight Approx. 650 g Between channels and 9.6/19.2/45.45/93.75/ 187.5/500 kbps 1.5/3/6/12 Mbps Bus protocol PROFIBUS-DP FREEZE compatibility Yes SYNC compatibility Yes Number of channels 8 digital inputs and outputs 8 functional inputs (diagnostics inputs or inputs with NC functionality) Cable length Unshielded Max. 30 m Manufacturer identification 809AH Between channels Between load voltages Between load voltage Non-switched rated load voltage (NS) 24 VDC Max. perm. power input Up to 40 C 10 A; Up to 55 C 8 A Reverse polarity protection Short-circuit protection No No Switched rated load voltage 24 VDC (NS) Max. perm. power input from load Reverse polarity Up to 40 C 10 A; Up to 55 C 8 A No protection Maximum number of inputs driven simultaneously all installed positions max. 55 C No No No and all other circuitry Between Yes PROFIBUS-DP and all other circuitry Permissible potential difference Between different 75 VDC, 60 VAC circuits Insulation tested with 500 VDC Power loss of module Typ. 3.5 W Status, alarms, diagnostics Status display Yellow LED per channel Indicator for functional input Yellow/red LED per channel Alarms Diagnostic interrupt Diagnostic functions Configurable Group error Status indicator Indicator for Red LED (SF) Voltages, currents, potentials from load No backplane bus Module-specific data Baud rate Electrical isolation Green LED (RUN) Green LED (DC 24V-NS) non-switched load voltage Indicator for switched load voltage Reading diagnostic Green LED (DC 24V-S) Possible information Sensor supply outputs Outputs Output current 8 Aggregate current of outputs Short-circuit protection 8 Up to 40 C max. 1 A; Up to 55 C max. 0.8 A Yes, electronic All installation positions To 20 C Max. 10 A To 50 C Max. 6 A To 55 C Max. 5 A 7-32 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications Sensor selection data Input voltage for parameterized DI (pin 4) Rated value With signal "1" With signal "0" Output voltage 24 VDC With signal "1" Output current 13 to 30 V With signal "1" -30 to 5V Rated value 1.2 A Permissible range 7 mA to 1.3 A Input voltage for functional input (pin 2) Rated value With signal "1" With signal "0" With signal "0" (residual 24 VDC Min. NS/S (- 0.8 V) Max. 0.5 mA current) 13 to 30 V Load resistance range 21 ohms to 4 kohms -30 to 2 V Lamp load Max. 10 W Parallel connection of two outputs No Typ. 5 mA Driving a digital input Possible Input current With signal "1" Actuator selection data Input delay From "0" to "1" From "1" to "0" 1.2 to 4.8 ms Switching frequency 1.2 to 4.8 ms Input characteristic To IEC 61131, Type 2 Resistive load Inductive load to Max. 100 Hz Max. 2 Hz IEC 947-5-1, DC13 Connection of two-wire BEROs Possible Lamp load Max. 1 Hz Permissible Limitation (internal) of voltage induced on circuit interruption Typ. NS/S (- 47 V) Max. 1.5 mA Short-circuit protection for output Yes, electronic Response threshold Typ. 1.8 A closed-circuit current ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 7-33 Technical Specifications 7.7 EM 141 DI 4 DC 24V expansion module (6ES7 141-1BD31-0XA0) Features The EM 141 DI 4 DC 24V expansion module; order number 6ES7 141-1BD31-0XA0 has the following features: 4 digital inputs Rated input voltage of 24 VDC Suitable for switches and proximity switches (BEROs) Pinout of the sockets for DI The following table shows the pinout of the four sockets used to connect the digital inputs. You can find the wiring of the connector in Section 4.4.3. You can find the layout of the sockets in Appendix C. Table 7-18 Pinout of the sockets for 4-channel digital inputs Pin * Assignment of socket X1 Assignment of socket X2 1 Sensor supply output 1L+ 2 Input signal, channel 1* 3 Chassis ground, power supply 4 Input signal, channel 0 5 PE - Input signal, channel 1* Assignment of socket X3 Input signal, channel 3* Assignment of socket X4 Front view of socket - 2 1 Input signal, channel 2 Input signal, channel 3* 5 3 4 Note: Channel 1 and channel 3 are only allowed to be used at one socket (X1/X2 or X3/X4). Covering up unused connections You must seal off any connections which are not required with M12 screw caps, in order to ensure that the degree of protection (IP 65, IP 66 or IP 67) is achieved. 7-34 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications Basic circuit diagram The basic circuit diagram of the expansion module is shown below. Supply voltage for electronic components and sensors via backplane bus 1L+ Backplane bus interface 1M Short-circuit protection Socket connections (see Table 7-22) So. X1 So. X2 So. X3 So. X4 Figure 7-7 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Basic circuit diagram of expansion module EM 141 DO 4 x DC 24V 7-35 Technical Specifications Dimensions and weight Status, alarms, diagnostics Dimensions W H D (mm) 87 110 55 Status display Green LED per channel Weight Approx. 250 g Alarms None Module-specific data Number of inputs Sensor supply outputs 4 Outputs Output current* Cable length Unshielded Max. 30 m Voltages, currents, potentials Maximum number of inputs driven simultaneously All installation positions Short-circuit protection Sensor selection data 4 Input voltage No Rated value With signal "1" With signal "0" Up to 55 C Electrical isolation Permissible potential difference Between different circuits Insulation tested with 13 to 30 V - 3 to 5 V With signal "1" 75 VDC, 60 VAC Typ. 7 mA Input delay From "0" to "1" From "1" to "0" 1.2 to 4.8 ms Max. 16 mA Input characteristic To IEC 61131, Type 1 Typ. 1.5 W Connection of two-wire BEROs Possible Permissible Max. 1.5 mA 500 VDC (1L+) Power loss of module 24 VDC Input current Power input From backplane bus 4 Up to 40 C max. 0.9A; Up to 55 C max. 0.7A Yes, electronic 1.2 to 4.8 ms closed-circuit current * 7-36 Please note the total current per ET 200X. ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications 7.8 EM 141 DI 8 DC 24V expansion module (6ES7 141-1BF31-0XA0) Features The EM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V expansion module with the order number 6ES7 141-1BF31-0XA0 has the following features: 8 digital inputs Rated input voltage of 24 VDC Suitable for switches and proximity switches (BEROs) Pinout of the sockets for DI The following table shows the pinout of the four sockets used to connect the digital inputs. The connector wiring is described in Section 4.4.4. You can find the layout of the sockets in Appendix C. Table 7-19 Pin assignment of sockets for 8-channel digital inputs Pin Assignment of socket X1 Assignment of socket X2 1 Sensor supply output 1L+ 2 Input signal, channel 4 3 Chassis ground, power supply 4 Input signal, channel 0 5 PE Input signal, channel 5 Input signal, channel 1 Assignment of socket X3 Input signal, channel 6 Assignment of socket X4 Front view of socket Input signal, channel 7 2 1 Input signal, channel 2 Input signal, channel 3 5 3 4 Covering up unused connections You must seal off any connections which are not required with M12 screw caps, in order to ensure that the degree of protection (IP 65, IP 66 or IP 67) is achieved. ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 7-37 Technical Specifications Basic circuit diagram The basic circuit diagram of the expansion module is shown below. Supply voltage for electronic components and sensors via backplane bus Backplane bus interface 1M 1L+ Short-circuit protection Socket connections (see Table 7-19) So. X1 So. X2 So. X3 So. X4 Figure 7-8 Basic circuit diagram for expansion module EM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V (6ES7 141-1BF31-0XA0) Dimensions and weight Status, alarms, diagnostics Dimensions W H D (mm) 87 110 55 Status display Green LED per channel Weight Approx. 250 g Alarms None Module-specific data Number of inputs 8 Cable length Unshielded Electrical isolation Outputs Output current* Max. 30 m Voltages, currents, potentials Maximum number of inputs driven simultaneously All installed positions max. 55 C Sensor supply outputs Short-circuit protection 4 Up to 40 C max. 0.9A; Up to 55 C max. 0.7A Yes, electronic 8 No Permissible potential difference Between different circuits Insulation tested with 75 VDC, 60 VAC 500 VDC Power input From backplane bus Max. 16 mA (1L+) Power loss of module 7-38 Typ. 1.5 W ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications Sensor selection data Input characteristic To IEC 61131, Type 1 Connection of two-wire BEROs Possible Permissible Max. 1.5 mA Input voltage Rated value With signal "1" With signal "0" 24 VDC 13 to 30 V - 3 to 5 V closed-circuit current Input current With signal "1" typ. 7 mA * Please note the total current per ET 200X. Input delay From "0" to "1" From "1" to "0" 7.9 1.2 to 4.8 ms 1.2 to 4.8 ms EM 141 DI 8 DC 24V DIAG expansion module (6ES7 141-1BF30-0XB0) Hardware The expansion module can be used together with the following basic modules: BM 141 DI 8DC 24V, BM 141 DI 8DC 24V ECOFAST, 6ES7 141-1BF00-0AB0, from product version 01 6ES7 141-1BF01-0AB0, from product version 01 BM 141 DI 8DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG, 6ES7 141-1BF40-0AB0, from product version 01 BM 142 DO 4DC 24V/2A, 6ES7 142-1BD11-0XB0, from product version 05 6ES7 142-1BD21-0XB0, from product version 01 6ES7 142-1BD22-0XB0, from product version 01 BM 143-DESINA FO, 6ES7 143-1BF00-0XB0, from product version 01 BM 143-DESINA RS485, 6ES7 143-1BF00-0AB0, from product version 01 BM 147/CPU, 6ES7 147-1AA00-0XB0, from product version 01 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 6ES7 141-1BF01-0XB0, from product version 05 6ES7 141-1BF11-0XB0, from product version 01 6ES7 141-1BF12-0XB0, from product version 01 7-39 Technical Specifications Features The EM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V DIAG expansion module with the order number 6ES7 141-1BF30-0XB0 has the following features: 7-40 8 digital inputs Rated input voltage of 24 VDC Suitable for switches and proximity switches (BEROs) Diagnostic interrupt for short circuit and wire break for each channel Hardware interrupt for rising and falling pulse edge for each channel Short type (110 mm) Parameterizable input delays ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications Pinout of the sockets for DI The following table shows the pinout of the four sockets used to connect the digital inputs. You can find the wiring of the connector in the ET 200X manual, Section 4.4.4. You can find the layout of the sockets in the ET 200X manual, Appendix C. Table 7-20 Pinout of socket X1 to X4 for digital inputs Pin Assignment of socket X1 Assignment of socket X2 1 Sensor supply output 1L+ 2 Input signal, channel 4 3 Chassis ground, power supply 4 Input signal, channel 0 5 PE Input signal, channel 5 Assignment of socket X3 Assignment of socket X4 Input signal, channel 6 Input signal, channel 7 Input signal, channel 2 Input signal, channel 3 Front view of socket 2 1 5 3 4 Input signal, channel 1 Covering up unused connections You must seal off any connections which are not required with M12 screw caps, in order to ensure that the degree of protection (IP 65, IP 66 or IP 67) is achieved. Basic circuit diagram The basic circuit diagram of the expansion module is show below. Supply voltage for electronic components and sensors via backplane bus 1L+ 1M Short-circuit protection So. X1 Figure 7-9 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Backplane bus interface Short-circuit protection So. X2 Short-circuit protection So. X3 Short-circuit protection Socket connections (see Table 7-20) So. X4 Basic circuit diagram for expansion module EM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V DIAG (6ES7 141-1BF30-0XB0) 7-41 Technical Specifications Parameters The following table summarizes the parameters that you can set for the expansion module. Table 7-21 Parameters of the EM 141 DI 8 DC 24V DIAG Range Parameters Default Area affected Input delay1 0.5 ms/ 3 ms/ 15 ms/ 20 ms 3 ms Module Diagnosis: short circuit to M Yes/no No Channel Diagnosis: wire break Yes/no No Channel Diagnostic interrupt Yes/no No Module Hardware interrupt Yes/no No Module Hardware interrupt on rising edge2 Yes/no No Channel Hardware interrupt on falling edge2 Yes/no No Channel 1 2 The input delay applies at "0" to "1" and at "1" to "0". These parameters can only be set if you enable the hardware interrupt parameter. 7-42 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications Technical data Dimensions and weight Dimensions W H D (mm) 87 110 55 Weight Approx. 250 g Sensor supply outputs Outputs Output current* 4 Up to 40 C max. 0.5A; Up to 55 C max. 0.4A Aggregate current Up to 40 C max. 0.9A; Up to 55 C max. 0.7A Short-circuit protection Yes, electronic Module-specific data Number of inputs 8 Cable length Unshielded Max. 30 m Voltages, currents, potentials Maximum number of inputs driven simultaneously All installed positions max. 55 C 8 Electrical isolation No Sensor selection data Permissible potential difference Between different 75 VDC, 60 VAC 500 VDC Power input From backplane bus Rated value With signal "1" With signal "0" 24 VDC 13 to 30 V - 3 to 5 V Input current circuits Insulation tested with Input voltage With signal "1" Typ. 10 mA Input delay (parameterizable) At "0" to "1" and at "1" to "0" Max. 30 mA Typ. 0.5 ms Typ. 3 ms Typ. 15 ms (1L+) Typ. 20 ms Power loss of module Typ. 1.5 W Status, alarms, diagnostics Status display Green LED per channel Alarms Hardware interrupt Diagnostic interrupt Hardware interrupt Diagnostic interrupt Configurable Diagnostic functions Configurable Group error Channel error display Reading diagnostic Red LED (SF) Configurable Input characteristic To IEC 61131, Type 2 Connection of two-wire BEROs Possible Permissible Max. 1.5 mA ** closed-circuit current * Please note the total current per ET 200X. ** The required closed-circuit current for wire break detection is 0.6 mA < I < 1.5 mA Red LED per channel Possible information ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 7-43 Technical Specifications 7.10 EM 141 DI 8 DC 24V expansion module (6ES7 141-1BF41-0XA0) Features The EM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V expansion module with the order number 6ES7 141-1BF41-0XA0 has the following features: 8 digital inputs Rated input voltage of 24 VDC Suitable for switches and proximity switches (BEROs) Pinout of the sockets for DI The following table shows the pinout of the eight sockets used to connect the digital inputs. The connector wiring is described in Section 4.4.4. You can find the layout of the sockets in Appendix C. Table 7-22 Pinout of socket X1 to X8 for digital inputs Pin Assignment of socket X1 Assignment of socket X2 1 Sensor supply output 1L+ 2 not assigned 3 Chassis ground, power supply 4 Input signal, channel 0 5 PE Pin Assignment of socket X5 Input signal, channel 1 Assignment of socket X6 1 Sensor supply output L+ 2 not assigned 3 Chassis ground, power supply 4 Input signal, channel 4 5 PE Input signal, channel 5 Assignment of socket X3 Assignment of socket X4 Front view of socket 2 Input signal, channel 2 Assignment of socket X7 Input signal, channel 6 Input signal, channel 3 1 5 3 4 Assignment of socket X8 Input signal, channel 7 Covering up unused connections You must seal off any connections which are not required with M12 screw caps, in order to ensure that the degree of protection (IP 65, IP 66 or IP 67) is achieved. 7-44 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications Basic circuit diagram The basic circuit diagram of the expansion module is show below. Supply voltage for electronic components and sensors via backplane bus 1L+ Backplane bus interface 1M Short-circuit protection Socket connections (see Table 7-22) So. X1 So. X2 So. X3 Figure 7-10 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 So. X8 Basic circuit diagram of expansion module EM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V (6ES7 141-1BF41-0XA0) 7-45 Technical Specifications Dimensions and weight Status, alarms, diagnostics Dimensions W H D (mm) 87 180 Status display Green LED per channel Weight Approx. 350 g Alarms None Module-specific data Number of inputs Sensor supply outputs 8 Outputs Output current* Cable length Unshielded Max. 30 m Short-circuit protection Voltages, currents, potentials Sensor selection data Maximum number of inputs driven simultaneously All installed positions max. 55 C 8 Electrical isolation No Input voltage Rated value With signal "1" With signal "0" Typ. 7 mA Input delay 1.2 to 4.8 ms 500 VDC From "0" to "1" From "1" to "0" Input characteristic To IEC 61131, Type 1 Connection of two-wire BEROs Possible Max. 10 mA (1L+) Power loss of module - 3 to 5 V 75 VDC, 60 VAC Power input From backplane bus 13 to 30 V With signal "1" circuits Insulation tested with 24 VDC Input current Permissible potential difference Between different 8 Up to 40 C max. 1A; Up to 55 C max. 0.8A Yes, electronic Typ. 1.5 W 1.2 to 4.8 ms Max. 1.5 mA Permissible closed-circuit current * 7-46 Please note the total current per ET 200X. ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications 7.11 EM 141 DI 8 DC 24V DIAG expansion module (6ES7 141-1BF40-0XB0) Hardware The expansion module can be used together with the following basic modules: BM 141 DI 8DC 24V, BM 141 DI 8DC 24V ECOFAST, 6ES7 141-1BF00-0AB0, from product version 01 6ES7 141-1BF01-0AB0, from product version 01 BM 141 DI 8DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG, 6ES7 141-1BF40-0AB0, from product version 01 BM 142 DO 4DC 24V/2A, 6ES7 142-1BD11-0XB0, from product version 05 6ES7 142-1BD21-0XB0, from product version 01 6ES7 142-1BD22-0XB0, from product version 01 BM 143-DESINA FO, 6ES7 143-1BF00-0XB0, from product version 01 BM 143-DESINA RS485, 6ES7 143-1BF00-0AB0, from product version 01 BM 147/CPU, 6ES7 147-1AA00-0XB0, from product version 01 6ES7 141-1BF01-0XB0, from product version 05 6ES7 141-1BF11-0XB0, from product version 01 6ES7 141-1BF12-0XB0, from product version 01 Features The EM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V DIAG expansion module with the order number 6ES7 141-1BF40-0XB0 has the following features: 8 digital inputs Rated input voltage of 24 VDC Suitable for switches and proximity switches (BEROs) Diagnostic interrupt for short circuit and wire break for each channel Hardware interrupt for rising and falling pulse edge for each channel Long type (180 mm) Parameterizable input delays Pinout of the sockets for DI The following table shows the pinout of the eight sockets used to connect the digital inputs. You can find the wiring of the connector in the ET 200X manual, Section 4.4.4. You can find the layout of the sockets in the ET 200X manual, Appendix C. ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 7-47 Technical Specifications Table 7-23 Pinout of sockets X1 to X8 for digital inputs Pin Assignment of socket X1 Assignment of socket X2 1 Sensor supply output 1L+ 2 not assigned 3 Chassis ground, power supply 4 Input signal, channel 0 5 PE Pin Assignment of socket X5 Input signal, channel 2 Assignment of socket X6 Sensor supply output 1L+ 2 not assigned 3 Chassis ground, power supply 4 Input signal, channel 4 5 PE Assignment of socket X4 Front view of socket 2 Input signal, channel 1 1 Assignment of socket X3 Input signal, channel 5 Assignment of socket X7 Input signal, channel 6 1 Input signal, channel 3 5 3 4 Assignment of socket X8 Input signal, channel 7 Covering up unused connections You must seal off any connections which are not required with M12 screw caps, in order to ensure that the degree of protection (IP 65, IP 66 or IP 67) is achieved. Basic circuit diagram The basic circuit diagram of the expansion module is show below. Supply voltage for electronic components and sensors via backplane bus 1L+ Backplane bus interface 1M Socket connections (see Table 7-22) Short-circuit protection So. X1 Figure 7-11 7-48 Short-circuit protection So. X2 Short-circuit protection So. X3 Short-circuit protection So. X8 Basic circuit diagram of expansion module EM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V DIAG (6ES7 141-1BF40-0XB0) ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications Parameters The following table summarizes the parameters that you can set for the expansion module. Table 7-24 Parameters of the EM 141 DI 8 DC 24V DIAG Range Parameters Default Area affected Input delay1 0.5 ms/ 3 ms/ 15 ms/ 20 ms 3 ms Module Diagnosis: short circuit to M Yes/no No Channel Diagnosis: wire break Yes/no No Channel Diagnostic interrupt Yes/no No Module Hardware interrupt Yes/no No Module Hardware interrupt on rising edge2 Yes/no No Channel Hardware interrupt on falling edge2 Yes/no No Channel 1 2 The input delay applies at "0" to "1" and at "1" to "0". These parameters can only be set if you enable the hardware interrupt parameter. ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 7-49 Technical Specifications Technical data Dimensions and weight Dimensions W H D (mm) 87 180 55 Weight Approx. 350 g Sensor supply outputs Outputs Output current* 8 Up to 40 C max. 0.5A; Up to 55 C max. 0.4A Aggregate current Up to 40 C max. 1A; Up to 55 C max. 0.8A Short-circuit protection Yes, electronic Module-specific data Number of inputs 8 Cable length Unshielded Max. 30 m Voltages, currents, potentials Sensor selection data Maximum number of inputs driven simultaneously All installed positions max. 55 C 8 Electrical isolation No Input voltage 13 to 30 V - 3 to 5 V With signal "1" 75 VDC, 60 VAC circuits Insulation tested with 24 VDC Input current Permissible potential difference Between different Rated value With signal "1" With signal "0" 500 VDC Typ. 10 mA Input delay (parameterizable) At "0" to "1" and at "1" to "0" Power input From backplane bus Typ. 1.5 W Status, alarms, diagnostics Status display Alarms Green LED per channel Hardware interrupt Diagnostic interrupt Hardware interrupt Diagnostic interrupt Configurable Diagnostic functions Configurable Group error Channel error display Reading diagnostic Red LED (SF) Typ. 3 ms Typ. 15 ms Max. 30 mA Typ. 20 ms (1L+) Power loss of module Typ. 0.5 ms Input characteristic To IEC 61131, Type 2 Connection of two-wire BEROs Possible Permissible Max. 1.5 mA ** closed-circuit current * Please note the total current per ET 200X. ** The required closed-circuit current for wire break detection is 0.6 mA < I < 1.5 mA Configurable red LED per channel Possible information 7-50 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications 7.12 EM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/0.5A expansion module (6ES7 142-1BD30-0XA0) Features The EM 142 DO 4 DC 24V/0.5A expansion module; order number 6ES7 142-1BD30-0XA0 has the following features: 4 digital outputs Output current 0.5 A per output Rated load voltage 24 VDC Suitable for solenoids, DC contactors and indicator lights Pinout of the sockets for DO The following table shows the pinout of the four sockets used to connect the digital outputs. You can find the layout of the sockets in Appendix C. The connector wiring is described in Section 4.4.3. Table 7-25 Pinout of the sockets for 4-channel digital outputs Pin * Assignment of Assignment of Assignment of Assignment of socket X1 socket X2 socket X3 socket X4 1 - 2 Output signal, channel 1* - 3 Chassis ground, load power supply 4 Output signal, channel 0 5 PE Output signal, channel 1* Output signal, channel 3* Front view of socket (Front) - 2 1 Output signal, channel 2 Output signal, channel 3* 5 3 4 Note: Channel 1 and channel 3 are only allowed to be used at one socket (X1/X2 or X3/X4). ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 7-51 Technical Specifications Basic circuit diagram The basic circuit diagram of the expansion module is shown below. 2M Load power supply via backplane bus 2L+ Backplane bus interface 2M Socket connections (see Table 7-30) Figure 7-12 Basic circuit diagram of expansion module EM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/0.5A Covering up unused connections You must seal off any connections which are not required with M12 screw caps, in order to ensure that the degree of protection (IP 65, IP 66 or IP 67) is achieved. 7-52 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications Dimensions and weight Status, alarms, diagnostics Dimensions W H D (mm) 87 110 55 Status display Green LED per channel Weight Approx. 250 g Alarms None Module-specific data Number of outputs 4 Cable length Unshielded Max. 30 m Voltages, currents, potentials Aggregate current of outputs All installation positions Max. 2 A To 55 C Electrical isolation Between backplane bus Yes and all other circuit components Between channels No Output voltage With signal "1" Output current 75 VDC, 60 VAC Min. of 2L+ (-0.8 V) With signal "1" Rated value 0.5 A Permissible range 5 mA to 0.6 A With signal "0" (residual Max. 0.1 mA current) Load resistance range 48 W to 4 kW Lamp load Max. 5 W Parallel connection of two outputs For redundant control of Possible load Permissible potential difference Between different Actuator selection data For performance (outputs in same group only) Not possible improvement circuits Driving a digital input Insulation tested with Possible 500 VDC Switching frequency Power input From backplane bus Max. 28.5 mA (1L+) From load voltage 2L+ ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Max. 100 Hz Max. 0.5 Hz IEC 947-5-1, DC13 Max. 6 mA (without load) Power loss of module Resistive load Inductive load to Typ. 1.2 W Lamp load Max. 1 Hz Limitation (internal) of voltage induced on circuit interruption Typ. 2L+ (- 47 V) Short-circuit protection for output Yes, electronic Response threshold Typ. 1 A 7-53 Technical Specifications 7.13 EM 142 DO 4 DC 24V/2A expansion module (6ES7 142-1BD40-0XA0) Features The EM 142 DO 4 DC 24V/2A expansion module; order number 6ES7 142-1BD40-0XA0 has the following features: 4 digital outputs Output current 2 A per output Rated load voltage 24 VDC Suitable for solenoids, DC contactors and indicator lights Pinout of the sockets for DO The following table shows the pinout of the four sockets used to connect the digital outputs. You can find the layout of the sockets in Appendix C The connector wiring is described in Section 4.4.3. Table 7-26 Pinout of the sockets for 4-channel digital outputs Pin * Assignment of Assignment of Assignment of Assignment of socket X1 socket X2 socket X3 socket X4 1 - 2 Output signal, channel 1* - 3 Chassis ground, load power supply 4 Output signal, channel 0 5 PE Output signal, channel 1* Output signal, channel 3* Front view of socket (Front) - 2 1 Output signal, channel 2 Output signal, channel 3* 5 3 4 Note: Channel 1 and channel 3 are only allowed to be used at one socket (X1/X2 or X3/X4). 7-54 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications Basic circuit diagram The basic circuit diagram of the expansion module is shown below. 2M Load power supply via backplane bus 2L+ Backplane bus interface 2M Socket connections (see Table 7-26) Figure 7-13 Basic circuit diagram of expansion module EM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A Covering up unused connections You must seal off any connections which are not required with M12 screw caps, in order to ensure that the degree of protection (IP 65, IP 66 or IP 67) is achieved. ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 7-55 Technical Specifications Dimensions and weight Status, alarms, diagnostics Dimensions W H D (mm) 87 110 55 Status display Green LED per channel Weight Approx. 250 g Alarms None Module-specific data Number of outputs 4 Cable length Unshielded Max. 30 m Voltages, currents, potentials Aggregate current of outputs Actuator selection data Output voltage With signal "1" Output current Min. of 2L+ (-0.8 V) With signal "1" Rated value 2A Permissible range 5 mA to 2.4 A With signal "0" (residual All installation positions Max. 0.5 mA current) To 20 C Max. 6 A To 55 C Max. 4 A Load resistance range 12 W to 4 kW Lamp load Max. 10 W Electrical isolation Between backplane bus Yes and all other circuit components Between channels For redundant control of Possible No 75 VDC, 60 VAC 500 VDC Power input From backplane bus Max. 28.5 mA (1L+) From load voltage 2L+ Max. 12 mA (without load) Power loss of module 7-56 (outputs in same group only) Not possible improvement circuits Insulation tested with load For performance Permissible potential difference Between different Parallel connection of two outputs Typ. 2.1 W Driving a digital input Possible Switching frequency Resistive load Inductive load to Max. 100 Hz Max. 0.5 Hz IEC 947-5-1, DC13 Lamp load Max. 1 Hz Limitation (internal) of voltage induced on circuit interruption Typ. 2L+ (- 47 V) Short-circuit protection for output Yes, electronic Response threshold Typ. 3 A ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications 7.14 EM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A expansion module (6ES7 142-1BD40-0XB0) Hardware The expansion module can be used together with the following basic modules: BM 141 DI 8DC 24V, BM 141 DI 8DC 24V ECOFAST, 6ES7 141-1BF00-0AB0, from product version 01 6ES7 141-1BF01-0AB0, from product version 01 BM 141 DI 8DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG, 6ES7 141-1BF40-0AB0, from product version 01 BM 142 DO 4DC 24V/2A, 6ES7 142-1BD11-0XB0, from product version 05 6ES7 142-1BD21-0XB0, from product version 01 6ES7 142-1BD22-0XB0, from product version 01 BM 143-DESINA FO, 6ES7 143-1BF00-0XB0, from product version 01 BM 143-DESINA RS485, 6ES7 143-1BF00-0AB0, from product version 01 BM 147/CPU, 6ES7 147-1AA00-0XB0, from product version 01 6ES7 141-1BF01-0XB0, from product version 05 6ES7 141-1BF11-0XB0, from product version 01 6ES7 141-1BF12-0XB0, from product version 01 Features The EM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A expansion module, order number 6ES7 142-1BD40-0XB0, has the following features: 4 digital outputs Output current 2 A per output Rated load voltage 24 VDC Suitable for solenoids, DC contactors and indicator lights Parameterizable diagnostic interrupt Parameterizable diagnostics Parameterizable substitute value output SF LED ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 7-57 Technical Specifications Pinout of the sockets for DO The following table shows the pinout of the four sockets used to connect the digital outputs. You can find the layout of the sockets in Appendix C. The connector wiring is described in Section 4.4.4. Table 7-27 Pinout of the sockets for 4-channel digital outputs Pin * Assignment of Assignment of Assignment of Assignment of socket X1 socket X2 socket X3 socket X4 1 - 2 Output signal, channel 1* - Output signal, channel 3* 3 Chassis ground, load power supply 4 Output signal, channel 0 5 PE Output signal, channel 1* Front view of socket (Front) - 2 1 Output signal, channel 2 Output signal, channel 3* 5 3 4 Note: Channel 1 and channel 3 are only allowed to be used at one socket (X1/X2 or X3/X4). Basic circuit diagram The basic circuit diagram of the expansion module is shown below. 2M Load power supply via backplane bus 2L+ Backplane bus interface 2M SF Socket connections (see Table 7-27) Figure 7-14 Basic circuit diagram of expansion module EM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A Covering up unused connections You must seal off any connections which are not required with M12 screw caps, in order to ensure that the degree of protection (IP 65, IP 66 or IP 67) is achieved. 7-58 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications Parameters The following table summarizes the parameters that you can set for the expansion module. In Section 5.4 you will find the parameterizable diagnostics and in Section 5.5 you will find an in-depth description of diagnostic and hardware interrupt handling. You can find the layout of the parameter assignment frame and the assignment of the bits including the parameters of the digital outputs in the configuration and parameter assignment frame for the ET 200X at http://www.ad.siemens.de/simatic-cs. Table 7-28 Parameters of the EM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A Range Parameters Default Enable Diagnostic interrupt Area affected Expansion module Yes/no No Wire break Short-circuit to M Short-circuit to L+ Yes/no No Yes/no No Yes/no No Behavior upon CPU STOP Set substitute value/ maintain last value/no current or voltage No current or voltage Channel Substitute value* 0/1 0 Channel Diagnosis * Channel Substitute values are current or voltage values that are output upon STOP of the master CPU by the expansion module to the process. ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 7-59 Technical Specifications Effect of the supply voltage and the operating mode The output values of the module are dependent on the supply voltage for the electronics/sensors and on the operating status of the PLC (CPU of the DP master). Table 7-29 Dependencies of digital output values on the operating status of the PLC (CPU of DP master) and L + supply voltage Operating mode of the PLC (CPU of the DP master) Power on RUN Power on STOP Power off - Supply voltage L + to ET 200X Output value of expansion module L + applied PLC value L + not applied 0V L + applied Substitute value/last value (default:0 V) L + not applied 0V L + applied After current operation: substitute value/last value (default: 0 V) Upon commissioning the DP slave: 0 V L + not applied 0V Supply voltage on/off A failure of the supply voltage to the electronics/sensors on the ET 200X is always displayed by the "ON" LED on the basic module and also entered in the diagnostic data area of the basic module. 7-60 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications Dimensions and weight Status, alarms, diagnostics Dimensions W H D (mm) 87 110 55 Status display Green LED per channel Weight Approx. 250 g Alarms Diagnostic interrupt Diagnostic functions Configurable Group error Red LED (SF) Module-specific data Number of outputs 4 Actuator selection data Cable length Unshielded Max. 30 m Voltages, currents, potentials Aggregate current of outputs To 20 C Max. 6 A To 55 C Max. 4 A Electrical isolation Between backplane bus Yes and all other circuit components No circuits Min. of 2L+ (-0.8 V) Rated value 2A Permissible range 6 mA to 2.4 A With signal "0" (residual Max. 0.5 mA current) Load resistance range 12 W to 4 kW Lamp load Max. 10 W Parallel connection of two outputs For redundant control of Possible Permissible potential difference Between different With signal "1" Output current With signal "1" All installation positions Between channels Output voltage load 75 VDC, 60 VAC For performance (outputs in same group only) Not possible improvement Insulation tested with 500 VDC Driving a digital input Power input From backplane bus Max. 40 mA (1L+) From load voltage 2L+ Max. 60 mA (without load) Possible at minimum current of 6 mA Switching frequency Resistive load Inductive load to Max. 100 Hz Max. 0.5 Hz IEC 947-5-1, DC13 Power loss of module ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Typ. 2.5 W Lamp load Max. 1 Hz Limitation (internal) of voltage induced on circuit interruption Typ. 2L+ (- 53 V) Short-circuit protection for output Yes, electronic Response threshold Typ. 3.5 A 7-61 Technical Specifications 7.15 EM 142 DO 8 x DC 24V/1.2A expansion module (6ES7 142-1BF30-0XA0) Features The expansion module EM 142 DO 8 x DC 24V/1.2A; order number 6ES7 142-1BF30-0XA0, has the following features: 8 digital outputs Output current 1.2 A per output Rated load voltage 24 VDC Suitable for solenoids, DC contactors and indicator lights Pinout of the sockets for DO The following table shows the pinout of the four sockets used to connect the digital outputs. You can find the layout of the sockets in Appendix C. The connector wiring is described in Section 4.4.4. Table 7-30 Pin assignment of sockets for 8-channel digital outputs Pin Assignment of Assignment of Assignment of Assignment of socket X1 socket X2 socket X3 socket X4 1 not assigned 2 not assigned 3 Chassis ground, load power supply 4 Output signal, channel 0 5 PE Pin Output signal, channel 1 2 Output signal, channel 2 Output signal, channel 3 1 5 3 4 Assignment of Assignment of Assignment of Assignment of socket X5 socket X6 socket X7 socket X8 1 not assigned 2 not assigned 3 Chassis ground, load power supply 4 Output signal, channel 4 5 PE 7-62 Front view of socket (Front) Output signal, channel 5 Output signal, channel 6 Output signal, channel 7 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications Basic circuit diagram The following Figure shows the basic circuit diagram for the expansion module. 2M Load power supply via backplane bus 2L+ Backplane bus interface 2M Socket connections (see Table 7-30) Figure 7-15 Basic circuit diagram for expansion module EM 142 DO 8 x DC 24V/1.2A Covering up unused connections You must seal off any connections which are not required with M12 screw caps, in order to ensure that the degree of protection (IP 65, IP 66 or IP 67) is achieved. ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 7-63 Technical Specifications Dimensions and weight Status, alarms, diagnostics Dimensions W H D (mm) 87 180 55 Status display Green LED per channel Weight Approx. 350 g Alarms None Module-specific data Number of outputs 8 Cable length Unshielded Max. 30 m Voltages, currents, potentials Aggregate current of outputs max. 7 A max. 5 A Between backplane bus Yes and all other circuit components circuits Insulation tested with 75 VDC, 60 VAC 500 VDC 7-64 1.2 A Permissible range 5 mA to 13 A Max. 0.5 mA Load resistance range 21 W to 4 kW Lamp load Max. 10 W Parallel connection of two outputs load (outputs in same group only) Not possible Driving a digital input Possible Switching frequency Max. 35 mA Resistive load Inductive load to Max. 12 mA Lamp load Max. 1 Hz Limitation (internal) of voltage induced on circuit interruption Typ. 2L+ (- 47 V) Short-circuit protection for output Yes, electronic Response threshold Typ. 1.8 A (without load) Power loss of module Rated value improvement (1L+) From load voltage 2L+ With signal "1" For performance Power input From backplane bus min. 2L+ (-1.2 V) For redundant control of Possible No Permissible potential difference Between different With signal "1" Output current current) Electrical isolation Between channels Output voltage With signal "0" (residual All installation positions to 20 C to 50 C Actuator selection data Typ. 1.5 W Max. 100 Hz Max. 0.5 Hz IEC 947-5-1, DC13 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications 7.16 EM 143-DESINA expansion module (6ES7 143-1BF30-0XB0) Features The EM 143-DESINA expansion module (order number 6ES7 143-1BF30-0XB0) has the following features: 8 digital inputs or outputs (individually parameterizable as input or output) plus 8 diagnostic inputs or inputs with NC functionality (individually parameterizable). Rated input voltage of 24 VDC Digital inputs are suitable for switches and proximity switches (BERO switches) Digital outputs are suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors and indicator lights Pinout of the sockets for DI/DO The tables below show the pinouts of the 8 sockets for connecting digital inputs and outputs. The connector wiring is described in Section 4.4.4. The arrangement of sockets X1 to X8 on the module in Appendix C. Table 7-31 Pinout of sockets X1, X3, X5 and X7 for digital inputs or outputs Pin * Assignment of socket X1 Assignment of socket X3 Assignment of socket X5 1 Non-switched supply voltage DC 24V-NS 2 Diagnostics input or input with NC functionality Diagnostics input or input with NC functionality 3 Chassis ground, power supply 4* Digital input or output (DESINA) channel 0 5 not assigned Digital input or output (DESINA) channel 2 Diagnostics input or input with NC functionality Assignment of socket X7 Front view of socket (Front view) Diagnostics input or input with NC functionality 2 1 Digital input or output (DESINA) channel 4 Digital input or output (DESINA) channel 6 5 3 4 If it is parameterized as a digital output, pin 4 is fed by the DC 24V-S switched supply voltage. ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 7-65 Technical Specifications Table 7-32 Pinout of sockets X2, X4, X6 and X8 for digital inputs or outputs Pin * Assignment of socket X2 Assignment of socket X4 Assignment of socket X6 1 Non-switched supply voltage DC 24V-NS 2 Diagnostics input or input with NC functionality 3 Chassis ground, power supply 4* Digital input or output (DESINA) channel 1 5 not assigned Diagnostics input or input with NC functionality Digital input or output (DESINA) channel 3 Diagnostics input or input with NC functionality Assignment of socket X8 Front view of socket (Front view) Diagnostics input or input with NC functionality 2 1 Digital input or output (DESINA) channel 5 Digital input or output (DESINA) channel 7 5 3 4 If it is parameterized as a digital output, pin 4 is fed by the DC 24V-NS non-switched supply voltage. Covering up unused connections You must seal off any connections which are not required with M12 screw caps, in order to ensure that the degree of protection (IP 65, IP 66 or IP 67) is achieved. Basic circuit diagram The basic circuit diagram of the expansion module is shown below. Supply voltage for electronic components and sensors via backplane bus Backplane bus interface DC 24 V-NS DC 24V-S (for digital outputs only) Parameterizable digital inputs and outputs X1 X3 X5 X7 X2 X4 X6 X8 Figure 7-16 7-66 Basic circuit diagram of expansion module EM 143-DESINA ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications Parameters The following table summarizes the parameters that you can set for the expansion module. Table 7-33 Parameters of the EM 143-DESINA for digital inputs and outputs Range Parameters Channel type for I/On (n= 0...7) Digital input/ digital output Default Digital output (Channel K0, K2, K4, K6) Area affected Channel Digital input (Channel K1, K3, K5, K7) Functional input In (n=8...15) Diagnostic input/ Diagnostic input Channel Output No current or voltage Channel diagnostic input with diagnostic frame/ Input with NC function Response to CPU/master STOP Output No current or voltage hold last value/ Apply substitute value/ Substitute value On (n=0...7) 0/1 0 Channel Diagnostic interrupt Yes/no No Module ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 7-67 Technical Specifications Dimensions and weight Status, alarms, diagnostics Dimensions W H D (mm) 87 180 55 Status display Yellow LED per channel Weight Approx. 350 g Indicator for functional input Yellow/red LED per channel Alarms Diagnostic interrupt Diagnostic functions Configurable Reading diagnostic Possible Module-specific data Number of channels 8 digital inputs and outputs 8 functional inputs (diagnostics inputs or inputs with NC functionality) Sensor supply outputs Outputs Output current Cable length Unshielded information 8 Up to 40 C max. 1 A; Up to 55 C max. 0.8 A Yes, electronic Max. 30 m Voltages, currents, potentials Maximum number of inputs driven simultaneously All installed positions Short-circuit protection Sensor selection data 8 max. 55 C Aggregate current of outputs All installation positions Input voltage for parameterized DI (pin 4) Rated value With signal "1" With signal "0" 24 VDC 13 to 30 V -30 to 5V To 20 C Max. 10 A To 50 C Max. 6 A Input voltage for functional input (pin 2) No Rated value With signal "1" With signal "0" Electrical isolation Between channels and backplane bus Between channels Between load voltages Between load voltage No With signal "1" No Input delay Permissible potential difference Between different circuits 75 VDC, 60 VAC Insulation tested with 500 VDC Power loss of module Typ. 1.5 W 13 to 30 V -30 to 2 V Input current No and all other circuitry 24 VDC Typ. 5 mA From "0" to "1" From "1" to "0" 1.2 to 4.8 ms Input characteristic To IEC 61131, Type 2 Connection of two-wire BEROs Possible Permissible Max. 1.5 mA 1.2 to 4.8 ms closed-circuit current 7-68 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications Actuator selection data Output voltage With signal "1" Output current Driving a digital input Possible Switching frequency Min. NS/S (- 0.8 V) With signal "1" Resistive load Inductive load to Max. 100 Hz Max. 2 Hz IEC 947-5-1, DC13 Nominal value Permissible range 1.2 A 7 mA to 1.3 A Lamp load Max. 1 Hz With signal "0" (residual Max. 0.5 mA Limitation (internal) of voltage induced on circuit interruption Typ. NS/S (- 47 V) current) Load resistance range 21 ohms to 4 kohms Max. 10 W Output short-circuit protection Yes, electronic Lamp load Parallel connection of two outputs No Response threshold Typ. 1.8 A ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 7-69 Technical Specifications 7.17 EM 148-P DI 4 DC 24V/DO 2 P expansion module (pneumatic module) (6ES7 148-1DA00-0XA0) Features The EM 148-P DI 4 x DC 24V/DO 2 x P expansion module, order number 6ES7 148-1DA00-0XA0, has the following features: 4 digital inputs Rated input voltage of 24 VDC Suitable for switches and proximity switches (BEROs) 2 digital outputs with 2 integrated 4/2-way valves Permissible pressure range of 3 to 8 bars Pinout of the sockets for DI The following table shows the pinout of the two sockets used to connect the digital inputs. The connector wiring is described in Section 4.4.4. You can find the layout of the sockets in Appendix C. Table 7-34 Pinout of the sockets for 2-channel digital inputs (pneumatic module) Pin Assignment of socket X1 1 Sensor supply output 1L+ 2 Input signal, channel 1 3 Chassis ground, power supply 4 Input signal, channel 0 5 PE Assignment of socket X2 Front view of socket Input signal, channel 3 2 1 Input signal, channel 2 5 3 4 Covering up unused connections You must seal off any connections which are not required with M12 screw caps, in order to ensure that the degree of protection (IP 65) is achieved. Switch-on sequence The 4/2-way valve is not of the contention-free type. Consequently, it is important to switch on the compressed air supply first, and then switch on the voltage. 7-70 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications Basic circuit diagram The basic circuit diagram of the expansion module is shown below. Supply voltage for electronic components and sensors via backplane bus 1L+ Backplane bus interface 1M Socket connections (see Table 7-34) So. X2 So. X1 1M Load power supply via backplane bus 2L+ 2M 1M Figure 7-17 Basic circuit diagram for EM 148-P DI 4 x DC 24V/DO 2 x P expansion module Pneumatic connection diagram The pneumatic connection diagram of a 4/2-way valve is shown below. 4 2 1 3/5 14 Figure 7-18 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Pneumatic connection diagram of a 4/2-way valve 7-71 Technical Specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W H D (mm) 87 173 88 Weight Approx. 500 g Sensor supply outputs Outputs Output current* 2 Up to 40 C max. 0.9A; Up to 55 C max. 0.7A Yes, electronic Module-specific data Number of inputs 4 (electrical) Number of outputs 4 (pneumatic) Short-circuit protection Sensor selection data Input voltage Length of cable (inputs) Unshielded Rated value With signal "1" With signal "0" Max. 30 m Voltages, currents, potentials Maximum number of inputs driven simultaneously All installation positions 24 VDC 13 to 30 V - 3 to 5 V Input current With signal "1" 4 Typ. 7 mA Input delay To 55 C From "0" to "1" From "1" to "0" 1.2 to 4.8 ms 75 VDC, 60 VAC Input characteristic To IEC 61131, Type 2 500 VDC Connection of two-wire BEROs Possible Permissible Max. 1.5 mA Permissible potential difference Between different 1.2 to 4.8 ms circuits Insulation tested with Power input From backplane bus Max. 40 mA closed-circuit current (1L+) From 2L+ load voltage Valve outlets Max. 130 mA (incl. valves) Power loss of module Status, alarms, diagnostics Status display Alarms Medium Compressed air (for properties refer to paragraph below) Pressure range 3 to 8 bars Rated flow 300 l/min Typ. 3 W Green LED per channel Green LED per valve Valve switching times None * On, change Off 20 ms 20 ms Current input per valve 50 mA Please note the total current per ET 200X. Compressed air for valve outlets You should operate the valves with filtered (40 mm), dried and oil-free compressed air of Class 5 4 3 in accordance with ISO 8573-1. Operation with filtered, dried and oiled compressed air of Class 5 4 5 is similarly possible. For this purpose, use an oil that is included on FESTO's list of proposed oils: 7-72 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications Table 7-35 Suitable types of oil for compressed air Suitable oils FESTO OFSW-32 Special Oil ARAL Vitam GF 32 Features DIN 51 524, Part 2 hydraulic oil, viscosity 32 mm2/s at 40 C (HLP 32) Esso Nuto H 32 Mobil DTE 24 BP Energol HLP-HM 32 Example of retrieving the 2 limits of travel of a pneumatic cylinder In the table below you will find an excerpt from a STEP 7 user program for retrieving the two limits of travel of a pneumatic cylinder. Assumptions The following assumptions apply to this STEP 7 user program: In the example the pneumatic module is inserted directly adjacent to the basic module. Its address is therefore 0. The pneumatic cylinder is controlled by means of a valve on the pneumatic module. The inputs I 0.0 "cylinder down" and I 0.1 "cylinder up" are used for the pneumatic cylinder limits of travel. The pneumatic cylinder is controlled by means of output O 0.0. STEP 7 user program STL U U S U U R Description I M O I M O 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.1 0.1 0.0 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 When cylinder at limit of travel "down" and instruction "cylinder up" queued the output is set, i.e. cylinder moves upwards When cylinder at limit of travel "up" and instruction "cylinder down" queued the output is reset, i.e. cylinder moves downwards 7-73 Technical Specifications 7.18 EM 148-P DO 16 P/CPV10 expansion module (pneumatic interface module for CPV10) (6ES7 148-1EH00-0XA0) Installation next to motor starter (EM 300...) You can install the expansion module immediately next to a motor starter, product version 02. Features The EM 148-P DO 16 x P/CPV10 expansion module, order number 6ES7 148-1EH00-0XA0, has the following features: 16 digital outputs Rated load voltage 24 VDC Suitable for connecting a FESTO CPV10 valve island with up to 16 valves Basic circuit diagram The basic circuit diagram of the expansion module is shown below. 1M Load power supply via backplane bus 2L+ Backplane bus interface 2M DO1 1M DO2 DO16 Figure 7-19 7-74 Basic circuit diagram of the EM 148-P DO 16 x P/CPV10 expansion module ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications Assigning addresses to the pneumatic interface module for the CPV10 The figure below shows the pneumatic interface module with FESTO CPV10 valve island and addresses. 0.1 0.0 0.3 0.2 0.3 0.2 0.5 0.4 0.5 0.4 0.7 0.6 0.7 0.6 1.1 1.0 1.1 1.0 1.3 1.2 1.3 1.2 1.5 1.4 1.5 1.4 1.7 1.6 1.7 1.6 0.1 0.0 LEDs Figure 7-20 Assigning addresses to the pneumatic interface module Dimensions and weight Status, alarms, diagnostics Dimensions W H D (mm) 147 152 55 Status display Green LED per digital output Weight Approx. 450 g Alarms None Module-specific data Number of outputs Valve island for connection meets following conditions* 16 Voltages, currents, potentials Medium Compressed air filtered (40 mm) Oiled (oil: VG 32) Unoiled/vacuum Pressure range 3 to 8 bars 400 l/min Electrical isolation Between extension Yes, optocouplers interface and channels Between channels No Rated flow In groups of 16 Valve switching times Insulation tested with 500 VDC On, change Off 17 ms 25 ms Max. 35 mA Current input per valve 20 mA Power input From backplane bus (1L+) From 2L+ load voltage Max. 320 mA (incl. CPV10 valves) Power loss of module (incl. valves) ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 * Further details on valve islands will be found in the FESTO documentation on valve islands. Typ. 6 W 7-75 Technical Specifications 7.19 EM 148-P DO 16 P/CPV14 expansion module (pneumatic interface module for CPV14) (6ES7 148-1EH10-0XA0) Installation next to motor starter (EM 300...) You can install the expansion module immediately next to a motor starter, product version 02. Features The EM 148-P DO 16 x P/CPV14 expansion module, order number 6ES7 148-1EH10-0XA0, has the following features: 16 digital outputs Rated load voltage 24 VDC Suitable for connecting a FESTO CPV14 valve island with up to 16 valves Basic circuit diagram The basic circuit diagram of the expansion module is shown below. 1M Backplane bus interface Load power supply via backplane bus 2L+ 2M DO1 1M DO2 DO16 Figure 7-21 7-76 Basic circuit diagram for EM 148-P DO 16 x P/CPV14 expansion module ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications Address assignment for pneumatic interface module for CPV14 The figure below shows the pneumatic interface module with FESTO CPV 14 valve island and addresses. 0.1 0.0 0.3 0.2 0.3 0.2 0.5 0.4 0.5 0.4 0.7 0.6 0.7 0.6 1.1 1.0 1.1 1.0 1.3 1.2 1.3 1.2 1.5 1.4 1.5 1.4 1.7 1.6 1.7 1.6 0.1 0.0 LEDs Figure 7-22 Assigning addresses to the pneumatic interface module Dimensions and weight Status, alarms, diagnostics Dimensions W H D (mm) 147 152 55 Status display Green LED per digital output Weight Approx. 450 g Alarms None Module-specific data Number of outputs Valve island for connection meets following conditions* 16 Voltages, currents, potentials Medium Compressed air filtered (40 mm) Oiled (oil: VG 32) Unoiled/vacuum Pressure range 3 to 8 bars 800 l/min Electrical isolation Between extension Yes, optocouplers interface and channels Between channels No Rated flow In groups of 16 Valve switching times Insulation tested with 500 VDC On, change Off 24 msec 30 msec Max. 45 mA Current input per valve 32 mA Power input From backplane bus (1L+) From 2L+ load voltage Max. 520 mA (incl. CPV14 valves) Power loss of module (incl. valves) ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 * Further details on valve islands will be found in the FESTO documentation on valve islands. Typ. 9 W 7-77 Technical Specifications 7.20 PM 148 DO 4 DC 24V/2A power module (6ES7 148-1CA00-0XB0) Hardware The power module can be used together with the following basic modules: BM 141 DI 8DC 24V, BM 141 DI 8DC 24V ECOFAST, 6ES7 141-1BF00-0AB0, from product version 01 6ES7 141-1BF01-0AB0, from product version 01 BM 141 DI 8DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG, 6ES7 141-1BF40-0AB0, from product version 01 BM 142 DO 4DC 24V/2A, 6ES7 142-1BD11-0XB0, from product version 05 6ES7 142-1BD21-0XB0, from product version 01 6ES7 142-1BD22-0XB0, from product version 01 BM 143-DESINA FO, 6ES7 143-1BF00-0XB0, version 01 or later BM 143-DESINA RS485, 6ES7 143-1BF00-0AB0, version 01 or later BM 147/CPU, 6ES7 147-1AA00-0XB0, version 01 or later 6ES7 141-1BF01-0XB0, from product version 05 6ES7 141-1BF11-0XB0, from product version 01 6ES7 141-1BF12-0XB0, from product version 01 Features The PM 148 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A power module, order number 6ES7 148-1CA00-0XB0, has the following features: 7-78 Connection for load voltage supply 4 digital outputs Output current 2 A per output Rated load voltage 24 VDC Suitable for solenoids, DC contactors and indicator lights Parameterizable diagnostic interrupt Parameterizable diagnostics Parameterizable substitute value output Indicator for system fault (SF LED) Indicator for load voltage (DC 24V LED) ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications Pinout of sockets for DO The following table shows the pinout of the four sockets used to connect the digital outputs. You can find the layout of the sockets in Appendix C. The connector wiring is described in Section 4.4.4. Table 7-36 Pin assignment of sockets for 4-channel digital outputs Pin * Assignment of Assignment of Assignment of Assignment of socket X1 socket X2 socket X3 socket X4 1 - 2 Output signal, channel 1* - Output signal, channel 3* 3 Chassis ground, load power supply 4 Output signal, channel 0 5 PE Output signal, channel 1* Front view of socket (Front) - 2 1 Output signal, channel 2 5 Output signal, channel 3* 3 4 Note: Channel 1 and channel 3 are only allowed to be used at one socket (X1/X2 or X3/X4). Basic circuit diagram The basic circuit diagram of the power module is shown below. 2M Connector Backplane bus interface Load voltage monitor 24 VDC SF 2L+ Figure 7-23 2M Basic circuit diagram of power module PM 148 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A (6ES7 148-1CA00-0XB0) Covering up unused connections You must seal off any connections which are not required with M12 screw caps, in order to ensure that the degree of protection (IP 65, IP 66 or IP 67) is achieved. ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 7-79 Technical Specifications Parameters The following table summarizes the parameters that you can set for the power module. In Section 5.4 you will find the parameterizable diagnostics and in Section 5.5 you will find an in-depth description of diagnostic and hardware interrupt handling. You can find the layout of the parameter assignment frame and the assignment of the bits including the parameters of the digital outputs in the configuration and parameter assignment frame for the ET 200X at http://www.ad.siemens.de/simatic-cs. Table 7-37 Parameters of the PM 148 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A Range Parameters Default Enable Diagnostic interrupt Area affected Expansion module Yes/no No Wire break Short-circuit to M Short-circuit to L+ Yes/no No Yes/no No Yes/no No Behavior upon CPU STOP Set substitute value/ maintain last value/no current or voltage No current or voltage Channel Substitute value* 0/1 0 Channel Diagnosis * Channel Substitute values are current or voltage values that are output upon STOP of the master CPU by the expansion module to the process. 7-80 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications Effect of the supply voltage and the operating mode The output values of the module are dependent on the supply voltage for the electronics/sensors and on the operating status of the PLC (CPU of the DP master). Table 7-38 Dependencies of digital output values on the operating status of the PLC (CPU of DP master) and L + supply voltage Operating mode of the PLC (CPU of the DP master) Power on RUN Power on STOP Power off - Supply voltage L + to ET 200X Output value of power module L + applied PLC value L + not applied 0V L + applied Substitute value/last value (default:0 V) L + not applied 0V L + applied After current operation: substitute value/last value (default: 0 V) Upon commissioning the DP slave: 0 V L + not applied 0V Supply voltage On/Off A failure of the supply voltage to the electronics/sensors on the ET 200X is always displayed by the "ON" LED on the basic module and also entered in the diagnostic data area of the basic module. ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 7-81 Technical Specifications Dimensions and weight Status, alarms, diagnostics Dimensions W H D (mm) 87 165 67 Status display Green LED per channel Weight Approx. 250 g Alarms Diagnostic interrupt Diagnostic functions Configurable Group error Load voltage monitor Red LED (SF) Module-specific data Number of outputs 4 Cable length Unshielded Max. 30 m Green LED (DC 24V) Actuator selection data Voltages, currents, potentials Output voltage Rated load voltage 2L + 24 VDC Max. perm. power input from load Up to 40 C 10 A Up to 55 C 8 A Aggregate current of outputs All installation positions Max. 6 A Up to 55 C Max. 4 A Electrical isolation Between backplane bus Yes and all other circuit components With signal "1" Rated value 2A Permissible range 6 mA to 2.4 A No Yes Load resistance range 12 W to 4 kW Lamp load Max. 10 W Parallel connection of two outputs For redundant control of Possible load For performance Permissible potential difference Driving a digital input 500 VDC 7-82 Resistive load Inductive load to Max. 100 Hz Max. 0.5 Hz IEC 947-5-1, DC13 Max. 40 mA Max. 60 mA (without load) Power loss of module Possible at minimum current of 6 mA Switching frequency (1L+) From load voltage 2L+ Not possible 75 VDC, 60 VAC Power input From backplane bus (outputs in same group only) improvement circuits Insulation tested with Max. 0.5 mA current) supply and all other circuit components Between different Min. of 2L+ (-0.8 V) With signal "0" (residual Up to 20 C Between channels Between load power With signal "1" Output current Typ. 2.5 W Lamp load Max. 1 Hz Limitation (internal) of voltage induced on circuit interruption Typ. 2L+ (- 53 V) Short-circuit protection for output Yes, electronic Response threshold Typ. 3.5 A ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications 7.21 Expansion modules with analog inputs and outputs Hardware The expansion module can be used together with the following basic modules: BM 141 DI 8DC 24V, BM 141 DI 8DC 24V ECOFAST, 6ES7 141-1BF00-0AB0, from product version 01 6ES7 141-1BF01-0AB0, from product version 01 BM 141 DI 8DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG, 6ES7 141-1BF40-0AB0, from product version 01 BM 142 DO 4DC 24V/2A, 6ES7 142-1BD11-0XB0, from product version 05 6ES7 142-1BD21-0XB0, from product version 01 6ES7 142-1BD22-0XB0, from product version 01 BM 143-DESINA FO, 6ES7 143-1BF00-0XB0, version 01 or later BM 143-DESINA RS485, 6ES7 143-1BF00-0AB0, from product version 01 BM 147/CPU, 6ES7 147-1AA00-0XB0, from product version 01 6ES7 141-1BF01-0XB0, from product version 05 6ES7 141-1BF11-0XB0, from product version 01 6ES7 141-1BF12-0XB0, from product version 01 EM with analog inputs By means of expansion modules with analog inputs, continuously changing signals, such as those that occur when measuring temperature or pressure, can be recorded, evaluated and converted to digital values for further processing. Features of the analog inputs The expansion modules with analog inputs have the following features: Different measuring ranges: - 10 V - 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA (four-wire measuring transducer, parameterizable) - 4 to 20-wire measuring transducer) - Pt100 resistance thermometer (two-, three- or four-conductor connection possible) SIMATIC S7 and SIMATIC S5 data format (parameterizable) Resolution of 12 bits plus sign 2 channels (same measuring range and data format for both channels of an expansion module) 24 VDC supply voltage for expansion module and sensor via backplane bus Analog inputs not isolated from the internal electronic components Integration time 16.7 ms/20 ms (parameterizable) ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 7-83 Technical Specifications EM with analog outputs The expansion modules with analog outputs allow digital values inputted by means of a controller to be converted in an expansion module to corresponding analog signals (current or voltage) that control actuators (setpoint input for speed controllers, temperature controllers, etc.). Features of the analog outputs The expansion modules with analog outputs have the following features: Different measuring ranges: - 10 V - 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA (parameterizable) SIMATIC S7 and SIMATIC S5 data format (parameterizable) Resolution of 11 bits plus sign 2 channels (same measuring range and data format for both channels of an expansion module) 24 VDC supply voltage Analog outputs not isolated from the internal electronic components Measuring ranges in SIMATIC S7 and S5 format The following table compares the measuring ranges (rated ranges) in SIMATIC S7 and SIMATIC S5 format: Table 7-39 Representation of measuring ranges for analog inputs Representation of the rated ranges in SIMATIC S7 format Representation of the rated ranges in SIMATIC S5 format -27648 to +27648 -2048 to +2048 4 to 20 mA 0 to +27648 512 to +2560 PT100 Standard 0.1 oC/digit 0.5 oC/digit Measuring range 10 V 20 mA -100 to +850 oC -200 to +850 oC -200 to +1700 -2000 to +8500 Table 7-40 Representation of measuring ranges for analog outputs Output range 10 V Representation of the rated ranges in SIMATIC S7 format Representation of the rated ranges in SIMATIC S5 format -27648 to +27648 -1024 to +1024 0 to +27648 0 to +1024 20 mA 4 to 20 mA 7-84 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications 7.21.1 Parameters of the analog inputs and outputs Parameter assignment You set the parameters of the analog inputs/outputs using either the STEP 7 or COM PROFIBUS parameter assignment software. Parameters The tables below give an overview of the of the parameters that you can set for the analog inputs and analog outputs. You can find the layout of the parameter assignment frame and the assignment of the bits including the parameters of the analog inputs and outputs in the configuration and parameter assignment frame of the ET 200X at http://www.ad.siemens.de/simatic-cs. In Section 5.4 you will find the parameterizable diagnostics and in Section 5.5 you will find an in-depth description of diagnostic and hardware interrupt handling. Table 7-41 Parameters of analog inputs Expansion modules with Parameters All Format All Enable Diagnostic Range SIMATIC S7 format/ SIMATIC S5 format Default SIMATIC S7 format Area affected Expansion Module Expansion module Yes/no No Yes/no No Yes/no No Diagnosis With wire break check Yes/no No EM 144 AI 2 I (6ES7 144-1GB31-0XB0) Measuring range 20 mA/4 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA Channel EM 145 AO 2 I (6ES7 145-1GB31-0XB0) Measuring range 20 mA/4 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA Channel All Reset time1 16.7 ms/20 ms 20 ms Channel (module channels must be identically set) interrupt Hardware interrupt upon limit value violation All Diagnosis Group Channel diagnosis EM 144 AI 2 I (6ES7 144-1GB31-0XB0 and 6ES7 144-1GB41-0XB0) EM 144 AI 2 RTD Channel (6ES7 144-1JB31-0XB0) ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 7-85 Technical Specifications Table 7-41 Parameters of analog inputs, Fortsetzung Expansion modules with All Parameters Range Trigger for hardware interrupt Area affected Channel Upper limit value Lower limit value 1 Default From 32511 to -32512 - From -32512 to 32511 - For optimum interference suppression of the analog modules as a function of the system frequency (at 50 Hz, 20 msec reset time; at 60 Hz, 16.7 msec reset time) Table 7-42 Parameters of analog outputs Expansion modules with AOs Parameters All Format All Enable Diagnostic Range Default SIMATIC S7 format/ SIMATIC S5 format SIMATIC S7 format Yes/no No Area affected Expansion module Expansion module interrupt All Diagnosis Group Channel Yes/no No diagnosis All Behavior upon CPU STOP Set substitute No current or value/ maintain last voltage value/no current or voltage Channel All Substitute value* 0/1 Channel * 0 Substitute values are current or voltage values that are output upon STOP of the master CPU by the module with analog outputs to the process. 7-86 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications 7.21.2 Analog value representation for measuring ranges with SIMATIC S7 Analog value representation The digitized analog value for input and output values in the same rated range is the same. The analog values are represented in the form of a twos complement. The following table shows the analog value representation of the expansion modules with analog inputs and outputs: Table 7-43 Analog value representation (SIMATIC S7 format) Analog value Resolution Bit number 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Significance of the bits +/ - 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 Sign The sign (+/-) of the analog value is always in bit number 15: "0" "1" Measured-value resolution In the table below you will find the representation of the binary analog values and the associated decimal and hexadecimal representation of the units of the analog values. The analog inputs have a resolution of 12 bits + plus/minus sign, whereas the analog outputs have a resolution of 11 bits + plus/minus sign. Each analog value is entered in the accumulator with left justification. The bits marked "x" are set to "0". Note: This resolution does not apply to temperature values. The converted temperature values are the result of a conversion in the expansion module (see Table 7-47). Table 7-44 Measured-value resolution of the analog values (SIMATIC S7 format) Units Analog value Resolution in bits (plus +/-) Decimal Hexadecimal High byte Low byte 11 16 10H +/- 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0001xxxx 12 8 8H +/- 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00001xxx ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 7-87 Technical Specifications 7.21.3 Analog value representation for the measuring ranges of the analog inputs and outputs (SIMATIC S7 Format) The tables in this chapter contain the digitized analog values for the measuring ranges of the expansion modules with analog inputs and outputs. The binary representation of the analog values is always the same, so these tables only compare the measuring ranges and the units. 7-88 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications Input ranges 10 V 20 mA The following table contains the representation of the digitized measured value for the: For the voltage measuring range 10 V and For the current measuring range 20 mA. Table 7-45 SIMATIC S7 format: representation of the digitized measured value +/-10 V; +/-20 mA (expansion modules with analog inputs) Measuring range 10 V Measuring range 20 mA Units Decimal Hexadecimal > 11.7589 > 23.515 32767 7FFFH 11.7589 23.515 32511 7EFFH : : : : 10.0004 20.0007 27649 6C01H 10.00 20.000 27648 6C00H 7.50 14.998 20736 5100H : : : - 7.50 - 14.998 -20736 AF00H - 10.00 - 20.000 -27648 9400H - 10.0004 - 20.0007 -27649 93FFH : : : : - 11.759 - 23.516 -32512 8100H <- 11.759 <- 23.516 -32768 8000H : ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Range Overflow Overrange Rated range Underrange Underflow 7-89 Technical Specifications Input range 4 to 20 mA The following table contains the representation of the digitized measured value for the: Current measuring range 4 to 20 mA Table 7-46 SIMATIC S7 format: representation of the digitized measured value 4 to 20 mA (expansion module with analog inputs) Measuring range from 4 to 20 mA Units Decimal Hexadecimal >22.810 32767 7FFFH 22.810 32511 7EFFH : : : 20.0005 27649 6C01H 20.000 27648 6C00H 16.000 20736 5100H : : : 4.000 0 0H 3.9995 -1 FFFFH : : : 1.1852 -4864 ED00H 1.1852 -32768 8000H Range Overflow Overrange Rated range Underrange Underflow Relationship between "Wire break" and measuring range If the "wire break" parameter is deactivated in the configuration software and the measuring range 1.1 mA, then "8000H" is output and bit 6 "measuring range underflow" is set in byte 21 of the station diagnosis. If the "wire break" parameter is activated and the measuring range 3.6 mA, then "8000H" is output and bit 4 "wire break" is set in byte 21 of the station diagnosis. 7-90 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications Standard temperature range, Pt 100 In the following table you will find the representation of the digitized measured value for the standard temperature range of the Pt 100 sensor. The characteristic linearization applies to the following temperature ranges: - 200 C to + 850 C (in increments of 0.1 C). Table 7-47 SIMATIC S7 format: representation of the digitized measured value for the standard temperature range, Pt 100 (expansion module with analog inputs) Measured value in C Decimal Hexadecimal Range > 1000.0 32767 7FFFH Overflow 1000.0 10000 2710H : : : 850.1 8501 2135H 850.0 8500 2134H : : : -200.0 -2000 F830H -200.1 -2001 F82FH : : -243.0 -2430 F682H <- 243.0 -32768 8000H : ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Overrange Rated range Underrange Underflow 7-91 Technical Specifications Tables for output ranges As of Table 7-48 you will find the analog output ranges of the expansion modules with analog outputs. Output ranges 10 V 20 mA The following table contains the representation of the output ranges for the: For the voltage output range 10 V and For the current output range 20 mA. Table 7-48 SIMATIC S7 format: representation of the analog output range +/-10 V; +/-20 mA Output range 10 V 0 11.7589 : 0 23.515 : Units Decimal Hexadecimal >32511 >7EFFH 32511 7EFFH : : 10.0004 20.0007 27649 6C01H 10.00 20.000 27648 6C00H 7.50 14.998 20736 5100H : : : - 7.50 - 14.998 -20736 AF00H - 10.00 - 20.000 -27648 9400H - 10.0004 -20.0007 -27649 93FFH : : : : - 11.7589 - 23.515 -32512 8100H 0 0 <-32512 <8100H : 7-92 Output range 20 mA Range Overflow Overrange Rated range Underrange Underflow ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications Output range 4 to 20 mA The following table contains the representation of the current output range 4 to 20 mA. Table 7-49 SIMATIC S7 format: representation of the analog current output range 4 to 20 mA Output range 4 to 20 mA Units Range Decimal Hexadecimal 0 >32511 >7EFFH 22.8142 32511 7EFFH : : : 20.0005 27649 6C01H 20.000 27648 6C00H : : : 4.000 0 0H 3.9995 -1 FFFFH : : : 0 - 6912 E500H 0 <-6913 <E4FFH ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Overflow Overrange Rated range Underrange Underflow 7-93 Technical Specifications 7.21.4 Analog value representation for measuring ranges with SIMATIC S5 Analog value representation The analog inputs have a resolution of 12 bits + plus/minus sign, whereas the analog outputs have a resolution of 11 bits + plus/minus sign. Each analog value is entered in the accumulator with left justification. The analog values are represented in the form of a twos complement. Analog inputs The following table shows the analog value representation of the expansion modules with analog inputs: Table 7-50 Analog value representation of the analog inputs (SIMATIC S5 format) Analog value Resolution Bit number Significance of the bits 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 +/ - 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 x F U Sign The sign (+/-) of the analog value is always in bit number 15: "0" "1" Irrelevant bits Irrelevant bits are marked "x". Diagnostic bits Bit numbers 0 and 1 are reserved for diagnostic functions, whereas bit number 2 does not have a function. 7-94 E = error bit (0 = no wire break; 1 = wire break) O = overflow bit ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications Analog outputs The following table shows the analog value representation of the expansion modules with analog outputs: Table 7-51 Analog value representation of the analog outputs (SIMATIC S5 format) Analog value Resolution Bit number 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Significance of the bits +/ - 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 x x x x 7.21.5 Analog value representation for the measuring ranges of the analog inputs and outputs (SIMATIC S5 format) The tables in this chapter contain the digitized analog values for the measuring ranges of the expansion modules with analog inputs and outputs. Format calculation The SIMATIC S5 format is calculated in the analog module from the SIMATIC S7 format. The overrange in the two formats is therefore the same size (approx. 17.6 %). ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 7-95 Technical Specifications Input ranges 10 V The following table contains the representation of the digitized measured value for the: For the voltage measuring range 10 V Table 7-52 SIMATIC S5 format: representation of the digitized measured value +/-10 V (expansion module with analog inputs) Measuring range 10 V Units (dec.) Data word Range 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 x F U 2409 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 Overflow 2408 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Overrange 2049 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 10.00 2048 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 1024 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -5 -1024 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -10.00 -2048 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -10.005 -2049 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 -11.7578 -2408 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 -11.7578 -2409 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 11.7578 11.7589 10.005 7-96 Rated range Underrange Underflow ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications Input range 20 mA The following table contains the representation of the digitized measured value for the: For the current measuring range 20 mA. Table 7-53 SIMATIC S5 format: representation of the digitized measured value +/-20 mA (expansion module with analog inputs) Measuring range 20 mA Units (dec.) Data word Range 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 x F U 2409 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 Overflow 23.5156 2408 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Overrange 20.0097 2049 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 20.000 2048 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0097 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -0.0097 -1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 -20.000 -2048 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -20.0097 -2049 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 -23.5156 -2408 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 -23.5156 -2409 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 23.5156 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Rated range Underrange Underflow 7-97 Technical Specifications Input range 4 to 20 mA The following table contains the representation of the digitized measured value for the: Current measuring range 4 to 20 mA Table 7-54 SIMATIC S5 format: representation of the digitized measured value 4 to 20 mA (expansion module with analog inputs) Measuring range 4 to 20 mA Units (dec.) Data word Range 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 x F U >22.8125 2921 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 Overflow 22.8125 2920 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Overrange 20.0078 2561 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 20.000 2560 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4.0078 513 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 4.000 512 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3.9922 511 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1.1852 151 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 <1.1797 4095 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 Rated range Underrange Underflow Relationship between "Wire break" and measuring range The 3.6 mA measuring range according to Table 7-54 can be used only if the "wire break" parameter has been deactivated in the software. When "wire break" has been activated and the measuring range is 3.6 mA, then "4095" is output and the error and overflow bits are set. 7-98 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications Standard temperature range, Pt 100 In the following table you will find the representation of the digitized measured value for the standard temperature range of the Pt 100 sensor. The characteristic linearization applies to the following temperature ranges: - 200 C to + 850 C (in increments of 0.5 C). Table 7-55 SIMATIC S5 format: representation of the digitized measured value for the standard temperature range, Pt 100 (expansion module with analog inputs) Measured value in C Units (dec.) Data word Range 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 x F U 2001 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 Overflow 1000.0 2000 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 851.0 1702 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 Overrange* 850.0 1700 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 100 200 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -20 - 40 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 -100.0 - 200 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 -101.0 - 202 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 -243.0 - 486 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 -243.0 - 487 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1000.0 * Rated range Underrange Underflow* In the overrange and underrange, the gradient of the characteristic curve at the point where the linearized rated range is left is retained. ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 7-99 Technical Specifications Tables for output ranges As of Table 7-56 you will find the analog output ranges of the expansion modules with analog outputs. Output range 10 V The following table contains the representation of the voltage output range 10 V. Table 7-56 SIMATIC S5 format: representation of the analog voltage output range +/-10 V Units (dec.) Output range 10 V Data word Range 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 x x x x 0 1205 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 x x x x Overflow 11.7578 1204 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 x x x x Overrange 10.0098 1025 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 x x x x 10.0000 1024 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x 0.0098 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 x x x x 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x -0.0098 -1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 x x x x -10.0000 -1024 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x -10.0098 -1025 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 x x x x -11.7578 -1204 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 x x x x 0 1205 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 x x x x 7-100 Rated range Underrange Underflow ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications Output range 20 mA The following table contains the representation of the current output range 20 mA. Table 7-57 SIMATIC S5 format: representation of the analog current output range +/-20 mA Units (dec.) Output range 20 mA Data word Range 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 x x x x 0 1205 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 x x x x Overflow 23.5156 1204 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 x x x x Overrange 20.0195 1025 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 x x x x 20.000 1024 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x 0.0195 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 x x x x 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x -0.0195 -1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 x x x x -20.000 -1024 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x -20.0195 -1025 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 x x x x -23.5156 -1204 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 x x x x Underrange 0 -1205 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 x x x x Underflow ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Rated range 7-101 Technical Specifications Output range 4 to 20 mA The following table contains the representation of the current output range 4 to 20 mA. Table 7-58 SIMATIC S5 format: representation of the analog current output range 4 to 20 mA Units (dec.) Output range 4 to 20 mA Data word Range 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 x x x x 0 1205 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 x x x x Overflow 22.8125 1204 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 x x x x Overrange 20.0156 1025 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 x x x x 20.000 1024 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x 4.0156 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 x x x x 4.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x 3.9844 -1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 x x x x 0 -256 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x 0 -257 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 x x x x 0 -1205 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 x x x x 7-102 Rated range Underrange Underflow ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications 7.21.6 Behavior of the analog inputs and outputs during operation and in the event of faults This chapter deals with the following topics: The dependency of the analog input and output values on the supply voltage of the expansion module and the operating modes of the PLC The behavior of the analog expansion modules as a function of the position of the analog values in the relevant value range The effect of errors on the analog inputs/outputs Effect of the supply voltage and the operating mode The input and output values of the analog modules are dependent on the supply voltage for electronic components/sensors and on the operating mode of the PLC (CPU of the DP master). Table 7-59 How the analog input/output values depend on the operating mode of the PLC (CPU of the DP master) and the supply voltage L + Operating mode of the PLC (CPU of the DP master) Power on RUN Supply voltage L + to ET 200X L + applied Input value of the expansion module with analog inputs and (evaluation possible in the CPU of the DP master) Output value of the expansion module with analog outputs Process value PLC value 7FFFH until the first conversion after the module is switched on or after the module is parameterized Until the first conversion ... after the module is switched on, a signal of 0 mA or 0 V is output. after the module is parameterized, the previous value is output. Power on Power off STOP - L + not applied 0 mA/0 V 0 mA/0 V L + applied 0 mA/0 V Substitute value/last value (default: 0 mA/0 V) L + not applied 0 mA/0 V 0 mA/0 V L + applied - 0 mA/0 V L + not applied - 0 mA/0 V ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 7-103 Technical Specifications Supply voltage On/Off A failure of the supply voltage to the electronics/sensors on the ET 200X is always displayed by the "ON" LED on the basic module and also entered in the diagnostic data area of the basic module. ! Caution When the supply voltage for electronic components/sensors on the ET 200X is switched on/off, incorrect interim values may be obtained temporarily at the analog outputs. Effect of the value range for the analog input The behavior of the expansion modules with analog inputs depends on where the input values are in the value range. The following table indicates this: Table 7-60 Behavior of the analog modules as a function of the position of the analog output value Measured value in Input value in SIMATIC S7 format Input value in SIMATIC S5 format in the rated range Measured value in the overrange/underrange SF LED Diagnostic data area of the module Interrupt Measured value - - - Measured value Measured value - - - in the overflow 7FFFH End of the overrange +1 plus overflow bit On* Entry performed* Diagnostic interrupt** in the underflow 8000H End of the underrange -1 plus overflow bit On* Entry performed* Diagnostic interrupt** Outside the upper or lower limit value Measured value Measured value - - Hardware interrupt** On* - - Before parame- 7FFFH terization or in the event of incorrect parameterization 7FFFH * When the "group diagnosis" parameter has been enabled in the configuration software ** When the diagnostic or hardware interrupt has been enabled in the configuration software 7-104 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications EM 144 AI 2 x RTD, response in the event of a wire break If a wire break occurs on one of the EM 144 AI 2 x RTD expansion module's channels, the measured values on the expansion module's other channel may be corrupted. When this happens in S5 format, the overflow bit is set and the value 06E6H is loaded; in S7 format the value 7FFFH is loaded. Effect of the value range for the analog output The behavior of the expansion modules with analog outputs depends on where the output values are in the value range. The following table indicates this: Table 7-61 Behavior of the analog modules depending on the position of the analog output value in the value range Output value in Output value in SIMATIC S 5/S7 format SF LED Diagnostic data area of the module Interrupt Rated range Value from DP master - - - Overrange/underrange Value from DP master - - - Overflow 0 signal - - - Underflow 0 signal - - - Before parameterization or in the event of incorrect parameterization 0 signal On* - - ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 7-105 Technical Specifications 7.21.7 Connecting measuring sensors to the analog inputs You can connect different measuring sensors to the analog inputs depending on the type of measurement involved: Voltage sensors Current sensors as: - Two-wire measuring transducers - Four-wire measuring transducers Resistance thermometers Abbreviations used The following abbreviations are used in the figures in this section: IC+: Constant-current line (positive) IC-: Constant-current line (negative) M+: Measuring line (positive) M-: Measuring line (negative) 1M: Frame connection for sensor 1L+: Supply voltage connection for DC 24 V sensor Connecting voltage sensors The figure below shows how voltage sensors are connected to an expansion module with analog inputs. 1L+* 1M* Socket X2 Socket X1 2 3 1 Voltage sensor + - M+ 4 M- 1M * 7-106 3 1 4 Connection of socket X2: see socket X1 L+ Figure 7-24 2 Made available by the ET 200X for the connected sensor Connection of voltage sensors to analog inputs (EM with order number 6ES7 144-1FB31-0XB0) ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications Connecting current sensors as two- and four-wire measuring transducers The supply voltage is fed to the two-wire measuring transducer and is inherently short circuit-proof. The two-wire measuring transducer then converts the fed measured value into a current. Four-wire measuring transducers have a separate supply voltage connection. The two-wire measuring transducers must be insulated measuring sensors. The figure below shows how current sensors are connected as two-wire measuring transducers to an EM 144 AI 2 I expansion module (4 to 20 mA). 1L+* 1M Socket X2 Socket X1 Sensor, e.g. pressure gauge P Two-wire measuring transducer 2 + M+ - M- 3 1 4 4 Connection of socket X2: see socket X1 * Figure 7-25 2 3 1 Made available by the ET 200X for the connected sensor Connection of current sensors (two-wire measuring transducers) to analog inputs (EM with order number 6ES7 144-1GB41-0XB0) ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 7-107 Technical Specifications Four-wire measuring transducer at the EM 144 AI 2 I (20 mA) The figure below shows how current sensors are connected as four-wire measuring transducers to an EM 144 AI 2 I expansion module (20 mA). 1L+* 1M* Socket X2 Socket X1 Sensor, e.g. pressure gauge 2 1 P 2 Four-wire measuring + transducer - M+ 1 3 4 4 M- Connection of socket X2: see socket X1 1M L+ * Figure 7-26 3 Made available by the ET 200X for the connected sensor; 1L+ of module must be used since a possible broken wire signal is possible only with the sensor supply made available by the module. Connection of current sensors (four-wire measuring transducers) to analog inputs (EM with order number 6ES7 144-1GB31-0XB0) Four-wire measuring transducer to EM 144 AI 2 I (4 to 20 mA) The figure below shows how current sensors are connected as four-wire measuring transducers to an EM 144 AI 2 I expansion module (4 to 20 mA ). Note: There is no L+ available at pin 1 on the expansion module. You therefore have to feed the supply voltage for the current sensor from an external source. 1L+ 1M Socket X2 Socket X1 Sensor, e.g. pressure gauge 3 1 P Four-wire measuring + transducer - L+ Figure 7-27 7-108 2 2 1M M+ M- 4 3 1 4 Connection of socket X2: see socket X1 Connection of current sensors (four-wire measuring transducers) to analog inputs (EM with order number 6ES7 144-1GB41-0XB0) ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications Connecting Pt 100 resistance thermometers The resistance thermometers are measured in a four-conductor connection. Constant current is fed to the resistance thermometers via connections IC+ and IC- . The voltage generated at the resistance thermometer is measured via connections M+ and M-. This ensures highly accurate measurement results with the four-conductor connection. The figure below shows how resistance thermometers are connected to an EM 144 AI 2 RTD expansion module. 1L+ 1M* Socket X2 Socket X1 2 IC+ 3 1 IC M+ 2 4 M- 3 1 4 Connection of socket X2: see socket X1 IC- * Figure 7-28 Made available by the ET 200X for the connected sensor Connection of resistance thermometers to EM 144 AI 2 x RTD (EM with order number 6ES7 144-1JB31-0XB0) In the case of a two- or three-wire connection, you have to create appropriate bridges in the connector to form connections between M+ and IC+ and M- and IC- on the expansion module. However, you must reckon with a lost of accuracy in the measurement results. 7.21.8 Connecting loads to the analog outputs When you use expansion modules with analog outputs, you can supply loads/actuators with current or voltage. Abbreviations used The following abbreviations are used in the figures in this section: QI: Analog output current QV: Analog output voltage 1M: Frame connection/reference potential of the analog circuit RL: Load/actuator Connecting loads to a voltage output You have to connect loads to a current output at QV and the reference point of the analog circuit 1M (see Figure 7-29). ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 7-109 Technical Specifications Four-conductor connection If you connect a load with a 4-core cable to a voltage output, use only 2 of the cable's cores and connect them to pins 1 and 3. Connecting loads to a current output You have to connect loads to a current output at QI and the reference point of the analog circuit 1M. The figure below shows how loads are connected to a voltage or current output of an expansion module with analog outputs. 1M* Socket X2 Socket X1 2 QV or QI 2 3 1 4 RL 3 1 4 Connection of socket X2: see socket X1 1M * Figure 7-29 7-110 Made available by the ET 200X Connection of loads to a voltage or current output (analog output; EM with order number 6ES7 145-1FB31-0XB0; 6ES7 145-1GB31-0XB0) ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications 7.21.9 EM 144 AI 2 x U expansion module (6ES7 144-1FB31-0XB0) Features The EM 144 AI 2 U expansion module with the order number 6ES7 144-1FB31-0XB0 has the following features: 2 inputs for voltage measurement (2 channels with the same measuring range and data format) Input range 10 V Resolution of 12 bits plus sign 24 VDC supply voltage Non-isolated Parameterizable diagnostic interrupt Parameterizable hardware interrupt Parameterizable diagnostics SF LED Pinout of the sockets for AI The following table shows the pinout of the two sockets used to connect the analog inputs. You can find the layout of the sockets in Appendix C. Table 7-62 Pinout of the sockets for 2-channel analog inputs (voltage) Pin Assignment of socket X1 1 Sensor supply output 1L+ 2 Input signal "+", channel 0 3 Chassis ground, power supply 4 Input signal "-", channel 0 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Assignment of socket X2 Front view of socket (Front view) 2 Input signal "+", channel 1 3 1 Input signal "-", channel 1 4 7-111 Technical Specifications Basic circuit diagram The basic circuit diagram of the expansion module is shown below. Supply voltage for electronic components and sensors via backplane bus 1M 1 2 1L+ So. X1 24 V 5V 4 ADC 3 Backplane bus interface 1 2 SF So. X2 4 3 Socket connections (see Table 7-62) Figure 7-30 Basic circuit diagram of expansion module EM 144 AI 2 x U Covering up unused connections You must seal off any connections which are not required with M12 screw caps, in order to ensure that the degree of protection (IP 65, IP 66 or IP 67) is achieved. Dimensions and weight Voltages, currents, potentials Dimensions W H D (mm) 87 110 55 Electrical isolation Weight Approx. 250 g Permissible potential difference Module-specific data Number of inputs 2 Between input (frame connection) and MANA (UCM) Between MANA and Cable length Shielded No Max. 30 m centralized grounding point (UISO) Power input From supply voltage L+ 2.0 VDC; ACSS 0 VAC; DC Max. 40 mA Typ. 0.9 W Power loss of the module 7-112 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications Analog value formation Measurement principle Integrative Integration and cycle time/ resolution per channel: Integration time Yes parameterizable Integration time in ms Cycle time in ms 16.7 20 134 160 60 50 Temperature error (with reference to input range) 0.01 %/K Crosstalk between inputs > 45 dB Linearity error (with reference to input range) 0.05 % Repeat accuracy (steady state at 25 C with reference to input range) 0.05 % (all channels) Interference voltage suppression for interference frequency f1 in Hz Resolution (including Status, alarms, diagnostics interrupt Hardware 12 bits plus sign interrupt overrange) Rated value in units: - SIMATIC S7 format: - SIMATIC S5 format: Diagnostic Alarms 6912 4096 Diagnostic functions Configurable Group error Red LED (SF) Sensor supply outputs Outputs Output current* Interference suppression, error limits Interference voltage suppression Common-mode > 60 dB interference > 40 dB Series-mode Short circuit protection Sensor selection data interference (peak interference value < rated value of input range) Operational limit (entire temperature range with reference to input range) Input range (rated value)/in- 10 V/100 kW put resistance Permissible input voltage (destruction limit) 1.2 % Basic error (operational limit 1.0 % at 25 C with reference to input range) ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 2 Up to 40 C max. 0.9A; Up to 55 C max. 0.7A Yes, electronic 30 V Sensor connection For voltage Possible measurement * Please note the total current per ET 200X. 7-113 Technical Specifications 7.21.10 EM 144 AI 2 x I expansion module (+/-20 mA) (6ES7 144-1GB31-0XB0) Features The EM 144 AI 2 I expansion module with the order number 6ES7 144-1FB31-0XB0 has the following features: 2 inputs for current measurement (2 channels with the same measuring range and data format) Parameterizable input range, 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA Connection of sensors as four-wire measuring transducers Resolution of 12 bits plus sign 24 VDC supply voltage Non-isolated Parameterizable diagnostic interrupt Parameterizable hardware interrupt Parameterizable diagnostics SF LED Pinout of the sockets for AI The following table shows the pinout of the two sockets used to connect the analog inputs. You can find the layout of the sockets in Appendix C. Table 7-63 Pinout of the sockets for 2-channel analog inputs (EM 144 AI 2 x I) Pin Assignment of socket X1 1 Sensor supply output 1L+ 2 Input signal "+", channel 0 3 Chassis ground, power supply 4 Input signal "-", channel 0 7-114 Assignment of socket X2 Front view of socket (Front view) 2 Input signal "+", channel 1 3 1 Input signal "-", channel 1 4 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications Basic circuit diagram The basic circuit diagram of the expansion module is shown below. Supply voltage for electronic components and sensors via backplane bus 1M 1 1L+ 24 V 2 5V So. X1 4 ADC 3 Backplane bus interface 1 2 So. X2 SF 4 3 Socket connections (see Table 7-63) Figure 7-31 Basic circuit diagram of expansion module EM 144 AI 2 x I Covering up unused connections You must seal off any connections which are not required with M12 screw caps, in order to ensure that the degree of protection (IP 65, IP 66 or IP 67) is achieved. Dimensions and weight Voltages, currents, potentials Dimensions W H D (mm) 87 110 55 Electrical isolation Weight Approx. 250 g Permissible potential difference Module-specific data Number of inputs 2 connection) and MANA (UCM) Between MANA and Cable length Shielded Between input (frame Max. 30 m No 2.0 VDC; ACSS 0 VAC; DC centralized grounding point (UISO) Power input ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 From supply voltage L+ Max. 40 mA Power loss of the module Typ. 0.9 W 7-115 Technical Specifications Analog value formation Measurement principle Integrative Integration and cycle time/ resolution per channel: Integration time Yes parameterizable Integration time in ms Cycle time in ms 16.7 20 134 160 60 50 (all channels) Interference voltage > 45 dB Linearity error (with reference to input range) 0.05 % Repeat accuracy (steady state at 25 C with reference to input range) 0.05 % Status, alarms, diagnostics Diagnostic Alarms interrupt suppression for interference frequency f1 in Hz Resolution (including Crosstalk between inputs Hardware interrupt 12 bits plus sign overrange) Diagnostic functions Configurable Group error Red LED (SF) Sensor supply outputs Rated value in units: - SIMATIC S7 format: 6912 - SIMATIC S5 format: 4096 Outputs Output current* 2 Up to 40 C max. 0.9A; Up to 55 C max. 0.7A Yes, electronic Interference suppression, error limits Interference voltage suppression Short circuit protection Common-mode > 60 dB interference > 40 dB Series-mode interference (peak interference value < rated value of input range) Operational limit (entire temperature range with reference to input range) 1.2 % 7-116 Input range (rated range)/input resistance parameterizable 20 mA/25 W Permissible input voltage (destruction limit) 40 mA 4 to 20 mA Sensor connection For current measurement:-wire measuring transducer** Basic error (operational limit 1.0 % at 25 C with reference to input range) Temperature error (with reference to input range) Sensor selection data 0.01 %/K Not possible Possible * Please note the total current per ET 200X. ** 1L+ of module must be used since a possible broken wire signal is possible only with the sensor supply made available by the module. ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications 7.21.11 EM 144 AI 2 x I expansion module (4 to 20 mA) (6ES7 144-1GB41-0XB0) Features The EM 144 AI 2 I expansion module with the order number 6ES7 144-1GB41-0XB0 has the following features: 2 inputs for current measurement (2 channels with the same measuring range and data format) Input range 4 to 20 mA Connection of sensors as two- or four-wire measuring transducers Resolution of 12 bits plus sign 24 VDC supply voltage Non-isolated Parameterizable diagnostic interrupt Parameterizable hardware interrupt Parameterizable diagnostics SF LED Pinout of the sockets for AI The following table shows the pinout of the two sockets used to connect the analog inputs. You can find the layout of the sockets in Appendix C. Table 7-64 Pinout of the sockets for 2-channel analog inputs (EM 144 AI 2 x I, 4 to 20 mA) Pin 1 * Assignment of socket X1 Assignment of socket X2 Sensor supply output 1L+*; Sensor supply output 1L+*; Input signal "+", channel 0 Input signal "+", channel 1 2 Input signal "-", channel 0 Input signal "-", channel 1 3 Chassis ground, power supply 4 - Front view of socket (Front view) 2 3 1 4 L+ is not available at pin 1 for connecting four-wire measuring transducers. You therefore have to feed the sensor supply voltage from an external source (see also Section 7.21.7). ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 7-117 Technical Specifications Basic circuit diagram The basic circuit diagram of the expansion module is shown below. Supply voltage for electronic components and sensors via backplane bus 1M 1 1L+ 24 V 2 5V ADC Backplane bus interface So. X1 4 3 1 2 SF So. X2 4 3 Socket connections (see Table 7-64) Figure 7-32 Basic circuit diagram of Expansion module EM 144 AI 2 x I (4 to 20 mA) Covering up unused connections You must seal off any connections which are not required with M12 screw caps, in order to ensure that the degree of protection (IP 65, IP 66 or IP 67) is achieved. 7-118 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications Dimensions and weight Interference suppression, error limits Dimensions W H D (mm) 87 110 55 Weight Approx. 250 g Module-specific data Number of inputs Max. 30 m Voltages, currents, potentials Electrical isolation No Permissible potential difference Between input (frame 2.0 VDC; ACSS connection) and MANA (UCM) Between MANA and Common-mode 0 VAC; DC centralized grounding point (UISO) Power input From supply voltage L+ Max. 80 mA Power loss of the module Typ. 1W Operational limit (entire temperature range with reference to input range) Temperature error (with reference to input range) 0.01 %/K Crosstalk between inputs > 45 dB Linearity error (with reference to input range) 0.05 % Repeat accuracy (steady state at 25 C with reference to input range) 0.05 % Status, alarms, diagnostics Integrative Diagnostic Alarms interrupt Hardware interrupt Yes parameterizable Integration time in ms Cycle time in ms 16.7 20 134 160 60 50 Diagnostic functions Configurable Group error Red LED (SF) Sensor selection data (all channels) Interference voltage suppression for interference frequency f1 in Hz Resolution (including 1.2 % Basic error (operational limit 1.0 % at 25 C with reference to input range) Integration and cycle time/ resolution per channel: Integration time > 40 dB interference (peak interference value < rated value of input range) Analog value formation Measurement principle > 60 dB interference Series-mode 2 Cable length Shielded Interference voltage suppression 12 bits plus sign overrange) Rated value in units: Input range (rated value)/in- 4 to 20 mA/25 W put resistance Permissible input voltage (destruction limit) 40 mA Short circuit protection Short-circuit current Yes Max. 750 W - SIMATIC S7 format: 6912 Sensor load - SIMATIC S5 format: 4096 Sensor connection Approx. 65 mA For current measurement: As 2-wire measuring transducer As 4-wire measuring transducer ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Possible Possible 7-119 Technical Specifications 7.21.12 EM 144 AI 2 RTD expansion module (6ES7 144-1JB31-0XB0) Features The EM 144 AI 2 RTD expansion module with the order number 6ES7 144-1JB31-0XB0 has the following features: 2 inputs for Pt 100 resistance thermometer (2 channels with the same measuring range and data format) Input range for Pt 100 Resolution of 12 bits plus sign 24 VDC supply voltage Non-isolated Parameterizable diagnostic interrupt Parameterizable hardware interrupt Parameterizable diagnostics SF LED Pinout of the sockets for AI The following table shows the pinout of the two sockets used to connect the analog inputs. You can find the layout of the sockets in Appendix C. Table 7-65 Pinout of the sockets for 2-channel analog inputs (Pt 100) Pin Assignment of socket X1 Assignment of socket X2 1 Sensor supply output current (approx. 1 mA) 2 Input signal "+", channel 0 3 Chassis ground, power supply 4 Input signal "-", channel 0 7-120 Front view of socket (Front view) 2 Input signal "+", channel 1 3 1 Input signal "-", channel 1 4 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications Basic circuit diagram The basic circuit diagram of the expansion module is shown below. Supply voltage for electronic components and sensors via backplane bus 1M 1 1L+ 2 24 V 5V 4 ADC Backplane bus interface So. X1 3 1 2 SF So. X2 4 3 Socket connections (see Table 7-65) Figure 7-33 Basic circuit diagram of expansion module EM 144 AI 2 x RTD Covering up unused connections You must seal off any connections which are not required with M12 screw caps, in order to ensure that the degree of protection (IP 65, IP 66 or IP 67) is achieved. ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 7-121 Technical Specifications Dimensions and weight Interference suppression, error limits Dimensions W H D (mm) 87 110 55 Weight Approx. 250 g Module-specific data Number of inputs Max. 30 m Voltages, currents, potentials Electrical isolation No Permissible potential difference Between input (frame 2.0 VDC; ACSS connection) and MANA (UCM) Between MANA and Common-mode 0 VAC; DC centralized grounding point (UISO) Power input From supply voltage L+ Max. 40 mA Power loss of the module Typ. 0.9 W > 40 dB interference (peak interference value < rated value of input range) Operational limit (entire temperature range with reference to input range) Temperature error (with reference to input range) 0.01 %/K Crosstalk between inputs > 45 dB Linearity error (with reference to input range) 0.05 % Repeat accuracy (steady state at 25 C with reference to input range) 0.05 % Status, alarms, diagnostics Integrative Diagnostic Alarms interrupt Integration and cycle time/ resolution per channel: Integration time Hardware interrupt Yes parameterizable Integration time in ms Cycle time in ms 16.7 20 134 160 60 50 (all channels) Interference voltage suppression for interference frequency f1 in Hz Resolution (including 12 bits plus sign overrange) Rated value in units: - SIMATIC S7 format: - SIMATIC S5 format: 1.2 % Basic error (operational limit 1.0 % at 25 C with reference to input range) Analog value formation Measurement principle > 60 dB interference Series-mode 2 Cable length Shielded Interference voltage suppression 6912 4096 Diagnostic functions Configurable Group error Red LED (SF) Sensor selection data Input range (rated value)/in- Pt 100/10 MW put resistance Characteristic curve linearization Yes Permissible input voltage (destruction limit) 30 V Measurement current IC+ Max. 1.5 mA Sensor connection Two-conductor Possible connection Three-conductor Possible connection Four-conductor Possible connection 7-122 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications 7.21.13 EM 145 AO 2 U expansion module (6ES7 145-1FB31-0XB0) Features The EM 145 AO 2 U expansion module with the order number 6ES7 145-1FB31-0XB0 has the following features: 2 outputs for voltage output (2 channels with the same measuring range and data format) Output range 10 V Resolution of 11 bits plus sign 24 VDC supply voltage Non-isolated Parameterizable diagnostic interrupt Parameterizable diagnostics Parameterizable substitute value output SF LED Pinout of sockets for AO The following table shows the pinout of the two sockets used to connect the analog outputs. You can find the layout of the sockets in Appendix C. Table 7-66 Pinout of the sockets for 2-channel analog outputs (voltage) Pin Assignment of socket X1 Assignment of socket X2 1 Output signal QV, channel 0 Output signal QV, channel 1 2 - - 3 Chassis ground, power supply 4 - ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Front view of socket (Front view) 2 3 1 - 4 7-123 Technical Specifications Basic circuit diagram The basic circuit diagram of the expansion module is shown below. Supply voltage for electronic components and sensors via backplane bus 1M 1L+ 24 V + DAC 1 - 5V 2 So. X1 4 Backplane bus interface DAC + 3 1 - SF 2 So. X2 4 3 Socket connections (see Table 7-66) Figure 7-34 Basic circuit diagram of expansion module EM 145 AO 2 x U Covering up unused connections You must seal off any connections which are not required with M12 screw caps, in order to ensure that the degree of protection (IP 65, IP 66 or IP 67) is achieved. 7-124 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W H D (mm) 87 110 55 Weight Approx. 250 g Module-specific data Number of outputs 2 Cable length Shielded Max. 30 m Voltages, currents, potentials Electrical isolation No Permissible potential difference Between coil (frame 0 VAC; DC connection) and centralized grounding point (UISO) Power input From supply voltage L+ Max. 75 mA Power loss of the module Typ. 1.5 W Analog value formation Resolution (including overrange) 11 bits plus sign Rated value in units: - SIMATIC S7 format: 1728 - SIMATIC S5 format: 1024 Cycle time (all channels) 1 ms Settling time For resistive load For capacitive load 0.6 ms 6.0 ms Replacement values can be No applied Interference suppression, error limits Operational limit (entire temperature range with reference to output range) 1 % Basic error (operational limit 0.9 % at 25 C with reference to output range) Temperature error (with reference to output range) 0.01 %/K Crosstalk between outputs > 45 dB Linearity error (with reference to output range) 0.08 % Repeat accuracy (steady state at 25 C with reference to output range) 0.05 % Output ripple (with reference to output range, bandwidth 0 to 50 kHz) 0.05 % Status, alarms, diagnostics Alarms Diagnostic interrupt Diagnostic functions Configurable Group error Red LED (SF) Actuator selection data Output range (rated value) -10 to 10 V Load resistance Min. 1.0 kW With capacitive load Short circuit protection Short-circuit current Max. 0.1 mF Permissible input voltage for voltage output (destruction limit) 15 V Yes Max. 30 mA Actuator connection Two-conductor Possible connection Four-conductor Possible connection ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 7-125 Technical Specifications 7.21.14 EM 145 AO 2I expansion module (6ES7 145-1GB31-0XB0) Features The EM 145 AO 2 I expansion module with the order number 6ES7 145-1GB31-0XB0 has the following features: 2 outputs for current measurement (2 channels with the same measuring range and data format) Parameterizable output range, 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA Resolution of 11 bits plus sign 24 VDC supply voltage Non-isolated Parameterizable diagnostic interrupt Parameterizable diagnostics Parameterizable substitute value output SF LED Pinout of sockets for AO The following table shows the pinout of the two sockets used to connect the analog outputs. You can find the layout of the sockets in Appendix C. Table 7-67 Pinout of the sockets for 2-channel analog outputs (current) Pin Assignment of socket X1 1 Output signal QI, channel 0 2 - 3 Chassis ground, power supply 4 - 7-126 Assignment of socket X2 Front view of socket (Front view) Output signal QI, channel 1 2 3 1 4 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications Basic circuit diagram The basic circuit diagram of the expansion module is shown below. Supply voltage for electronic components and sensors via backplane bus 1M 1L+ 24 V + DAC 1 - 5V 2 So. X1 4 Backplane bus interface DAC + 3 1 - SF 2 So. X2 4 3 Socket connections (see Table 7-67) Figure 7-35 Basic circuit diagram of expansion module EM 145 AO 2 x I Covering up unused connections You must seal off any connections which are not required with M12 screw caps, in order to ensure that the degree of protection (IP 65, IP 66 or IP 67) is achieved. ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 7-127 Technical Specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W H D (mm) 87 110 55 Weight Approx. 250 g Module-specific data Number of outputs 2 Cable length Shielded Max. 30 m Voltages, currents, potentials Electrical isolation No Permissible potential difference Between coil (frame 0 VAC; DC connection) and centralized grounding point (UISO) Power input From supply voltage L+ Max. 110 mA Power loss of the module Typ. 2.3W Analog value formation Resolution (including overrange) 11 bits plus sign Rated value in units: - SIMATIC S7 format: 1728 - SIMATIC S5 format: 1024 Cycle time (all channels) 1 ms Operational limit (entire temperature range with reference to output range) 0.6 ms 6.0 ms Replacement values can be No applied 1 % Basic error (operational limit 0.9 % at 25 C with reference to output range) Temperature error (with reference to output range) 0.01 %/K Crosstalk between outputs > 45 dB Linearity error (with reference to output range) 0.08 % Repeat accuracy (steady state at 25 C with reference to output range) 0.05 % Output ripple (with reference to output range, bandwidth 0 to 50 kHz) 0.05 % Status, alarms, diagnostics Alarms Diagnostic interrupt Diagnostic functions Configurable Group error Red LED (SF) Actuator selection data Output range (rated values), parameterizable -20 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA Load resistance Max. 500 W Inductive load Max. 0.1 mH Current output No-load voltage Settling time For resistive load For capacitive load Interference suppression, error limits Max. 15 V Permissible input current for 40 mA current output (destruction limit) Actuator connection Two-conductor Possible connection 7-128 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Technical Specifications 7.22 SITOP power power supply 24V/10A (6EP1 334-2CA00) Properties The SITOP power 24V/10A power supply, order number 6EP1 334-2CA00, has the following features: Primary switched-mode power supply Rated input voltage 120/230 VAC Rated output voltage 24 VDC, floating, short-circuit-proof and stable at no load Rated output current up to 10 A Output voltage optionally as supply voltage for electronics/sensors and/or load voltage of ET 200X Parameterizable behavior in the event of an error: restart or shutdown following short circuit on the output LEDs for operating mode Basic circuit diagram The figure below shows the basic circuit diagram of the SITOP power power supply. Transformer, elec. isolated + L1 230 VAC N Primary section Secondary section 24 VDC Link 120VAC PE Bus segmentation Display 24 VDC 1L+ 2L+ Temp > U A STORE/RESTART 8/10 A 1L+ 2L+ M - Control Figure 7-36 L+ Basic circuit diagram for SITOP power supply ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 7-129 Technical Specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W H D (mm) 146.5 x 265 x 134 Weight Approx. 1.7 kg Voltages, currents, potentials Input voltage Output voltage Rated value UAN Overall tolerance, static 24 VDC Residual ripple Max. 15 mVss Setting range 22.8 V to 25.2 V 3% Output current Rated value UEN Permissible range 120/230 VAC Frequency Mains 47 Hz to 63 Hz 93 V to 132 VAC 187 V to 264 VAC Min. 20 ms buffering (at UE= 93/187 V; IAN) Rated input current IEN (at 120 V/230 V) 4.3 A/2.6 A Current at make (at UE = 230 V; 25 C) <55 A; 2.5 A2s Recommended circuitbreaker in the supply lead 16 A, Characteristic C Power consumption 270W Efficiency at full load Approx. 89% Device protection Internal line-side fuse T 6.3 A/250 V Rated value IAN To 40 C To 55 C 10 A Overcurrent limitation Typ. 1.1 to 1.3 x IAN Output short-circuit protection Yes Outputs stable at no load Yes Max. 10A Max. 8A Electrical isolation Primary/secondary Yes (SELV as per EN 60950) Status, alarms, diagnostics Status display Green LEDs for 24 V at output terminals Supply voltage available at bus for electronics/ sensors Load voltage available at bus Red LED for shutdown on account of excess temperature 7-130 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 A Order Numbers Should you require additional ET 200X components or PROFIBUS accessories for use with the ET 200X, you will find all the order numbers here. Basic modules Table A-1 Basic modules - order numbers Designation Order number BM 141 DI 8 DC 24V basic module 6ES7 141-1BF12-0XB0 BM 141 DI 8DC 24V ECOFAST basic module with large designation labels 6ES7 141-1BF01-0AB0 BM 141 DI 8DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG basic module 6ES7 141-1BF40-0AB0 BM 142 DO 4 DC 24V/2A basic module 6ES7 142-1BD22-0XB0 BM 143-DESINA FO basic module with large designation labels 6ES7 143-1BF00-0XB0 BM 143-DESINA RS485 basic module with large designation labels 6ES7 143-1BF00-0AB0 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 A-1 Order Numbers Expansion modules Table A-2 Expansion modules - order numbers Description A-2 Order number EM 141 DI 4DC 24V expansion module 6ES7 141-1BD31-0XA0 EM 141 DI 8 DC 24V expansion module 6ES7 141-1BF31-0XA0 EM 141 DI 8DC 24V DIAG expansion module 6ES7 141-1BF30-0XB0 EM 141 DI 8DC 24V expansion module with large designation labels 6ES7 141-1BF41-0XA0 EM 141 DI 8DC 24V DIAG expansion module 6ES7 141-1BF40-0XB0 EM 142 DO 4DC 24V/0.5A expansion module 6ES7 142-1BD30-0XA0 EM 142 DO 4 DC 24V/2A expansion module 6ES7 142-1BD40-0XA0 EM 142 DO 4 DC 24V/2A expansion module 6ES7 142-1BD40-0XB0 EM 142 DO 8DC 24V/1.2A expansion module with large designation labels 6ES7 142-1BF30-0XA0 EM 143-DESINA expansion module with large designation labels 6ES7 143-1BF30-0XB0 EM 144 AI 2U expansion module 6ES7 144-1FB31-0XB0 EM 144 AI 2I expansion module 6ES7 144-1GB31-0XB0 EM 144 AI 2I expansion module 6ES7 144-1GB41-0XB0 EM 144 AI 2RTD expansion module 6ES7 144-1JB31-0XB0 EM 145 AO 2U expansion module 6ES7 145-1FB31-0XB0 EM 145 AO 2I expansion module 6ES7 145-1GB31-0XB0 EM 148-P DI 4DC 24V/ DO 2 x P expansion module 6ES7 148-1DA00-0XA0 EM 148-P DO 16P/CPV10 expansion module 6ES7 148-1EH01-0XA0 EM 148-P DO 16P/CPV14 expansion module 6ES7 148-1EH11-0XA0 PM 148 DO 4DC 24V/2A power module 6ES7 148-1CA00-0XB0 SITOP power 24V/10A power supply unit 6EP1 334-2CA00 CP 142-2 communication processor 6GK7 142-2AH00-0XA0 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Order Numbers Accessories for ET 200X Table A-3 Accessories for ET200X - order numbers Description Connector assembly for PROFIBUS-DP, supply voltage for electronic components/sensors and load voltage (protective shell with 6-pin connector, 2 M16 cable glands and 2 lock nuts) Order number 6ES7 194-1AA01-0XA0 Cover plate 6ES7 194-1JB00-0XA0 (for sealing off unused connectors for PROFIBUS-DP and supply/load voltage; 10 units) M12 coupler plug, 5-pin (for connecting actuators and sensors) On request M12 angular coupler plug, 5-pin (for connecting actuators and sensors; cannot be used in conjunction with an M12 Y connector) On request M12 Y connector, 5-pin (for dual connection of actuators/sensors to digital inputs/outputs) 6ES7 194-1KA01-0XA0 AS interface, M12 screw cap (for sealing off unused inputs and outputs of the ET 200X; 10 units) 3RX9 802-0AA00 Silencer for pneumatic module 6ES7 194-1EA00-0XA0 DIN rail, narrow, length 400 mm for ET 200X electronic submodule 6ES7 194-1GA00-0XA0 DIN rail, narrow, length 640 mm for ET 200X electronic submodule 6ES7 194-1GA10-0XA0 DIN rail, narrow, length 2000 mm for ET 200X electronic submodule 6ES7 194-1GA20-0XA0 DIN rail, wide, length 520 mm for ET 200X electronic module and motor starter/frequency converter 6ES7 194-1GB00-0XA0 DIN rail, wide, length 1000 mm for ET 200X electronic submodule and motor starter/frequency converter 6ES7 194-1GB10-0XA0 Screws with washer assemblies (100 screws M5 x 20, crossed recessed head with washer) for fitting ET 200X modules onto DIN rail 6ES7 194-1KC00-0XA0 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 A-3 Order Numbers Accessories for ET 200X-DESINA / ET 200X-ECOFAST Table A-4 Accessories for ET 200X-DESINA / ET 200X-ECOFAST - order numbers Description Configuration connector 6ES7 194-1KB00-0XA0 ECOFAST hybrid cables (2 copper conductors and 22 copper wires) complete with ECOFAST connectors: 1.5 m 3.0 m 5.0 m 10.0 m 15.0 m 20.0 m 25.0 m 30.0 m 35.0 m 40.0 m 45.0 m 50.0 m 6XV1 830-7BH15 6XV1 830-7BH30 6XV1 830-7BH50 6XV1 830-7BN10 6XV1 830-7BN15 6XV1 830-7BN20 6XV1 830-7BN25 6XV1 830-7BN30 6XV1 830-7BN35 6XV1 830-7BN40 6XV1 830-7BN45 6XV1 830-7BN50 Unprepared ECOFAST hybrid cable (2 copper conductors and 22 copper wires) in various lengths: 20.0 m 50.0 m 100.0 m 6XV1 830-7AN20 6XV1 830-7AN50 6XV1 830-7AT10 ECOFAST hybrid cable, in meters (2 copper conductors and 22 copper wires) A-4 Order number 6XV1 830-7AH10 ECOFAST hybrid cable, fiber-optic cable (2 fiber-optic cables and 22 copper wires) complete with ECOFAST connectors in various lengths: 1.5 m 3.0 m 5.0 m 10.0 m 15.0 m 6XV1 830-6DH15 6XV1 830-6DH30 6XV1 830-6DH50 6XV1 830-6DN10 6XV1 830-6DN15 Unprepared ECOFAST hybrid cable, fiber-optic cable (2 fiber-optic cables and 22 copper wires) in various lengths: 20.0 m 50.0 m 100.0 m 6XV1 830-6CN20 6XV1 830-6CN50 6XV1 830-6CT10 ECOFAST hybrid cable, fiber-optic cable, in metres (2 fiber-optic cables and 22 copper wires) 6XV1 830-6CH10 Cover plate (to seal off unused DESINA/ECOFAST connection sockets); 10 units 6ES7 194-1JB10-0XA0 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Order Numbers Table A-4 Accessories for ET 200X-DESINA / ET 200X-ECOFAST - order numbers, continued Description DESINA/ECOFAST terminating resistor for PROFIBUS-DP with copper conductors: Order number 1 unit 6GK1 905-0DA10 5 units 6GK1 905-0DA00 For preparing the cables: PROFIBUS ECOFAST Hybrid Plug 180 (ECOFAST Cu, 5 units) With pin insert With socket insert PROFIBUS ECOFAST Cyberoptic Hybrid Plug 180 (ECOFAST fiber-optic cable, 5 units) DESINA-compatible With pin insert With socket insert 6GK1 905-0CA00 6GK1 905-0CB00 6GK1 905-0BA00 6GK1 905-0BB00 For the connection between controller and power supply we recommend Harting accessories: Description Order number For the link between the controller and power supply: Media Converter PROFIBUS MCP12P 20 40 004 3647 Address for ordering: HARTING Vertrieb fur Steckverbinder und Systemtechnik GmbH & Co. KG Postfach 2451 D-32381 Minden Tel. + 49 5 71 88 96 - 0 Fax + 49 5 71 88 96 - 2 82 E-mail: de.sales@HARTING.com Internet: http://www.HARTING.com ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 A-5 Order Numbers Connectors for AIs/AOs To connect actuators/sensors to the analog inputs/outputs of the corresponding expansion modules, use 4- or 5-pin M12 coupler plugs. We recommend the following connectors from Binder. Table A-5 Connectors manufactured by Binder - order numbers Description Order number Connector 4-pin Outgoing cable unit PG 7 99-1429-814-04 Connector 4-pin Outgoing cable unit PG 9 99-1429-812-04 Connector 5-pin Outgoing cable unit PG 7 99-1437-814-05 Connector 5-pin Outgoing cable unit PG 9 99-1437-812-05 Address for ordering: Franz Binder GmbH + Co.-74172 Neckarsulm A-6 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Order Numbers Spare parts for ET 200X Table A-6 Spare parts for ET 200X - order numbers Description Order number Labels for ET 200X (10 8 mm) (20 strips of 40 labels) 6ES7 194-1BA000XA0 Labels for ET 200X, ET 200X-DESINA and ET 200X-ECOFAST (20 9 mm) (19 strips of 20 labels) 3RT 1900-1SB50 Plugs for pneumatic module 6ES7 194-1JA00-0XA0 Connector plate (for BM 141, BM 142) 6ES7 194-1FC00-0XA0 Cables for the ET 200X Table A-7 lists all the cables for the ET 200 distributed I/O system which you may require in conjunction with the ET 200X. Table A-7 Network components for the ET 200 distributed I/O system Network components Order number Cables: 2-core, shielded cable (bus cable) 2-core, shielded cable (bus cable) 6XV1 830-0AH10 6XV1 830-0CH10 halogen free 2-core, shielded cable (bus cable) with PUR sheath 6XV1 830-0DH10 2-core, shielded cable (bus cable) with PE sheath 6XV1 830-0BH10 2-core, shielded cable (bus cable) for festooning 6XV1 830-3CH10 Drum cable 6XV1 830-3BH10 Direct-buried cable 6XV1 830-3AH10 Cable, 5-core, uncut (for bus and sensor supply; 6ES7 194-1LY00-0AA0 with PVC sheath) Cable, 5-core, uncut; oil-resistant, drum-capable, 6ES7 194-1LY10-0AA0 conditionally welding-resistant (for bus and sensor supply; with PUR sheath) ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 A-7 Order Numbers MOBY modules The following expansion module can be used with the ET 200X. Table A-8 MOBY modules Order number Network components ASM 473 interface module for MOBY 6GT2 002-0HA10 Manuals for STEP 7 and SIMATIC S7 You require one of the manuals listed below to program and commission the ET 200X with STEP 7. Table A-9 Manuals for STEP 7 and SIMATIC S7 Manual Contents S7-300 Programmable Controller Hardware and Installation etc. Description of the PROFIBUS-DP master interface of CPU 315-2 DP Installing a PROFIBUS-DP network RS 485 repeater S7-400/M7-400 Programmable Controllers Hardware and Installation etc. Description of the PROFIBUS-DP master interface in S7-400 and M7-400 Installing a PROFIBUS-DP network RS 485 repeater System software for S7-300/400 Program design Programming Manual etc. Description of addressing and diagnostics on SIMATIC S7 System software for S7-300/400 System and standard functions Reference Manual Description of the SFCs in STEP 7 A-8 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Order Numbers Manual for the ET 200 in SIMATIC S5 You require the manual listed below to program and commission the ET 200X with COM PROFIBUS. Table A-10 Manual for ET 200 in SIMATIC S5 Manual ET 200 distributed I/O system Order number 6ES5 998-3ES.2 Contents Description of master interface IM 308-C for S5-115U/H, S5-135U and S5-155U/H Description of the S5-95U with the PROFIBUS-DP master interface Description of the procedure for installing a DP system and an FMS system with the CP 5412 (A2) as master Handling COM PROFIBUS Handling FB IM308C/FB 230 Technical guide to PROFIBUS-DP with SIMATIC S7 and STEP 7 Table A-11 Technical Guide to PROFIBUS-DP and SIMATIC S7 Technical guide Order number Decentralization with PROFIBUS-DP In bookshops: ISBN 3-89578-123-1 - Architecture and Fundamentals, Configuration and Use with SIMATIC S7 - From your Siemens agent: A19100-L531-B772 Josef Weigmann, Gerhard Kilian Publicis MCD Verlag, 2nd Edition, 2000 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Contents Instruction manual for a simple introduction to PROFIBUS-DP and implementation of automation tasks with PROFIBUS-DP and SIMATIC S7. Use of PROFIBUS-DP is illustrated for the SIMATIC-related examples. A-9 Order Numbers A-10 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Device Master Files B Device master file A device master file contains all the slave-specific features. The structure of the DDB file is specified in IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1. You can download the device master files from the Internet. You will find all device master files under "Downloads" on the SIMATIC Customer Supports website at http://www.ad.siemens.de/csi/gsd. ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 B-1 Device Master Files Other features Table B-1 Other features of the modules of the ET 200X Basic/expansion module Order number Manufacturer identification Consistency Address scope (bytes) Address range BM 141 DI 8DC 24V 6ES7 141-1BF12-0XB0 803DH Byte 1 Digital BM 141 DI 8DC 24V ECOFAST 6ES7 141-1BF01-0AB0 80D2H Byte 1 Digital BM 141 DI 8DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG 6ES7 141-1BF40-0AB0 80D3H Byte 1 Digital BM 142 DO 4DC 24V/2A 6ES7 142-1BD22-0XB0 803CH Byte 1 Digital BM 143-DESINA FO 6ES7 143-1BF00-0XB0 809AH Byte 2* Digital BM 143-DESINA RS485 6ES7 143-1BF00-0AB0 809AH Byte 2* Digital EM 141 DI 4DC 24V 6ES7 141-1BD31-0XA0 - Byte 1 Digital EM 141 DI 8DC 24V 6ES7 141-1BF31-0XA0 - Byte 1 Digital EM 141 DI 8DC 24V DIAG 6ES7 141-1BF30-0XB0 - Byte 1 Digital EM 141 DI 8DC 24V 6ES7 141-1BF41-0XA0 - Byte 1 Digital EM 141 DI 8DC 24V DIAG 6ES7 141-1BF40-0XB0 - Byte 1 Digital EM 142 DO 4DC 24V/0.5A 6ES7 142-1BD30-0XA0 - Byte 1 Digital EM 142 DO 4DC 24V/2A 6ES7 142-1BD40-0XA0 - Byte 1 Digital EM 142 DO 4DC 24V/2A 6ES7 142-1BD40-0XB0 - Byte 1 Digital EM 142 DO 8DC 24V/1.2A 6ES7 142-1BF30-0XA0 - Byte 1 Digital EM 143-DESINA 6ES7 143-1BF30-0XB0 - Byte 2* Digital EM 144 AI 2U 6ES7 144-1FB31-0XB0 - Word 4 Analog EM 144 AI 2I (20 mA) 6ES7 144-1GB31-0XB0 - Word 4 Analog EM 144 AI 2I (4 to 20 mA) 6ES7 144-1GB41-0XB0 - Word 4 Analog EM 144 AI 2RTD 6ES7 144-1JB31-0XB0 - Word 4 Analog EM 145 AO 2U 6ES7 145-1FB31-0XB0 - Word 4 Analog EM 145 AO 2I 6ES7 145-1GB31-0XB0 - Word 4 Analog EM 148-P DI 4DC 24V/DO 2P expansion module 6ES7 148-1DA00-0XA0 - Byte 1* Digital EM 148-P DO 16P/CPV10 expansion module 6ES7 148-1EH01-0XA0 - Byte 2 Digital EM 148-P DO 16P/CPV14 expansion module 6ES7 148-1EH11-0XA0 - Byte 2 Digital * for inputs and outputs B-2 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Dimesioned Drawings and Pinouts C You will find dimensioned drawings of the most important components of the ET 200X below. You will also find essential pinout information for the ET 200X. Contents of Chapter Section Subject Page C.1 Dimensioned drawings - basic modules C-2 C.2 Dimensioned drawings - expansion modules C-4 C.3 Dimensioned drawing - pneumatic module EM 148-P DI 4 x DC 24 V/DO 2 x P C-5 C.4 Dimensioned drawing - pneumatic interface module EM 148-P DO 16 x P/CPV10 and ...14 C-6 C.5 Dimensioned drawing - power module C-7 C.6 Dimensioned drawing - SITOP power supply unit C-8 C.7 Dimensioned drawings - DIN rails C-9 C.8 Pinout of the ET 200X C-12 C.9 Pinout of the 8-channel expansion modules C-14 C.10 Pinout of the ET 200X-DESINA C-15 C.11 Pinout of the ET 200X-ECOFAST C-16 C.12 Pinout of analog inputs/outputs C-17 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 C-1 Dimesioned Drawings and Pinouts C.1 Dimensioned drawings - basic modules BM 141, BM 142 and BM 147/CPU basic modules 107 110 53.5 28.25 Figure C-1 below is a dimensioned drawing of a BM 141, BM 142, BM 147/CPU basic module with bus connectors. You must add the length of the M16 cable glands and the bending radius of your particular cable to the overall width and depth specified. 90 120 126.8 134 Figure C-1 C-2 Dimensioned drawing of BM 141, BM 142, BM 147/CPU basic module ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Dimesioned Drawings and Pinouts DESINA and ECOFAST basic modules The following figure C-2 shows you the dimensioned drawing of the basic modules BM 141-ECOFAST and BM 143-DESINA with DESINA connectors. 110 178 53.5 28.25 You have to add the bending radius of the DESINA hybrid cable to the specified overall height. You might have to add the length of the coupler plugs and the bending radius of your particular cable to the specified overall depth. 162 83.8 148 107.9 168.4 174.9 Figure C-2 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Dimensioned drawing of the BM 141-ECOFAST, BM 143-DESINA basic modules C-3 Dimesioned Drawings and Pinouts C.2 Dimensioned drawings - expansion modules 110 53.5 28.25 The following figure C-3 shows you the dimensioned drawing of the expansion modules EM 141, EM 142, EM 144, and EM 145. You must add the length of the coupler plugs/Y busbar connection pieces and the bending radius of your particular cable to the overall depth specified. 53 60 86.5 Figure C-3 Dimensioned drawing of EM 141, EM 142, EM 144, EM 145 expansion modules Figure C-4 below is a dimensioned drawing of EM 141 (high design), EM 142 DO 8 x DC 24V/1.2A and EM 143-DESINA expansion modules. You must add the length of the coupler plugs and the bending radius of your particular cable to the specified overall depth. C-4 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 178 53.5 28.25 Dimesioned Drawings and Pinouts 60 53 86.5 Figure C-4 C.3 Dimensioned drawing of EM 141 (high design), EM 142 DO 8 x DC 24V/1.2A and EM 143-DESINA expansion modules Dimensioned drawing - pneumatic module EM 148-P DI 4 y DC 24 V/DO 2 y P 173 53.5 28.25 The dimensioned drawing of the pneumatic module is shown below. You have to add the length and bending radius of the tubing to the specified overall height. 88 60 87 Figure C-5 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Dimensioned drawing of the pneumatic module C-5 Dimesioned Drawings and Pinouts C.4 Dimensioned drawing - pneumatic interface module EM 148-P DO 16 y P/CPV10 and ...14 The dimensioned drawing of the pneumatic interface module is shown below. You must add the depth of the FESTO valve island, and the length and bending radius of the tubing to the specified overall depth. 152 53.5 132 48.25 109.5 55 120 147 Figure C-6 C-6 Dimensioned drawing of the pneumatic interface module ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Dimesioned Drawings and Pinouts C.5 Dimensioned drawing - power module 60 67 87 Figure C-7 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 193 165 53.5 28.25 The diagram below is a dimensioned drawing of a power module. You must add the length of the coupler plugs/Y connectors and the bending radius of your particular cables to the specified overall depth. You must add the bending radius of your particular cable to the specified overall height if the load voltage is looped through. 95 Dimensioned drawing - power module C-7 Dimesioned Drawings and Pinouts C.6 Dimensioned drawing - SITOP power supply unit The figure below shows the dimensioned drawing of the SITOP power power supply. You must add the bending radius of your particular cable to the specified overall height. 283 160.5 265 197 53.5 28.25 8.8 133.5 119.5 146.5 53.5 103.5 126.5 Figure C-8 C-8 Dimensioned drawing of SITOP power ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Dimesioned Drawings and Pinouts C.7 Dimensioned drawings - DIN rails 6ES7 194-1GA00-0XA0 6ES7 194-1GA10-0XA0 6ES7 194-1GA20-0XA0 (without mounting holes) Max. 200 Figure C-9 Dimensioned drawings of the Narrow DIN rails ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 C-9 Dimesioned Drawings and Pinouts Note You must cut the narrow DIN rail (with a length of 2000) to suit your requirements and drill the mounting holes for M8 screws. To ensure that all the ET 200X modules have the specified vibration resistance, the mounting holes should be spaced at even intervals of a maximum 200 mm after initial spacing of 12 mm. C-10 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Dimesioned Drawings and Pinouts 6ES7 194-1GB00-0XA0 6ES7 194-1GB10-0XA0 Figure C-10 Dimensioned drawings of the wide DIN rails ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 C-11 Dimesioned Drawings and Pinouts C.8 Pinout of the ET 200X Figure C-11 below shows the pinout of the ET 200X on a BM 141, BM 142, BM 147/CPU basic module. The arrangement of sockets X1 to X4 is the same on all basic and expansion modules (BM 141, BM 142, EM 141, EM 142, EM 144, EM 145) with digital inputs and outputs. Basic module Socket 4 56 X01 and X10 (supply voltage for electronic components/sensors, PROFIBUS-DP) X01 12 3 4 56 X1 2 1 X02 X2 3 4 X03 (load voltage) 5 12 3 4 56 X3 X4 X03 * 12 3 Figure C-11 Socket X1 X2 C-12 BM 141/142: BM 147/CPU: Pinout 1 2 3 4 5 6 B signal PE PE/-* A signal L+ M 1 2 3 4 5 6 PE L+ M PE L+ M PE not assigned Pinout of the ET 200X (BM 141, BM 142, BM 147/CPU) Pinout of 8-channel DI Pinout of 4-channel DI Pinout of 4-channel DO Pinout of pneumatic module (4-channel DI) 1 Sensor supply output L+ 2 Input signal, channel 4 3 Grounding supply voltage 4 Input signal, channel 0 5 PE 1 Sensor supply output L+ 2 Input signal, channel 1 3 Grounding supply voltage 4 Input signal, channel 0 5 PE 1- 1 Sensor supply output L+ 2 Input signal, channel 5 3 Grounding supply voltage 4 Input signal, channel 1 5 PE 1 Sensor supply output L+ 2- 1- 3 Grounding supply voltage 4 Input signal, channel 1 5 PE 3 Grounding Load current power supply 4 Output signal, channel 1 5 PE 2 Output signal, channel 1 3 Grounding Load current power supply 4 Output signal, channel 0 5 PE 2- 1 Sensor supply output L+ 2 Input signal, channel 1 3 Grounding supply voltage 4 Input signal, channel 0 5 PE 1 Sensor supply output L+ 2 Input signal, channel 3 3 Grounding supply voltage 4 Input signal, channel 2 5 PE ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Dimesioned Drawings and Pinouts Socket X3 X4 Pinout of 8-channel DI Pinout of 4-channel DI Pinout of 4-channel DO 1 Sensor supply output L+ 2 Input signal, channel 6 3 Grounding supply voltage 4 Input signal, channel 2 5 PE 1 Sensor supply output L+ 2 Input signal, channel 3 3 Grounding supply voltage 4 Input signal, channel 2 5 PE 1- 1 Sensor supply output L+ 2 Input signal, channel 7 3 Grounding supply voltage 4 Input signal, channel 3 5 PE 1 Sensor supply output L+ 2- 1- 3 Grounding supply voltage 4 Input signal, channel 3 5 PE 3 Grounding Load current power supply 4 Output signal, channel 3 5 PE ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Pinout of pneumatic module (4-channel DI) - 2 Output signal, channel 3 3 Grounding Load current power supply 4 Output signal, channel 2 5 PE - 2- C-13 Dimesioned Drawings and Pinouts C.9 Pinout of the 8-channel expansion modules Figure C-12 below shows the pinout of the 8-channel DI/DO expansion modules of the ET 200X on an expansion module (high design). The arrangement of sockets X1 to X8 is the same on all expansion modules with digital inputs and outputs. 2 1 3 5 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 Figure C-12 Socket X1 to X8 1 2 3 4 5 C-14 Pinout of the 8-channel DI/DO expansion module Pinout 8-channel DI Sensor supply output L+ not assigned Grounding supply voltage Input signal channel n PE Pinout 8-channel DO 1 2 3 4 5 not assigned not assigned Grounding load current power supply Output signal channel n PE ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Dimesioned Drawings and Pinouts C.10 Pinout of the ET 200X-DESINA Figure C-13 shows you the pinout of the ET 200X-DESINA using the example of the BM 143-DESINA FO basic module. The BM 143-DESINA RS485 basic module has the same pinout on the PROFIBUS-DP connection (pins 5 and 6) but has copper conductors instead of fiber-optic cables. The arrangement of sockets X1 to X8 is identical for all DESINA basic and expansion modules with digital inputs and outputs. 2 X2 X1 1 5 X01 3 4 X02 X3 X4 X5 X6 5 2 1 6 3 4 View of DESINA connections (fiber-optic cables) 5 2 1 X7 6 3 4 Figure C-13 X7 X2 X4 X6 X8 X02 Loop through 1 2 3 4 5 6 L+ (NS*) M (NS*) M (S**) L+ (S**) Signal A (RD***) Signal B (TD***) 1 2 3 4 5 6 L+ (NS*) M (NS*) M (S**) L+ (S**) Signal A (RD***) Signal B (TD***) Pinout of the ET 200X-DESINA Socket X5 X8 Pinout * Non-switched supply voltage ** Switched load voltage *** on the basis of the DESINA specification Looping through X3 X01 Supply (Supply voltage for electronics/ sensors, actuators PROFIBUS-DP) Supply X1 Socket Pinout of the 8-channel DI/DO 1 2 3 4 5 Sensor supply output L+ (NS) Diagnostic input or input with NC function. Grounding supply voltage Digital input or output (DESINA) channels 0, 2, 4 and 6 not assigned 1 2 3 4 5 Sensor supply output L+ (NS) Diagnostic input or input with NC function. Grounding supply voltage Digital input or output (DESINA) channels 1, 3, 5 and 7 not assigned ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 C-15 Dimesioned Drawings and Pinouts C.11 Pinout of the ET 200X-ECOFAST Figure C-14 shows the pinout of the BM 141-ECOFAST 8DI basic module. 2 X2 X1 1 5 X01 3 4 X02 X3 X4 X5 X6 Socket X01 Supply Supply 5 2 1 6 3 4 View of the ECOFAST connections (RS 485) 5 2 1 X7 6 3 4 Looping through Figure C-14 X3 X5 X7 X2 X4 X6 X8 C-16 X8 1 2 3 (Supply voltage 4 for electronics/ sensors, actuators 5 6 PROFIBUS-DP) L+ (NS*) M (NS*) M (S**) L+ (S**) Signal A Signal B X02 Loop through L+ (NS*) M (NS*) M (S**) L+ (S**) Signal A Signal B 1 2 3 4 5 6 * Non-switched supply voltage ** Switched load voltage Pinout of the BM 141-ECOFAST 8DI basic module Pinout of the BM 141-ECOFAST 8DI Socket X1 Pinout 1 2 3 4 5 Sensor supply output L+ (NS) not assigned Grounding supply voltage Digital input channels 0, 2, 4 and 6 not assigned 1 2 3 4 5 Sensor supply output L+ (NS) not assigned Grounding supply voltage Digital input channels 1, 3, 5 and 7 not assigned ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Dimesioned Drawings and Pinouts C.12 Pinout of analog inputs/outputs Figure C-15 below shows the pinout of the inputs/outputs of the ET 200X on an expansion module. The arrangement of the sockets is identical for all expansion modules with analog inputs and outputs. Expansion module with analog inputs/outputs X1 2 1 X2 3 4 Figure C-15 Socket X1 X2 Pinout of expansion module with analog inputs/outputs Pinout of 2-channel AI Pinout of 2-channel AO Voltage/current Current Voltage Current 10 V 20 mA Pt 100 4 to 20 mA 10 V 20 mA 4 to 20 mA 1 L+ 1 L+; channel 0 (+) 1 Qv channel 0 1 QI channel 0 2 Channel 0 (+) 2 Channel 0 (-) 2 - 2 - 3 Ground power supply 3 Ground power supply 3 Ground power supply 3 Ground power supply 4 Channel 0 (-) 4 - 4 - 4 - 1 L+ 1 L+; channel 1 (+) 1 Qv channel 1 1 QI channel 1 2 Channel 1 (+) 2 Channel 1 (-) 2 - 2 - 3 Ground power supply 3 Ground power supply 3 Ground power supply 3 Ground power supply 4 4 4 4 Channel 1 (-) ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 - - - C-17 Dimesioned Drawings and Pinouts C-18 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Glossary Aggregate current Aggregate of the currents of all output channels of a digital output module. Automation system An automation system is a programmable logic controller consisting of at least one CPU, various input and output modules and operator interfaces. Bus Common transmission channel to which all stations are connected; a bus has two defined ends. In the case of the ET 200, the bus is a two-wire or fiber-optic cable. Bus connector The physical link between bus node and bus cable. There is a special bus connector for ET 200X (= connector for PROFIBUS-DP) with a degree of protection rating of IP 65. Chassis ground Chassis ground refers to all the interconnected inactive parts of a piece of equipment that, even in the event of a fault, cannot carry voltage that is dangerous to the touch. Configure Configuring means planning individual components in a distributed I/O system. Device master file A device master file contains all the DP-slave-specific features. The format of the DDB file is specified inIEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1. ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Glossary-1 Glossary DESINA Distributed and Standardized INstAllation technique for machine tools DESINA is an all-inclusive general concept for standardization of installation-relevant components in terms of function and connection technology. End-to-end usage of DESINA-compliant components can produce significant savings in the costs of system planning, implementation and operation. Diagnostic interrupt Diagnostics-compatible modules use diagnostic interrupts to notify the central CPU of system errors. In SIMATIC S7/M7: When an error is detected or disappears (e.g. wire break), ET 200X triggers a diagnostic interrupt, provided the interrupt is enabled. The CPU of the DP master interrupts the processing of the user program and lower priority classes and processes the diagnostic interrupt block (OB 82). In SIMATIC S5: The diagnostic interrupt appears in the station diagnosis. Using cyclical querying of the diagnostic bits in the station diagnosis you can detect errors such as a wire break. Diagnostics Diagnostics means the detection, localization, classification, reporting and evaluation of faults, malfunctions and messages. Diagnostics incorporates monitoring functions which run automatically while the system is in operation. This enhances system availability by reducing setup times and outages. Direct starter A direct starter is a Motor starter which switches a motor on or off directly. It consists of a power circuit-breaker and a contactor. Distributed I/O devices These are input/output units that are not located in the base unit; instead, they are distributed at some distance from the CPU. The following are examples of such units: ET 200M, ET 200B, ET 200C, ET 200U, ET 200X, ET 200L DP/AS-I Link S5-95U with PROFIBUS-DP slave interface Other DP slaves from either Siemens or other vendors The distributed I/O devices are connected to the DP master via PROFIBUS-DP. Glossary-2 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Glossary DP address PROFIBUS address DP master A master that complies with IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1 is described as a DP master. DP slave A slave that is operated on PROFIBUS with the PROFIBUS-DP protocol and that complies with IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1 standard is called a DP slave. DP standard The DP standard is the bus protocol of the ET 200 distributed I/O system based on IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1. DPV0 Cyclic data transfer between the DP master and DP slaves. DPV1 Extension of DPV0 with an acyclic data transfer between the DP master and DP slaves. Equipotential bonding Electrical connection (equipotential bonding conductor) that brings the parts of electrical equipment and other conductive parts to the same or approximately the same potential in order to prevent troublesome or dangerous voltages arising between these parts. Error handling Diagnostics External power supply Power supply for the ET 200X distributed I/O device and the process peripherals connected to it. ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Glossary-3 Glossary FREEZE This is a control command of the DP master to a group of DP slaves. When a DP slave receives the FREEZE control command, it freezes the current status of the inputs and transfers them cyclically to the DP master. After each subsequent FREEZE control command, the DP slave freezes the status of the inputs again. The input data is not transferred from the DP slave to the DP master again cyclically until the DP master sends the UNFREEZE control command. Frequency converter On the ET 200X the frequency converter is used for infinitely variable adjustment of the speed and adaptation of the power of asynchronous motors up to 1.5 kW rated power. Temperature monitoring device and motor brake are integrated. The converter is parameterized appropriately for the connected motor. Operation of the frequency converter is controlled by the software. Ground The conductive mass of earth, the electrical potential of which can be set to zero at any point. In the vicinity of grounding electrodes the potential may not be zero. The term "reference ground" is often used here. Grounding Grounding means to connect a conductive component with the grounding electrode via a ground system. Isolated In the case of isolated input/output modules, the reference potentials of the control and load circuit are galvanically isolated - by means of optical isolators or relay contacts, for example. Input/output circuits can be grouped. Master When they are in possession of the token, masters can send data to and request data from other nodes (= active node). The CPU 315-2 DP and the IM 308-C are examples of DP masters. Motor starter Motor starter is the overall term for Direct and Reversing Starters. Motor starters determine the start-up and direction of rotation of a motor (= load). Glossary-4 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Glossary Node A device that can send, receive or amplify data via the bus, such as a DP master, DP slave, RS 485 repeater or active star coupler. Node address PROFIBUS address Non-isolated In the case of non-isolated input/output modules, the reference potentials of the control and load circuit are electrically connected. Parameterize Parameterizing means sending slave parameters from the DP master to the DP slave. PROFIBUS PROcess FIeld BUS - German process and field bus standard that is defined in IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1. It defines the functional, electrical and mechanical properties of a bit-serial field bus system. PROFIBUS is available with the protocols DP (the German abbreviation for distributed I/O), FMS (= field bus message specification), PA (= process automation), or TF (= technology functions). PROFIBUS address Each bus node must receive a PROFIBUS address to uniquely identify it on the PROFIBUS bus system. The PC/programming device has the PROFIBUS address "0". PROFIBUS addresses 1 to 125 are permissible for the ET 200X distributed I/O device. Reference potential Potential from which the voltages of the circuits involved can be observed and/or measured. Reversing starter A reversing starter is a motor starter which determines a motor's direction of rotation. It consists of a power circuit-breaker and two contactors. ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Glossary-5 Glossary Segment The bus line between two terminating resistors forms a segment. A segment contains 0 to 32 nodes. Segments can be interconnected by means of RS 485 repeaters. Slave A slave can only exchange data with a master when requested by it to do so. By slaves we mean, for example, all DP slaves, such as ET 200B, ET 200X, ET 200M etc. Station number PROFIBUS address SYNC This is a control command of the DP master to a group of DP slaves. By means of the SYNC control command the DP master causes the DP slave to freeze the current statuses of the outputs. In the subsequent frames, the DP slave stores the output data, but the statuses of the outputs remain unchanged. After each new SYNC control command, the DP slave sets the outputs that it has stored as output data. The outputs are not cyclically updated again until the DP master sends the UNSYNC control command. Terminating resistor The terminating resistor is a resistor for adjusting the power on the bus cable; terminating resistors must be used on the cable and segment ends. The terminating resistors in the ET 200X are switched on and off in the basic module. The ET 200X-DESINA connects to the bus by means of a fiber-optic waveguide, so no terminating resistors are required. Transmission rate The transmission rate of a data transfer is measured in bits transmitted per second (transmission rate = bit rate). In the case of the ET 200X, transmission rates of 9.6 kbps to 12 Mbps are possible. Glossary-6 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Index BM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V, pinout, digital inputs, 7-3 24 VDC LED, 5-14 BM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V basic module 24 VDC supply, 4-3 basic circuit diagram, 7-4 24 VDC-LED, 5-19 technical specifications, 7-6 BM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V basic module , parameters, 7-5 A BM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V ECOFAST, pinout, Aggregate current, Glossary-1 digital inputs, 7-8 Alarms, configuration for ET 200X-DESINA, BM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V ECOFAST basic 5-44 module Analog module, pin assignment, C-17 basic circuit diagram, 7-9 Analog value technical specifications, 7-11 measured-value resolution (S5 format), BM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V ECOFAST basic 7-94 module , parameters, 7-10 measured-value resolution (S7 format), BM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG, 7-87 pinout, digital inputs, 7-12 sign, 7-87, 7-94 BM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG basic Analog value representation module measuring range, 7-84 basic circuit diagram, 7-14 SIMATIC S5 format, 7-95 technical specifications, 7-16 SIMATIC S7 format, 7-88 BM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG basic Automation system, Glossary-1 module , parameters, 7-15 BM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A, pin assignment, digital outputs, 7-18 BM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A basic module B basic circuit diagram, 7-19 Bared length, 4-17 parameters, 7-20 example, 4-17 pin assignment, digital outputs, 7-18 Basic module, 1-5 technical specifications, 7-20 pin assignment, C-12 BM 143-DESINA expansion module, Basic module BM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V, pinout, parameters, 7-67 digital inputs, 7-3 BM 143-DESINA FO, pinout, digital Basic module BM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V inputs/outputs, 7-22 ECOFAST, pinout, digital inputs, 7-8 BM 143-DESINA FO basic module, pinout, Basic module BM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V digital inputs/outputs, 7-22 ECOFAST DIAG, pinout, digital inputs, 7-12 BM 143-DESINA RS485, pinout, digital Basic module BM 143-DESINA FO inputs/outputs, 7-28 basic circuit diagram, 7-23 Bus, Glossary-1 parameter, 7-24 Bus connector, Glossary-1 technical specifications, 7-26 Bus fault, display, 5-13 Basic module BM 143-DESINA RS485 Bus parameters, setting, 6-4 basic circuit diagram, 7-29 parameter, 7-30 pinout, digital inputs/outputs, 7-28 C technical specifications, 7-32 Baud rate, settings, 6-4 Cable types, suitable, 4-12 BF LED, 5-13 Cables, outside diameter, 4-17 Zahlen ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Index-1 Index CE, certification, 6-2 Certification, CE, 6-2 Changes since previous version, manual, iii Channel-specific diagnosis, 5-39 Chassis ground, Glossary-1 Climatic environmental conditions, 6-6 Commissioning, 5-1 ET 200X, 5-7 Communication processor, CP 142-2, 1-16 Components, 1-5 Compressed air, 3-13 feeding, 3-11 oil types, 7-73 properties, 7-72 Configuration, electrical, 4-6 Configuration connector, 3-16, 3-18 Configuration error, 5-23 Configuration of ET 200X-DESINA, 5-3 Configuration options, 2-3 connection of ET 200X, 2-3 ET 200X with power modules, 2-17 ET 200X with SITOP power, 2-11 Configure, Glossary-1 Connecting loads to analog outputs, 7-109 sensors to analog inputs, 7-106 to protective ground, 4-30, 4-32 Connection, of tubing, 3-12 Connector DESINA, 4-34 removing, 4-16 unplugging, 4-33 Connectors design, 4-14 installing, 4-15 pinout, 4-18, 4-19 plugging in, 4-33 wiring, 4-15 Contents of the manual, iv Core cross-section, 4-17 cable, 4-12 Cores bared length, 4-17 number of, 4-17 Coupler plug M12, unplugging, 4-33 CPV10, 1-12 CPV14, 1-12 CSA certification, 6-3 Current consumption, raising limit, 2-16 D DC 24V-NS LED, 5-15 DC 24V-S LED, 5-16 Index-2 Definition grounded supply, 4-4 of electromagnetic compatibility, 6-4 of station status, 5-34 Degree of protection, 1-3, 4-20, 6-9, 6-9 Delivery package, iv DESINA connector, 4-34 hybrid cable, 4-12 Device master file, 5-9, B-1, Glossary-1 Devices, connectable on PROFIBUS-DP, 1-2 Diagnosis channel-specific, 5-39 DP slave, 5-27 extended, 5-27 ID-specific, 5-37 interrupt section for ET 200X-DESINA, 5-43 module status, 5-38 reading out, 5-29 Diagnostic interrupt, 5-22, Glossary-2 triggering, 5-25 Diagnostics, Glossary-2 parameterizable, 5-20 using LEDs, 5-13 with STEP 5 or STEP 7, 5-27 DIL switch for setting the PROFIBUS address, 3-17 PROFIBUS address, 3-16 Dimensioned drawing basic module, C-2 basic module BM 141-ECOFAST, C-3 basic module BM 143-DESINA FO, C-3 basic module BM 143-DESINA RS485, C-3 DIN rail wide, 3-5, C-11 DIN rails narrow, 3-4, C-9 EM 143-DESINA expansion module, C-4 expansion module, C-4 installation on firm base, 3-15 pneumatic interface module, C-6 pneumatic module, C-5 power module, C-7 SITOP power, C-8 DIN rail, 3-2 DIN rails narrow, dimensioned drawings, 3-4, C-9 DIN rails wide, dimensioned drawings, 3-5, C-11 DIP switch, connecting a terminating resistor, 3-20 Direct starter, Glossary-2 Disassembly, pneumatics components, 3-15 Display, status, 5-17 Distributed I/O device, 1-2, Glossary-2 Double wiring, actuators/sensors, 4-27 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Index DP address, Glossary-3 DP master, 1-2, 1-6, 1-9, Glossary-3 DP slave, 1-2, Glossary-3 DP standard, Glossary-3 EM 142 DO 8 x DC 24V/1.2A, pin assignment, digital outputs, 7-62 EM 142 DO 8 x DC 24V/1.2A expansion module basic circuit diagram, 7-63 pin assignment, digital outputs, 7-62 technical specifications, 7-64 E EM 143-DESINA, pinout, digital inputs/outputs, Electrical configuration, 4-6 7-65 Electrical phenomena, protection against, 4-3 EM 143-DESINA expansion module Electromagnetic compatibility, 6-4 basic circuit diagram, 7-66 ELECTRONIC/SENSOR 1L+-LED, 5-19 pinout, digital inputs/outputs, 7-65 EM 141 DI 4 x DC 24V, pinout, digital inputs, technical specifications, 7-68 7-34 EM 144 AI 2 x I (+/-20mA), pinout, analog EM 141 DI 4 x DC 24V expansion module inputs, 7-114 basic circuit diagram, 7-35 EM 144 AI 2 x I (+/-20mA) expansion module technical specifications, 7-36 basic circuit diagram, 7-115 EM 141 DI 8 x DC 24 V DIAG expansion pinout, analog inputs, 7-114 module, parameters, 7-42, 7-49 technical specifications, 7-115 EM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V EM 144 AI 2 x I (4 to 20mA), pinout, analog pin assignment, digital inputs, 7-37 inputs, 7-117 pinout, digital inputs, 7-37, 7-44 EM 144 AI 2 x I (4 to 20mA) expansion EM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V (6ES7 module, basic circuit diagram, 7-118 141-1BF40-0XA0) expansion module , EM 144 AI 2 x I expansion module (4 to 20mA) technical specifications, 7-46 pinout, analog inputs, 7-117 EM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V DIAG, pinout, digital technical specifications, 7-119 inputs, 7-40, 7-47 EM 144 AI 2 x RTD, pinout, analog inputs, EM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V DIAG expansion 7-120 module (6ES7 141-1BF40-0XB0), basic EM 144 AI 2 x RTD expansion module circuit diagram, 7-41, 7-48 basic circuit diagram, 7-121 EM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V expansion module pinout, analog inputs, 7-120 (6ES7 141-1BF30-0XA0) technical specifications, 7-122 basic circuit diagram, 7-38 EM 144 AI 2 x U, pinout, analog inputs, 7-111 technical specifications, 7-38 EM 144 AI 2 x U expansion module EM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V expansion module basic circuit diagram, 7-112 (6ES7 141-1BF40-0XA0) pinout, analog inputs, 7-111 basic circuit diagram, 7-45 technical specifications, 7-112 technical specifications, 7-50 EM 145 AO 2 x I, pinout, analog outputs, 7-126 EM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V expansion module EM 145 AO 2 x I expansion module (6ES7 141-1BF40-0XB0), technical basic circuit diagram, 7-127 specifications, 7-43 pinout, analog outputs, 7-126 EM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/0.5A, pinout, digital technical specifications, 7-128 outputs, 7-51 EM 145 AO 2 x U, pinout, analog inputs, 7-123 EM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/0.5A expansion EM 145 AO 2 x U expansion module module basic circuit diagram, 7-124 basic circuit diagram, 7-52 pinout, analog inputs, 7-123 technical specifications, 7-53 technical specifications, 7-125 EM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A EM 148-P DI 4 x DC 24V/DO 2 x P, pin pin assignment, digital outputs, 7-57 assignment, digital inputs, 7-70 pinout, digital outputs, 7-54 EM 148-P DI 4 x DC 24V/DO 2 x P expansion EM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A expansion module module basic circuit diagram, 7-55, 7-58 basic circuit diagram, 7-71 pin assignment, digital outputs, 7-57 pin assignment, digital inputs, 7-70 technical specifications, 7-56, 7-61 pneumatic connection diagram, 7-71 EM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A expansion module technical specifications, 7-72 , parameters, 7-59 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Index-3 Index EM 148-P DO 16 x P/CPV10, features, 7-74 EM 148-P DO 16 x P/CPV10 expansion module basic circuit diagram, 7-74 technical specifications, 7-75 EM 148-P DO 16 x P/CPV14, features, 7-76 EM 148-P DO 16 x P/CPV14 expansion module basic circuit diagram, 7-76 features, 7-76 technical specifications, 7-77 EMC, 4-31, 4-32, 6-4 EMERGENCY STOP devices, 4-2 Emission of radio interference, 6-5 Equipotential bonding, Glossary-3 Error handling, Glossary-3 ET 200X commissioning, 5-7 features, 1-6 installing, 3-6 installing on DIN rail, 3-6 range of modules, 1-5 wired, 4-36 wiring, 4-11 Expansion module, 1-5 number per ET 200X, 2-13, 2-16 Expansion module EM 141 DI 4 x DC 24V, pinout, digital inputs, 7-34 Expansion module EM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V, pinout, digital inputs, 7-44 Expansion module EM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V (6ES7 141-1BF30-0XA0), pinout, digital inputs, 7-37 Expansion module EM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V (6ES7 141-1BF40-0XA0), pinout, digital inputs, 7-44 Expansion module EM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V (6ES7 141-1BF40-0XB0), pinout, digital inputs, 7-41, 7-48 Expansion module EM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V DIAG, pinout, digital inputs, 7-40, 7-47 Expansion module EM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/0.5A, pinout, digital outputs, 7-51 Expansion module EM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A, pinout, digital outputs, 7-54 Expansion module EM 148-P DO 16 x P/CPV10, features, 7-74 Extended diagnosis, 5-27 External power supply, Glossary-3 Index-4 F FB 192 "IM308C", 5-31 FB 230, 5-29 Features of ET 200X, 1-6 of ET 200X-DESINA, 1-8 Four-wire measuring transducer, 7-106 connection, 7-108 FREEZE, Glossary-4 Frequency converter, Glossary-4 number per ET 200X, 2-13 Frequency converters, 1-6 G General technical specifications, 6-1 Ground, Glossary-4 Grounded supply, 4-4 Grounding, 4-1 analog modules, 4-32 Guide, through the manual, iv H Hardware interrupt, triggering, 5-26 I I/O device, distributed, 1-2 ID-specific diagnosis, 5-37 Identification code for Australia, 6-2 IEC 61131, 6-2 Important information, iii Install, pneumatic-interface module, 3-14 Installation, 3-1 sequence, 3-1 SITOP power, 3-7 valve island, 3-13 Installation position, of the ET 200X, 3-2 Installing ET 200X, 3-6 pneumatic components, 3-11 Insulation testing, 6-9 Integrating the DDB file in the configuration software, 5-9 Interrupts, 5-24, 5-43 from station diagnosis, 5-53 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Index IP 65, 6-9 IP 66, 6-9 IP 67, 6-9 Isolated, Glossary-4 Isolation, between..., 4-6 Motor starter, Glossary-4 number per ET 200X, 2-13 Motor starters, 1-6 N L LED 24 VDC, 5-14, 5-19 BF, 5-13 DC 24V-NS, 5-15 DC 24V-S, 5-16 display, 1-6 ELECTRONIC/SENSOR 1L+, 5-19 LOAD 2L+, 5-19 ON, 5-13 RUN, 5-15 SF, 5-13, 5-15 status, 5-17 status indication, 5-13 TEMP >, 5-19 LED red/yellow for pin 2, 5-16, 5-18 LED; yellow for pin 4, 5-16, 5-18 LEDs, indicators, 1-8 Limits of travel of pneumatic cylinders, retrieving, 7-73 LOAD 2L+-LED, 5-19 Load supply voltage, feeding, 2-8 Load voltage, feeding, 2-10 Loads, connecting to analog outputs, 7-109 Lower limit violation, 5-23 NEMA, 6-10 Network, PROFIBUS-DP, 1-3 Node, Glossary-5 Node address, Glossary-5 Non-isolated, Glossary-5 Non-return valve, 3-12 Number expansion module per ET 200X, 2-13 expansion modules per ET 200X, 2-16 O OB 40, 5-26 OB 82, 5-22, 5-25 Oils, for compressed air, 7-73 ON LED, 5-13 Operating mode of the DP master, effect on analog value, 7-103 Order numbers, A-1 Overall configuration in TN-S system, 4-5 P Parameter BM 143-DESINA FO, 7-24 BM 143-DESINA RS485, 7-30 Parameter assignment error, 5-23 Parameterizable diagnostic messages, 5-20 M Parameterize, Glossary-5 M12 coupler plugs, 4-22 Parameters plugging in, 4-33 analog inputs and outputs, 7-85 M16 cable gland, 4-14 BM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V basic module, 7-5 Manual BM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V ECOFAST basic changes since previous version, iii module, 7-10 purpose of, iii BM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V ECOFAST DIAG Manual pack, 1-17 basic module, 7-15 Manuals, other, v BM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A basic module, Manufacturer ID, structure, 5-36 7-20 Master PROFIBUS address, structure, 5-36 BM 143-DESINA, 7-67 Masters, Glossary-4 EM 141 DI 8 x DC 24 V DIAG expansion Maximum configuration, 2-13, 2-16 module, 7-42, 7-49 Measured-value resolution EM 142 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A, 7-59 analog value (S5 format), 7-94 PM 148 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A, 7-80 analog value (S7 format), 7-87 Pin assignment Measuring sensor, connecting to analog inputs, analog module , C-17 7-106 basic module, C-12 Mechanical environmental conditions, 6-6 DESINA connector, C-14 Module status, 5-38 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Index-5 Index Pinout BM 141 DI 8 x DC 24V ECOFAST, C-16 BM 141-DI 8 x DC 24V ECOFAST, 4-21 BM 143-DESINA FO, 4-21 connector for load power supply, 4-19 connector for PROFIBUS-DP, 4-18 connectors for supply voltage/sensors, 4-18 DESINA connector, 4-21, C-15 Plugging in, connectors, 4-33 PM 148 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A, pin assignment, digital outputs, 7-79 PM 148 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A expansion module parameters, 7-80 pin assignment, digital outputs, 7-79 PM 148 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A expansion module , properties, 7-78 PM 148 DO 4 x DC 24V/2A power module basic circuit diagram, 7-79 technical specifications, 7-82 Pneumatic components, 1-6 Pneumatic connection diagram, EM 148-P DI 4 x DC 24V/DO 2 x P, 7-71 Pneumatic cylinders, limit of travel retrieval, 7-73 Pneumatic interface module, 1-12 address assignment, 1-13, 7-75, 7-77 number per ET 200X, 2-13 Pneumatic module, 1-11 diameter of tubing, 3-11 silencer connection, 3-11 Pollution severity, 6-9 Power connector, unplugging, 4-33 Power connectors, plugging in, 4-33 Power input restriction due to, 2-16 restrictions imposed by, 2-13 Power module, 1-14, 7-78 Product overview , 1-1 PROFIBUS, Glossary-5 PROFIBUS address, 1-6, Glossary-5 location of the DIL switches, 3-16 modifying, 3-19 setting, 3-16, 3-18 PROFIBUS standard, 6-2 PROFIBUS-DP, 1-2 network, 1-3 PROFIBUS-DP, specifications, B-1 Protection, external, 4-10 Protection against external electrical phenomena, 4-3 Protective ground connecting to basic module, 4-30 connecting to expansion modules with AI/AO , 4-32 Protective measures, 4-4 Index-6 Pulse-shaped interference, 6-4 R Range of modules, ET 200X, 1-5 Rated flow, of air, 1-12 Rated voltage, 6-10 Reference potential, Glossary-5 Regulations for operation, 4-2 Required basic knowledge, iii Reset time, 7-85 Resistance thermometer, connecting, 7-109 Restrictions on maximum configuration, 2-13 Restrictions on the maximum system configuration, 2-16 Reversing starter, Glossary-5 Rules connector wiring, 4-17 general, 4-2 RUN LED, 5-15 S S7 diagnostics, 5-28 Safety class, 6-9 Safety regulations, 4-2 Scope of validity, iii of the manual, iii Segment, Glossary-6 Settings, SITOP power, 4-39 SF LED, 5-13, 5-15 SFC 13 "DP NRM_DG", 5-29 SFC 59 "RD_REC", 5-29 Shipping conditions, 6-6 Short-circuit to L+, 5-23 Short-circuit to M, 5-23 Sign, analog value, 7-87, 7-94 Silencer, 3-12 connecting to pneumatic module, 3-11 SIMATIC S5 format, analog value representation, 7-95 SIMATIC S7 format, analog value representation, 7-88 Sine-shaped interference, 6-5 SITOP power, 1-15 basic circuit diagram, 7-129 properties, 7-129 settings, 4-39 technical specifications, 7-130 wiring, 4-37 Slave, Glossary-6 Slave diagnosis, 5-27 Slave-diagnosis, structure extended diagnosis, 5-32 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Index Slot rule, pneumatic-interface module, 1-12 Slot rules, pneumatic interface module, 2-13 Sockets arrangement on analog module, C-17 arrangement on basic and expansion modules, C-12 pin assignment, C-12, C-17 unused, 4-35 Start-up, plant, 4-2 Startup ET 200X, 5-11 ET 200X-DESINA, 5-12 Station number, Glossary-6 Station status definition, 5-34 structure, 5-34 Status display, 5-17 Status indication, LED, 5-13 Storage conditions, 6-6 Supply, 4-4 Supply voltage effect on analog value, 7-103 effect on digital value, 7-60, 7-81 failure, 7-60, 7-81, 7-104 feeding, 2-3 SYNC, Glossary-6 System fault, display, 5-13, 5-15 T T-plug connection, 3-13 Technical specifications, 7-1 5-core cable, 4-13 climatic environmental conditions, 6-6 electromagnetic compatibility, 6-4 general, 6-1 mechanical environmental conditions, 6-6 PROFIBUS-DP, B-1 transport and storage conditions, 6-6 TEMP >-LED , 5-19 Terminating resistor, Glossary-6 connecting, 3-20 Test voltage, 6-9 TN-S system, 4-5 Transmission rate, Glossary-6 permissible, 1-8 permitted, 1-6 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06 Tubing connecting to pneumatic module, 3-12 diameter, 3-11 Two-wire measuring transducer, 7-106 connecting, 7-107 U UL recognition, 6-2 Unplugging, of connector, 4-33 Usage of ET 200X, 1-3 of pneumatic module, 1-11 V Valve 4/2-way, 1-11, 7-71 service connection, 3-11 Valve island, 1-12 installing, 3-13 Voltage sensor, 7-106 connecting, 7-106 W Waste air, 3-12 Wire break, 5-23, 7-90, 7-98 constraints, 5-20 Wire end ferrules, 4-17 Wiring, 4-1 ET 200X, 4-11 of SITOP power, 4-37 procedure, 4-11 Wiring rules, connectors, 4-17 Working connection, valve, 3-11 Y Y connectors, 4-27 plugging in, 4-33 Y-connector, unplugging, 4-33 Index-7 Index Index-8 ET 200X Distributed I/O Device EWA 4NEB 780601602-06